Error 186 hdc overflow mimaki

MAINTENANCE MANUAL > Troubleshooting > Details on Errors and Malfunctions > List of Error Messages

Model SWJ-320S Issued 2012.07.19 Revised 2013.03.08 F/W ver

7.1.2 List of Error Messages

 List of Error Messages ?2/5?

No.

LCD

ERROR 151

9

MAIN PCB V1R2

ERROR 152

10

MAIN PCB V2R5

ERROR 153

11

MAIN PCB V3R3

ERROR 154

12

MAIN PCB V05

ERROR 155

13

MAIN PCB V36-1

ERROR 156

14

MAIN PCB V5B

ERROR 157

15

MAIN PCB VTT

ERROR 158

16

MAIN PCB V36-2

ERROR 18a

17

MAIN PCB V_CORE

ERROR 18b

18

MAIN PCB V3R3B

ERROR 18c

19

MAIN PCB V12

ERROR 15f

HEAD DRIVE HOT

20

ERROR 171

NEW HEAD CONNECT

21

ERROR 186

22

HDC OVERFLOW

ERROR 186

23

HDC UNDERFLOW

ERROR 187

24

HDC SLEW RATE

ERROR 188

HDC MEMORY

25

ERROR 18e

FLS NOT COMP [12__]

26

ERROR 18f

OFFSET START [12__]

27

ERROR 18f

OFFSET END [12__]

28

© 2013 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.

Cause

Main board 1.2V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 2.5V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 3.3V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 5V power supply is abnormal.

Main board 36-1V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 5VB power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board VTT power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 36-2V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board V_CORE power supply is

abnormal.

Main board 1.5V power supply is abnor-

mal.

Main board 12V power supply is abnor-

mal.

COM driver becomes the high tempera-

ture.

New Print Head was recognized.

Compare S/N written in the head memory

with S/N stored in the machine.

Wave shape overflow

Wave shape data is abnormal.

Wave shape underflow

Wave shape data is abnormal.

Wave shape slew rate error

Wave shape data is abnormal.

Wave shape memory error

At wave shape memory writing, it cannot

be written due to address conflict.

Flashing control error

Flashing for the head which is connected

the HDC PCB that displayed number on

the LCD can not be completed.

Control error to Head voltage

Offset of the HDC PCB that displayed

number on the LCD can not be started.

Control error to Head voltage

Offset of the HDC PCB that displayed

number on the LCD can not be ended.

Remark

1.0

List of Countermeasures

1. Check the output pressure of the DC power supply (36V)

and the DC power supply (5V).

2. Replace the power supply above.

3. Replace the MAIN PCB with a new one.

1. Check the operation of the HDC PCB cooling fan.

2. Disconnect and connect the FFC located between the

HDC PCB and the MAIN PCB.

3. Replace the HDC PCB with a new one.

4. Replace the Print Head with a new

It is normal that an error occurs only at the time of the first

start after having connected a new head.

It is abnormal that an error occurs at the time of start every

time..

1. Check connection between the HDC PCB from the Print

Head

2. Replace the HDC PCB with a new one.

3. Replace the Print Head with a new

1. Pull out/ insert cable between HDC PCB and MAIN PCB.

(FFC changes PCB, Optical conversion PCB)

2. Replace the HDC PCB with a new one.

3. Replace the Optical conversion PCB with a new one.

4. Replace the FFC changes PCB with a new one.

5. Replace cable between HDC PCB and MAIN PCB.

6. Replace the MAIN PCB with a new

1. Pull out/ insert cable between HDC PCB and MAIN PCB.

(FFC changes PCB, Optical conversion PCB)

2. Replace the HDC PCB with a new one.

3. Replace the Optical conversion PCB with a new one.

4. Replace the FFC changes PCB with a new one.

5. Replace cable between HDC PCB and MAIN PCB.

6. Replace the MAIN PCB with a new

7. Replace the Print Head which is connected HDC PCB that

displays error with a new

one.

Rev.

1.2

(Refer to 3.3.1)

1

2

3

4

(Refer to 6.4.7)

one.

(Refer to 3.3.1)

5

(Refer to 6.4.7)

6

one.

(Refer to 3.3.1)

7

one.(Refer to 3.3.1)

8

one.(Refer to 3.3.1)

(Refer to 3.3.1)

7.1.2

R.1.2

P.2

Вернуться в «Принтеры MIMAKI»

MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
URL: http://mimaki.com/
Original instructions
D203118-13




i
CAUTION ........................................................................................ v
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY ............................................................ v
Requests  .............................................................................................. v
FCC Statement (USA) .......................................................................... v
Television/Radio Reception Interference  ............................................. v
Foreword .........................................................................................vi
About usable ink .................................................................................. vi
On This Operation manual  .................................................................. vi
Using this Machine Safely  ..............................................................vi
Symbols ............................................................................................... vi
Safety interlock .................................................................................... ix
Warning labels  ................................................................................ x
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY .............................................xiii
Chapter 1 Before Use
About installing this machine ........................................................ 1-2
Setup Location ...................................................................................1-2
Working Environmental Temperature.................................................1-2
About Ventilation Equipment..............................................................1-2
About fixing machine..........................................................................1-2
Moving This Machine .........................................................................1-2
Names of Parts and Functions .....................................................1-3
Front Side of the Machine ..................................................................1-3
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine ..........................................1-4
Operation Panel .................................................................................1-5
Media sensor......................................................................................1-7
Carriage..............................................................................................1-7
Nozzle Check Unit (NCU)...................................................................1-7
Indicator..............................................................................................1-7
Capping station ..................................................................................1-8
Pinch rollers and Feed rollers.............................................................1-8
Connecting Cables ....................................................................... 1-8
Connecting the LAN cable..................................................................1-8
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable ..................................................1-8
Connecting Power Supply Cable........................................................1-9
Fill ink in the ink tank and charging............................................. 1-10
Caution in handling of ink bottles .....................................................1-12
Media .......................................................................................... 1-13
Usable sizes of media ......................................................................1-13
Caution in handling of medias..........................................................1-13
Restrictions on Using Media.............................................................1-13
About the emergency switch....................................................... 1-14
The position of the emergency switch..............................................1-14
If you feel the danger........................................................................1-15
Chapter 2 Basic Operations
Workflow ....................................................................................... 2-2
Table of contents




ii
Turning the Power ON/OFF ..........................................................2-3
Turning the Power ON........................................................................2-3
Turning the Power OFF......................................................................2-3
Setting a Media .............................................................................2-4
Checking the Spacers ........................................................................2-4
Installing the Antistatic Fabric.............................................................2-5
Setting the Head Gap.........................................................................2-6
Note for media setting ........................................................................2-6
Setting a roll media.............................................................................2-7
Preparation to install Take-up tension bar weight ............................2-18
Changing the printing origin .............................................................2-18
Preparing the Color Fixation Device ...........................................2-19
Name and Function of Each Part of The Color Fixation Device.......2-19
Prepare Color Fixation Device .........................................................2-20
Operation Menu of Color fixation Device..........................................2-21
Setting Menu List..............................................................................2-23
Setting color fixing temperature........................................................2-23
Flow of color fixation device operation .............................................2-25
Warming Up .....................................................................................2-27
Media Setting ...................................................................................2-27
Adjusting the opening at the aperture plate......................................2-27
Processing when media is terminated..............................................2-28
Resetting the proper temperature ....................................................2-29
Other Settings ..................................................................................2-29
Setting the Color Fixation Device from the Printer ...........................2-31
Printing Workflow .............................................................................2-32
Test Printing................................................................................2-33
Test Printing .....................................................................................2-33
Head Cleaning ............................................................................2-34
About head cleaning.........................................................................2-34
Perform head cleaning depending on the test printing result ...........2-34
Setting of Media Correction.........................................................2-35
Setting of Media Correction..............................................................2-35
Correct the ink drop position for bidirectional printing ............................................2-36
Printing Data ...............................................................................2-37
Starting a Printing Operation ............................................................2-37
Stopping a Printing Operation ..........................................................2-37
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear) ...............................................2-37
Behavior after printing has been completed.....................................2-38
Chapter 3 Setup
About Setup menu ........................................................................3-2
Setup menu table ...............................................................................3-3
Register the optimal print conditions to match the use.......................3-5
Setting of Media Correction................................................................3-6
If the Positions of Dots Shift... ............................................................3-7
Setting the color fixation device..........................................................3-8
Setting of Logical Seek.......................................................................3-8
Setting of Overprint ............................................................................3-9
Setting of Drying Time........................................................................3-9
Setting of Left and Right Margins .......................................................3-9
Setting of Refresh...............................................................................3-9




iii
Setting of Refresh Left......................................................................3-10
Setting of Drying Fan........................................................................3-10
Setting of Feed Speed......................................................................3-10
Setting of MAPS4.............................................................................3-11
Setting of Auto Nozzle Maint............................................................3-12
Setting Interval wiping ......................................................................3-15
Setting Head Gap.............................................................................3-15
About Machine Setup menu ....................................................... 3-16
Machine Setup menu table...............................................................3-17
Setting a AUTO Power-off................................................................3-18
Setting Feeding unit .........................................................................3-18
Setting Take-up unit .........................................................................3-19
Setting the Display of Media Remain ...............................................3-19
Setting Time .....................................................................................3-19
Setting Unit (Temperature/ Length)..................................................3-19
Setting a Key Buzzer........................................................................3-20
Selecting the head line to use ..........................................................3-20
Setting the Media Detect/Width........................................................3-20
Setting a Drying Feed.......................................................................3-20
Setting the Confirm...........................................................................3-21
Setting the amount of blank space between printed lines ................3-21
Setting the feed mode of the space of no data to be printed............3-21
Set the network ................................................................................3-22
Setting event mail function ...............................................................3-22
Setting the Setting Lock function......................................................3-26
Setting a LANGUAGE ......................................................................3-26
Initializing the Settings......................................................................3-26
About Information menu ............................................................. 3-27
Information menu table.....................................................................3-27
Displaying the Information................................................................3-28
Displaying the Information of this machine.......................................3-28
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Maintenance ................................................................................. 4-2
Precautions for Maintenance..............................................................4-2
About Cleaning Solution.....................................................................4-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces...........................................................4-2
Cleaning the Platen............................................................................4-2
Cleaning the Lapel Bar (Take-up Side)..............................................4-3
Cleaning the Tension Roller...............................................................4-3
Cleaning the Brake Roller ..................................................................4-4
Cleaning the Ink Landing Plate ..........................................................4-4
Cleaning the Fabric Retainer..............................................................4-4
Maintaining the Grit Roller..................................................................4-4
Cleaning the Color Fixation Device ....................................................4-6
Cleaning the Area around Flushing Unit....................................... 4-6
Cleaning the Flushing BOX Sensor....................................................4-6
Cleaning the ink receiving sponge .....................................................4-7
About Maintenance Menu............................................................. 4-8
Maintenance menus at-a-glance........................................................4-9
Maintaining the Capping Station................................................. 4-10
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap ............................................................4-10




iv
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage ...............................................4-12
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long Time (Custody Wash)...4-12
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area around It............................4-14
When nozzle missing Cannot Be Solved ....................................4-15
Washing the Head Nozzle................................................................4-15
Nozzle Recovery Function ...............................................................4-16
Automatic Maintenance Function................................................4-19
Setting the Refreshing level .............................................................4-19
Setting the Cleaning level.................................................................4-19
Charging ink................................................................................4-20
Replacing the Waste Ink Tank ....................................................4-21
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation Message Appears .......................4-21
For the operation limitation by the amount of waste ink ...................4-23
Replacing consumables..............................................................4-24
Replacing the wiper..........................................................................4-24
Replacing the HF filter......................................................................4-24
Discard the expired ink.....................................................................4-25
Replacing the Ink Tank.....................................................................4-26
Replacing the ink absorber...............................................................4-27
Tank Calibration ...............................................................................4-28
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ............................................................................5-2
Power does not turn on ......................................................................5-2
The machine does not start printing ...................................................5-2
The temperature of the heater does not rise to the set value.............5-2
Media gets jammed / media is soiled .................................................5-3
Image quality is poor ..........................................................................5-3
Nozzle is clogged ...............................................................................5-3
Ink tank warning appears ...................................................................5-4
In case of ink leakage.........................................................................5-4
If an error related to the Sub Tank occurs (Error 618 to 61b) ............5-4
When media heaves up at feeding.....................................................5-4
Warning / Error Messages ............................................................5-5
Warning messages.............................................................................5-5
Error messages ................................................................................5-12
Chapter 6 Appendix
Specifications................................................................................6-2
Machine specifications .......................................................................6-2
Ink specifications ................................................................................6-3
Supply item list ...................................................................................6-4
Sheet for inquiry............................................................................6-5




CAUTION
v
CAUTION
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OF MIMAKI SHALL BE THE
SOLE  AND  EXCLUSIVE  WARRANTY  AND  IS  IN  LIEU
OF  ALL  OTHER  WARRANTIES,  EXPRESS  OR
IMPLIED,  INCLUDING,  BUT  NOT  LIMITED  TO,  ANY
IMPLIED  WARRANTY  OF  MERCHANTABILITY  OR
FITNESS,  AND  MIMAKI  NEITHER  ASSUMES  NOR
AUTHORIZES  DEALER  TO  ASSUME  FOR  IT  ANY
OTHER  OBLIGATION  OR  LIABILITY  OR  MAKE  ANY
OTHER  WARRANTY  OR  MAKE  ANY  OTHER
WARRANTY  IN  CONNECTION  WITH  ANY  PRODUCT
WITHOUT MIMAKI’S PRIOR WRITTEN CONSENT.
IN  NO  EVENT  SHALL  MIMAKI  BE  LIABLE  FOR
SPECIAL,  INCIDENTAL  OR  CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES  OR  FOR  LOSS  OF  PROFITS  OF  DEALER
OR CUSTOMERS OF ANY PRODUCT.
Requests
• This Operation manual has been carefully prepared for
your  easy  understanding.  However,  please  do  not
hesitate  to  contact  a  distributor  in  your  district  or  our
office if you have any inquiry.
• Description  contained  in  this  Operation  manual  are
subject to change without notice for improvement.
FCC Statement (USA)
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15
of the FCC Rules.
These  limits  are  designed  to  provide  reasonable
protection  against  harmful  interference  when  the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This
equipment  generates,  uses  and  can  radiate  radio
frequency  energy  and,  if  not  installed  and  used  in
accordance  with  the  Operation  manual,  may  cause
harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely
to cause harmful interference in which case the user will
be  required  to  correct  the  interference  at  his  own
expense.
In  the  case  where  MIMAKI-recommended  cable  is  not
used for connection of this device, limits provided by FCC
rules can be exceeded.
To  prevent  this,  use  of  MIMAKI-recommended  cable  is
essential for the connection of this printer.
Television/Radio Reception 
Interference
The  product  described  in  this  manual  generates  high
frequency when operating. The product can interfere with
radios  and  televisions  if  set  up  or  commissioned  under
improper  conditions.  The  product  is  not  guaranteed
against  any  damage  to  specific-purpose  radio  and
televisions.
The product’s interference with your radio or television will
be  checked  by  turning  on/off  the  power  button  of  the
product. If the interference is removed when the product is
turned off, the interference is coming from the product.
In the event that the product is the cause of interference,
try to eliminate it by taking one of the following corrective
measures or taking some of them in combination.
• Change the orientation of the antenna of the television
set or radio to find a position without reception difficulty.
• Separate the television set or radio from this product.
• Plug the power cord of this product into an outlet which
is  isolated  from  power  circuits  connected  to  the
television set or radio.




Foreword
vi
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Foreword
Congratulations on your purchase of MIMAKI color inkjet
printer “Tx500P Series”.
“Tx500P Series” is a color inkjet printer that can print with
Sublimation dye ink realizing high speed and high image
quality.
About usable ink
Usable ink for  this  machine is Sublimation dye ink  (four-
color / six-color model).
• 4-colors version: 2 each of Blue, Magenta, Yellow and
Black color ink bottle are use.
• 6-colors version:  1  each  of  Blue,  Magenta,  Yellow,
Black, Light blue and Light magenta color
ink bottle (2 each of Light blue and Light
magenta only) are use.
On This Operation manual
• This  Operation  manual  describes  the  operations  and
maintenance  of  “Color  inkjet  printer 
Tx500P  Series”
(hereafter, this machine)
• Read this Operation manual carefully and understand
them  thoroughly  to  use.  It  is  also  necessary  to  keep
this Operation manual on hand.
• Make  sure  that  this  Operation  manual  is  read  by  the
operator of this machine.
• This Operation manual has been carefully prepared for
your  easy  understanding,  however,  please  do  not
hesitate  to  contact  a  distributor  in  your  district  or  our
office if you have any inquiry.
• Descriptions  contained  in  this  Operation  manual  are
subject to change without any notice for improvement.
• You  can  also  download  the  latest  manual  from  our
website.
Reprinting the content of this manual without prior notice
is strictly prohibited.
© 2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright
Using this Machine Safely
Symbols
Symbols  are  used  in  this  Operation  Manual  for  safe
operation  and  for prevention  of  damage to  the  machine.
The indicated sign is different depending on the content of
caution.  Symbols  and  their  meanings  are  given  below.
Please follow these instructions as you read this manual.
Examples of symbols
Warning for Use
Description
Failure  to  observe  the  instructions  given  with
this  symbol  can  result  in  death  or  serious
injuries to personnel. Be sure to read it carefully
and use it properly.
Failure  to  observe  the  instructions  given  with
this symbol can result in injuries to personnel or
damage to property.
Important  notes  in  use  of  this  machine  are
given  with  this  symbol.  Understand  the  notes
thoroughly to operate the machine properly.
Useful  information  is  given  with  this  symbol.
Understand the notes thoroughly to operate the
machine properly.
Indicates  the  reference  page  for  related
contents.
The symbol   indicates that the instructions
must  be  observed as  strictly  as  the  CAUTION
instructions  (including  DANGER  and
WARNING instructions). A  sign representing a
precaution  (the  sign  shown  at  left  warns  of
hazardous voltage) is shown in the triangle.
The  symbol    indicates  that  the  action
shown  is  prohibited.  A  sign  representing  a
prohibited  action  (the  sign  shown  at  left
prohibits  disassembly)  is  shown  in  or  around
the circle.
The  symbol    indicates  that  the  action
shown  must  be  taken  without  fail  or  the
instructions  must  be  observed  without  fail.  A
sign  representing  a  particular  instruction  (the
sign shown at left instructs to unplug the cable
from the wall outlet) is shown in the circle.
WARNING
• Do not use the machine in a poorly ventilated room or
a closed room.
• Use a power cable attached to this unit.
• Take  care  not  to  damage,  break  or  work  upon  the
power  cable.  If  a  heavy  material  is  placed  on  the
power  cable,  or  if  it  is  heated  or  pulled,  the  power
cable  can  break,  thus  resulting  in  fire  or  electric
shocks.




Using this Machine Safely
vii
Precautions in Use
Important points
• Use it with the displayed power supply specifications.
The  power  supply  voltage for  the  main  printer  unit  is
single  phase  AC200  to  240V  29A  or  less,  and  the
power  supply  voltage  for  the  color  fixation  device  is
three  phase  AC200V  125A  or  less.  (You  cannot  use
this machine in the 100V system.)
• Avoid locating the machine in a damp environment. Do
not  splash  water  onto  the  machine.  Use  in  such  an
environment  can  give  rise  to  fire,  electric  shocks  or
breakdown of the machine.
• Use  of  the  machine  under  an  abnormal  condition
where it produces smoke or strange smell can result in
fire or electric shocks. If such an abnormality is found,
be sure  to turn  off the power  button immediately  and
unplug the cable from the wall  outlet. Check first that
the  machine  no  longer  produces  smoke,  and  then
contact your distributor or a sales office of MIMAKI for
repair.  Never  repair  your  machine  and  ink  bottle  by
yourself since it is very dangerous for you to do so.
• Never  disassemble  or  remodel  the  main  unit  of  the
machine or the ink bottle. Disassembly or remodeling
can  result  in  an  electric  shock  or  breakdown  of  the
machine.
• Take  care  that  no  dust  or  dirt  sticks  to  the  coloring
heater. Dust and dirt sticking heaters can cause fire.
• Avoid locating the machine in a damp environment. Do
not  splash  water  onto  the  machine.  Use  in  such  an
environment  can  give  rise  to  fire,  electric  shocks  or
breakdown of the machine.
• Keep Fingers and Other Body Parts Away
• In case of ink leakage, please turn off the main power
switch, unplug the power plug, and contact our service
office or distributor.
CAUTION
Handling of the power cable
• Use the power cable attached to this machine.
• Take  care  not  to  damage,  break  or  work  upon  the
power cable. If a heavy matter is placed on the power
cable, heated or drawn, the power cable can break to
cause fire or electric shocks.
• There is no power cable attached to the color fixation
device.  The  customer  needs  to  provide  a  cable  from
the transformer or switch board to the breaker on the
heater controller.
Power supply
• Leave the breaker turned ON.
• Do not turn off the main power switch on the right side
of this machine.
Grounding work
• You need to ground this machine to prevent accidental
electric shocks.
Note on maintenance
• When  cleaning  the  External  ink  supply  unit  or  the
heads, make sure to wear the attached gloves.
WARNING
Power specifications for the coloring heater
• For regions that use a power supply other than 200 to
240V,  you need to use a  step-down transformer. The
customer  needs  to  provide  a  cable  from  the
transformer  or  switch  board  to  the  breaker  on  the
heater controller.
Transformer type: Three phase insulation transformer
Transformer capacity: 55 KW
Secondary  connection  (output):  Three  phase  4  wire
system (Star connection, neutral grounding)
Primary voltage (input voltage): Power supply voltage
of  the  installation  location  (varies  according  to  the
country)
Secondary voltage (output voltage): Three phase 200V
Protective gear
• Make  sure  you  wear  protective  glasses  and  gloves
before cleaning the nozzles as it is possible that ink or
cleaning solution for maintenance may spray from the
nozzles.  Otherwise,  ink  or  cleaning  solution  for
maintenance  may  spray  into  your  eyes.  If  ink  or
cleaning solution for maintenance gets on your hands,
it could cause the skin to become irritated.
Handling of ink
• If  you  get  ink  in  your  eyes,  immediately  wash  your
eyes with a lot of clean water for at least 15 minutes. In
doing so, also wash eyes to rinse ink away completely.
Then, consult a doctor as soon as possible.
• If  anyone  drinks  ink  by  mistake,  keep  him  or  her
quiet  and  see  a  doctor  immediately.  Do  not  allow
him or her to swallow the vomit. After that, contact
the Poison Control Center.
• If  you  breathe  in  too  much  steam  and  begin  to  feel
nauseous, move to a well ventilated area immediately,
and make sure you keep warm and rest. Then, consult
a doctor as soon as possible.
WARNING
Note on maintenance
• It is strongly recommended to use the machine in a room that is
not dusty.
• Keep  the  front  cover  closed  even  when  the  machine  is  not
printing.  If  not,  dust  can  accumulate  on  the  nozzles  in  the
heads.
• Dust in the heads can also cause drops of ink to fall suddenly
down on the media during printing. In such a case, be sure to
clean  up the  heads.  ( P.4-14 “Cleaning the  Ink  Head  and
the Area around It”)
• When cleaning the ink-station or the heads, make sure to wear
the attached gloves.
• Perform  wiping  (removal  of  dust  and  paper  powder)  of  the
capping station and wiper frequently.
CAUTION




Using this Machine Safely
viii
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Cautions on Installation
Front cover and lever
• Never  open  the  front  cover  or  raise  the  lever  during  printing.
Opening the cover or raising the lever will abort printing.
Protection of media from dust
• Store media in a bag. Wiping off dust accumulated on media will
adversely affect the media due to static electricity.
• When  leaving  the  workshop  after  the  working  hours,  do  not
leave any media on the roll hanger. If any media is left on the roll
hanger, it can get dusty.
When discarding this machine, request the treatment of
it for an industrial waste disposal contractor.
• Treat it properly in compliance with regulation in the local area.
• Disposition of this machine
Handling of ink bottles
• Use the Tx500P genuine ink. Remember that the user shall be
filled for a repair to correct any damage resulting from the use of
ink other than the exclusive type.
• The  machine  does  not  operate  with  any  ink  other  than  the
Tx500P genuine ink.
• Do not use the Tx500P genuine ink with other printers, as doing
so may cause damage to such machines.
• If  the ink  bottle  is  moved  from  a  cold  place  to  a  warm  place,
leave it in the room temperature for three hours or more before
using it.
• Open the ink bottle just before installing it in the machine. If it is
opened and left for an extended period of time, normal printing
performance of the machine may not be ensured.
• Make sure to store ink bottles in a cool and dark place.
• Store ink bottles and waste ink tank in a place that is out of the
reach of children.
• Be sure to thoroughly consume the ink in the ink bottle, once it
is  opened,  within  three months.  If  an  extended  period  of  time
has  passed  away  after  opening  the  ink  bottle,  printing  quality
would be poor.
• Neither pound the ink bottle nor shake it violently, as doing so
can cause leakage of ink.
• Do  not  touch  or  stain  the  contacts  of  the  IC  chip.  This  may
cause damages on printed circuit boards.
• Waste ink is equivalent to waste oil of industrial waste. Request
an industrial waste disposal company for disposal of waste ink.
Handling of media
• Use the recommended media.
Use media recommended by MIMAKI  to ensure reliable, high-
quality printing.
• Set  the  temperature  of  the  Print  heater  and  Post-heater
according  to  the  type  and  characteristics  of  the  media  used.
Automatic  temperature  setting  can  be  made  on  the  operation
panel by setting the profile on the dedicated RIP. For setting on
the RIP, refer to the instruction manual for your RIP.
• Pay attention to the expansion and contraction of the media.
Do not use media immediately after unpacking. The media can
be affected by the room temperature and humidity, and  thus it
may  expand  and  contract.  The  media  have  to  be  left  in  the
atmosphere  in  which  they  are  to  be  used  for  30  day  or  more
after unpacked.
• Do not use curled media.
The  use of curled  media  can  not only cause a  media  jam  but
also affect print quality.
Straighten  the  sheet  of  media,  if  significantly  curled,  before
using it for printing. If a regular-sized coated sheet of media is
rolled and stored, the coated side has to face outside.
• Do not leave the media with the heater ON for a long time.
WARNING
Periodic replacement parts
• Some parts of this machine must be  replaced with  a new  one
periodically by  service personnel.  Be  sure to  make  a  contract
with your distributor or dealer for After sale service to ensure a
long life of your machine.
CAUTION
A  place  exposed  to  direct
sunlight
On an inclined surface
A place that vibrates
A  place  exposed  to  direct
air  flow  from  an  air
conditioner or the like.
A place where temperature
or  humidity  varies
significantly
Around a place where fire
is used
•Use  the  machine
under  the  following
environmental
conditions:
•Operating
environment:
20 to 30 °C 
(68 to 86 °F)
35 to 65 % (Rh)
A place with much dust
A  place  with  chemicals
around
WARNING




Using this Machine Safely
ix
Safety interlock
This machine is equipped with interlocks to terminate the
operation  for  your  safety  when  the  cover  opens  during
printing etc. (Red circled sections in the figure below)




Warning labels
x
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
Warning labels
The following warning labels are attached to this machine. Make sure you understand the content of the warning labels.
If the warning label becomes too dirty to read or wears off, make sure you purchase a new label from your dealer or an
office of MIMAKI




Warning labels
xi
No.
Order 
Number
Label
1
M903330
2
M912560
3
M903239
4
TF50-70
5
M901549
6
M903404
7
M912058
8
M908553




Warning labels
xii
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
No.
Order 
Number
Label
9
M905982
10
M907833
11
M907935
12
M906115
13
M914192
14
M914189




Warning labels
xiii
EC DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
We  hereby  declare  that  the  following  our  products  conform  with  the  essential  health  and  safety  requirements  of  EC
Directives.
Product Color Inkjet Printer
Model No. Tx500P-3200DS
Serial No. covered AABCDEEE
AA: W3, B: 0 to 9, C: any alpha-numeric, D: any alphabet, EEE: 001 to 999 
Manufacturer MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2182-3, Shigeno-otsu, Tomi, Nagano, 389-0512, JAPAN
Authorised Compiler in the Community
MIMAKI EUROPE B.V.
Stammerdijk 7E 1112 AA Diemen, The Netherlands
Managing Director     Koji Shimizu
Directives Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive 2014/35/EU
EMC Directive 2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive 2011/65/EU
The above products have been evaluated for conformity with above directives using the following European standards.
The technical construction file (TCF) for this product is retained at the above Manufacturer’s location.
Machinery Directive / Low Voltage Directive
EN ISO12100:2010, EN60204-1:2006+A1, EN60950-1:2006+A11+A1+A12
EMC Directive EN55022:2010, EN61000-3-2:2006+A1+A2, EN61000-3-3:2008, EN55024:2010
RoHS Directive EN50581:2012




This chapter
describes the items required to understand before use, such as the name of each part of
the machine or the installation procedures.
About installing this machine  ........................1-2
Setup Location  ............................................ 1-2
Working Environmental Temperature  ......... 1-2
About Ventilation Equipment ....................... 1-2
About fixing machine ................................... 1-2
Moving This Machine  .................................. 1-2
Names of Parts and Functions ......................1-3
Front Side of the Machine  ........................... 1-3
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine  ... 1-4
Operation Panel  .......................................... 1-5
Media sensor ............................................... 1-7
Carriage  ...................................................... 1-7
Nozzle Check Unit (NCU)  ........................... 1-7
Indicator  ......................................................1-7
Capping station  ........................................... 1-8
Pinch rollers and Feed rollers ......................1-8
Connecting Cables ........................................1-8
Connecting the LAN cable  ...........................1-8
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable ............1-8
Connecting Power Supply Cable  .................1-9
Fill ink in the ink tank and charging  .............1-10
Caution in handling of ink bottles ...............1-12
Media  ..........................................................1-13
Usable sizes of media ................................1-13
Caution in handling of medias  ...................1-13
Restrictions on Using Media ......................1-13
About the emergency switch  .......................1-14
The position of the emergency switch  .......1-14
If you feel the danger .................................1-15
Chapter 1
Before Use




Chapter 1 Before Use
1-2
About installing this 
machine
Setup Location
Secure  a  suitable  installation  space  before  assembling
this machine.
The place of installation must have enough space for not
only this machine itself, but also for the printing operation.
Working Environmental Temperature
Use  this  machine  in  an  environment  of  20  to  30°C  to
ensure reliable printing.
The  heater  temperature  may  not  reach  the  set  value,
depending on the ambient temperature.
About Ventilation Equipment
Because  Color  fixation  device  of  this  machine  produces
the sublimation gas, please prepare a dust collector and a
ventilation equipment.
Recommended specifications
Dust collector: Air volume 20 m
3
/min
Ventilation equipment:
In case of a hood
Area: more than 0.8 m
2
Air volume: more than 40 m
3
/min
In case of the whole room
Air volume: more than 25 m
3
/min
About fixing machine
The  leg  of  this  machine  has  the  level  foot  to  fix  the
machine.
Before turning the power ON, make sure that the printer
body is fixed with the leveling feet.
The printer body may start moving during operation if it is
not fixed with the leveling feet.
Moving This Machine
Model Width Depth Height
Gross 
weight
Tx500P-3200DS
5620mm
(221.3 in)
1800mm 
*1
(70.9 in)
*1. When the tension bar is flat
1820mm
(71.7 in)
1430kg
(3,152.6 lb)
Color fixation 
device + VT 
take-up device
4300mm
(169.3 in)
2000mm
(78.7 in)
1040mm
(40.9 in)
960kg
(2,116.4 lb)
External ink 
supply unit
960mm
(37.8 in)
510mm
(20.1 in)
730mm
(28.7 in)
30kg
(66.1 lb)
Electrical unit of 
color fixation 
device
910mm
(35.8 in)
600mm
(23.6 in)
1240mm
(48.8 in)
140kg
(308.6 lb)
500 mm or more
 (19.7 in or more)
7
544m
m
 
or 
m
o
r
e
(297.
0 
in
 
or 
m
o
re)
5
0
3
5
 
m
m
 
o
r
 
m
o
r
e
(
1
9
8
.
2
 
i
n
 
o
r
 
m
o
r
e
)
500 mm or more
(19.7 in or more)
1
0
0
0
 
m
m
 
o
r
 
m
o
r
e
(
3
9
.
4
 
i
n
 
o
r
m
o
r
e
)
1
0
0
0
 
m
m
 
o
r
 
m
o
r
e
(
3
9
.
4
 
i
n
 
o
r
m
o
r
e
)

• Put the supplied iron base plate (black) between 
each leveling foot and the floor. To hold the weight 
of the printer, using plate is recommended.
• When the machine is moved to any place other 
than on the same step-free floor, contact your 
distributor or our service office.
If you move it by yourself, failure or damage may 
occur.
Be sure to request your distributor or our service 
office to move this machine.




1-3
Chapter 1 Before Use
1
2
2
2
2
Names of Parts and Functions
Front Side of the Machine
Front cover
Open the cover in setting of medias, taking of measures 
against jamming of medias or in maintenance inside the 
station. Even when the power button is off, keep all 
covers closed.
Operation panel
This panel has the operation 
keys required for operating the 
machine and the LCDs for 
displaying setting items, etc.
Clamp lever (front)
Moves the pinch rollers up 
and down to hold or release 
the media.
Waste ink tank
Waste ink gathers in this tank.
Left maintenance cover
Open the cover in maintenance. Even when 
the power button is off, keep all covers 
closed.
Ink tank
Each tank contains 
an ink of a particular 
color.
Take-up device
Take up the output drawn with a roll 
medium automatically.
External ink supply unit
Put the ink in the ink tank.
Operation panel of color 
fixation device
This touch panel operates the 
color fixation device and 
displays setting items.
Tension-bar
It supports to stabilize 
the tension to wind up 
roll media.
Right maintenance cover
Open the cover in maintenance.
Color fixation device
Applies heat to the printed media 
to fix the colors.





1-4
Chapter 1 Before Use
Rear Side and Right Side of the Machine
AC inlet
Connect the power 
cable to the AC inlet.
Clamp lever (rear)
Interlocks with the clamp lever in 
the font of this machine.
Main power switch
Turns on/off the main 
power for this machine. 
Leave the main power 
turned on to prevent ink 
clogging.
LAN connector
This is Giga Ethernet 
interface connector.
Tension-bar
Brings tension to the media.
USB 2.0 connector
This is USB2.0 interface 
connector.
Color fixation device main 
power switch
Turns the color fixation device on 
or off.





1-5
Chapter 1 Before Use
1
2
2
2
2
Operation Panel
Use the operation panel to make settings for printing or operate this machine.
*1 : Ink Status
Status of the ink tank (remaining ink/error, etc.) is displayed using icons.
Each icon is described below.
Icon Contents
Displays the remaining ink amount in nine levels, in the order of the ink cartridge set in the slot.
The remaining amount decreases moving to the right.
Indicates that the ink cannot be used due to ink end or ink error.
Indicates that ink has expired or that one month has passed after the expiration date. Please use quickly. Ink can no 
longer be used if two months have passed after the expiration date.
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
Status indicator lamp
Indicates the machine’s status (printing, error occurred, etc).
Condition of 
Lamp
Condition of machine
OFF
Machine is in LOCAL mode, no print data has been received, 
and no errors have occurred.
Lit steady Light 
blue
Switched to Remote mode.
Flashing Light 
blue
Currently printing.
In test printing: printing a pattern stored inside the machine.
Lit steady blue Print data still remains in the machine.
Flashing red Error has occurred.
Lit steady red Error (SYSTEM HALT) has occurred.
Display
Displays the following items:
•Printer status
•Time Display
• Set media width
• Heater temperature (current tempera-
ture/set temperature)
•Ink status 
*1
• Functions assigned to [FUNC1] to 
[FUNC3] 
*2
key
Changes over the functions of the 
function keys ([FUNC1]–[FUNC3]).
// key
Press this to set various functions or 
to do test printing. The function 
keys’ functions are changed each 
time [SEL] key is pressed.
JOG key
Use these keys to shift the carriage or 
the media in [LOCAL]. Also use them to 
select an item of printing conditions.
key
Cancels the last input value or returns 
the setting menu to the immediate 
higher level of the hierarchy. Also, press 
this to turn the power on or off. (Give it a 
long press to turn the power off.)
key
Registers the last input value as the 
setting value or goes to the immediate 
lower level of the hierarchy.
• The [ENTER] key under the operation panel lights in blue when the power is turned on, and off when the power switch 
is turned off. The ink clogging prevention function is periodically operated even when the power switch is OFF if the 
main power switch ( P.1-4) is ON.(Auto maintenance function)

ink full
Approximately
1/8 consumed
Approximately
1/4 consumed
Approximately
3/8 consumed
Approximately
1/2 consumed
Approximately
5/8 consumed
Approximately
3/4 consumed
Approximately
7/8 consumed
near end





1-6
Chapter 1 Before Use
*2 : Functions assigned to [FUNC1] to [FUNC3]
Contents of functions assigned to [FUNC1] to [FUNC3] are described below.
Icon Contents
Displays “MENU” for setting functions.
Displays maintenance functions such as test print, cleaning, etc.
Shifts to Remote from LOCAL and starts printing.
Displays adjustment functions such as Feed Comp, DROP.POScorrect, etc.
Sets the heater temperature.
Executes data clear.
Used for adjusting the head height or cutting the media.
The Station menu appears.
Displays the ink charge menu.
Suspends printing in Remote and shifts to LOCAL.
When there are multiple items on the MENU screen or other screens, it moves to the next page.
When there are multiple items on the MENU screen or other screens, it moves to the previous page.
Used for completing confirmation when warning message has been displayed and so on.
Used for turning functions OFF or canceling them, for example, when turning heater settings OFF and so on.
Some kind of setting or function is assigned. Operate according to the description of each function.
Switches between enable/disable when selecting multiple items, for example, when selecting target head for 
cleaning and so on.
• The color of icons changes according to the state of the printer.
When the icon is green: The printer is in Remote mode.
When the icon is dark blue: The printer is in LOCAL mode.




Chapter 1 Before Use
1-7
1
2
2
2
2
Media sensor
The media sensor detects the presence of the media and
the media length.
There are a total of 4 media sensors on the device; 2 on
the  platen  (on  the  back)  and 2  on  the  base  of  the  color
fixation device.
Carriage
The carriage contains the ink heads for printing etc.
Nozzle Check Unit (NCU)
Nozzle check  unit  is  checking the  nozzle  missing  during
printing.
If NCU detect a nozzle missing, automatically performs a
nozzle restoration operation. ( P.3-28)
Indicator
Functions of the Indicator on the top right of this unit are
described here.
The indicator has a green and a red lamp.
• When setting a medium, be sure to cover either of 
the medium sensors located on the rear of the 
platen. The media cannot be detected unless it is 
placed over the sensor.
Media sensor
The backside of the machine

Color of 
lamp
State State of machine
Green
Lighting REMOTE
Blinking REMOTE (printing)
OFF LOCAL
Red
Lighting Error has occurred (system down)
Blinking Error or warning has occurred
OFF Normal
Red
Green





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-8
Capping station
The capping station consists of the ink caps, the wiper for
cleaning the heads, etc.
The ink caps prevent the nozzles in the heads from drying
up.
The wiper cleans the nozzles in the heads.
The wiper is consumable. If the wiper is deformed or the
media  is  stained,  replace  the  wiper  with  a  new  one.
( P.4-24)
Pinch rollers and Feed rollers
This machine retains the media with the pinch rollers and
feed  rollers.  During  printing  operation,  the  feed  rollers
feed the media forward.
Connecting Cables
Connecting the LAN cable
When  connecting  LAN  cable,  be  sure  to  follow  the  note
below:
Connecting USB2.0 Interface Cable
Connect  the  PC  and  this  machine  with  the
USB2.0interface cable.
Notes on USB 2.0 Interface
 Notes on peripheral devices in USB high speed 
mode
When a peripheral device (USB memory or USB HDD) to
be operated in USB high speed mode is connected to the
same  personal  computer  that  a  Tx500P  machine  is
connected to, the USB device may not be recognized.
When a Tx500P is connected to the personal computer to
which an external HDD is connected via USB, the speed
of data output  to  the  Tx500P  may drop.  That  can cause
the  head  unit  to  stop  temporarily  at  the  right  or  left  end
during printing.
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles in cleaning 
within the capping station to protect your eyes 
against ink. Otherwise, you may get ink in your 
eyes.
• Keep the pinch rollers lifted up when this machine 
is not in use. If the pinch rollers are left lowered for 
an extended period of time, they can be deformed 
and fail to securely retain the media.
Feed roller
Pinch roller

• Directly connect the machine to a PC with a LAN 
cable.
• Surely insert LAN cable until clicking noise 
sounds.
• Do not plug in or unplug any cable during data 
transferring.
• Your RIP must be compatible with USB 2.0.
• Contact a RIP maker near your location or our 
office when the USB2.0 interface is not attached to 
the PC.
• Since the connection to a LAN cable is 
recommended in this machine, the USB2.0 
connection may not satisfy the specification of 
some print mode.
• Your RIP must be compatible with USB 2.0.
LAN cable

USB cable





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-9
1
2
2
2
2
 Removing USB memory
If  a  USB  memory  module  is  inserted  in  the  personal
computer to which a Tx500P machine is connected, click
“Stop”  in  the  “Safely  Remove  Hardware”  window  by
following  the  instructions  given  there  first  and  then
remove the module.
Leaving  a  USB  memory  module  inserted  can  cause
[ERROR 201 COMMAND ERROR].
Copy the data onto the hard disk before outputting  it for
printing.
Connecting Power Supply Cable
You  are not  allowed  to  install the  printer  by  yourself.  Be
sure  to  request  MIMAKI’s  service  personnel  and  an
electrician to install the printer.
For power supply connection, this printer uses the Type B
plug and socket in compliance with IEC 60309.
When a socket construction meeting the plug of the power
cable  of  this  printer  is  required,  use  the  supplied  socket
and perform construction  between  your  switchboard  and
the socket.
• The power supply voltage for the main printer unit 
is single phase AC200 to 240V 29A or less, and 
the power supply voltage for the color fixation 
device is three phase AC200V 125A or less. (You 
cannot use this machine in the 100V system.)
• For the power supply to the main body of the 
printer, electrical work is required as described 
below. Request an electrician to perform electrical 
work.
• Socket installation onto the circuit breaker
• Grounding work
• Ensure that a wall outlet is available near the 
printer. Also ensure that the power cable can be 
easily unplugged whenever necessary.
• To prevent electrical shock hazard, it is prohibited 
for anyone other than electrician licensees to 
perform the electrical work for this printer.
• Take care not to miswire, which can result in a fire 
or an electric shock.
• When any power cable other than the supplied 
one is to be used, make sure that the cable is 
equivalent to one of the following types. Connect 
the cable as shown below.
•VCT-5.5m m
2
 x33 cores (600 V)
• UL-AWG10x3C (600V)
Side of the 
printer body
Switchboard
Socket
Power cable:
UL AWG10 or the 
equivalent
Supplied socket
Socket 
construction
Socket 
construction
Circuit breaker
1φ 200V to 240V 30A

Round terminal 
processing
Circuit breaker
Circuit breaker:
3Φ 200V 125A
Circular hole
Color fixation 
device 
construction





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-10
Fill ink in the ink tank 
and charging
Fill ink in the ink tank of this machine.
Rough standard for adding ink
You can check the current amount of ink in the ink tank of
this  machine  (rough  standard)  with  the  ink  remaining
amount indicator below the ink tank.
The way to check the ink remaining amount indicator and
the ink remaining amount are as below.
In  addition,  when  this  machine  enters  into  the  status  of
[Ink Near END] or [Ink End], the display indicate it.
1
Insert the IC chip included with the 2 liter 
ink bottle.
• When you insert the IC chip, the ink remain lamp
lights orange and a buzzer sounds.
• Insert the IC chip  with the  metal part facing rear
side  and  down.  If  you  insert  the  wrong  side  by
accident,  it  causes  faulty  or  damage  of  the  IC
chip.
• Do not touch the metal part of the IC chip. It may
break  the  IC  chip  by  static,  or  may  cause  read
error by stain or flaw.
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles and gloves 
to perform the work. Otherwise, you may get ink in 
your eyes.
• Notes before adding ink
Check the following before adding ink. Failure to 
do so could require all of the ink inside the ink 
supply unit to be discarded.
• Type of Ink
• Color of ink
• Expiration date of ink
Check both expiration dates of the ink contained in 
the ink bottle for refilling and the ink tank of this 
machine.
Check the label for the expiration date of the ink 
bottle.
Press the [ENTER] key to check the expiration 
date of the ink remaining in the ink tank of this 
machine. ( P.3-28)
Ink remaining 
Line of mouth
for adding ink

Status of ink 
remaining 
amount 
indicator
Status of ink amount and Current ink 
amount 
*1
*1. The ink remaining amount indicator is only rough standard. For ink
filling, it is recommended to check the liquid level from the mouth for
adding ink.
Ink end/Ink tank none
Ink remain : 300cc less than
Ink near end/
Ink remain : 400cc less than 
*2
*2. “INK NEAR END” at 400cc and “INK END” at 300cc.
Ink remain : 400 to 1L and less than
Ink remain : 1L to 1.5L and less than
Ink remain : 1.5L to 2L and less than
Ink remain : 2L to 2.5L and less than
Ink full/ Ink remain : 2.5L to 3.2L and less than
Ink over/ Ink remain : 3.2L or more 
*3
*3. The ink tank set in this unit can replenish the ink by up to 3.6L, but
there is a possibility that ink would spill from  the  mouth  for  adding
ink. When the orange lamp is lit, please do not replenish the ink.
Down
Metal part facing rear side
Ink remaining 
amount lamp





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-11
1
2
2
2
2
2
IC chip charging startsautomatically.
• The  information  on  the  IC  chip,
such  as  ink  volume  and
expiration  date,  is  loaded  and
managed by the printer.
• The  ink  remain  lamp  flashes
orange.
3
When charging is complete, remove the IC 
chip.
• When  charging  is  complete,  the
ink remain lamp will flash orange
and  green,  and  a  buzzer  will
sound.
• You can check the details of the
charge by pressing the [ENTER]
key in Local.
4
Take out the ink bottle, and slowly shake it 
twenty times and more.
• To  prevent  ink  from  leaking  when  you  shake  it,
wear  gloves  and  cover  the  ink  bottle  cap  with  a
paper towel etc. Being in that status, slowly shake
it twenty times and more by flowing ink.
5
Remove the cap of the ink tank.
• First,  cover  the  cap  with  a  waste  cloth  etc.  to
prevent  your  hands  from  getting  dirty  and  then
remove it.
6
While checking the ink remaining amount 
indicator, add ink.
• Depending  on  the  ink  type,  aluminum  sheet
adheres to the bottle top surface. In such a case,
remove it with a cutter.
• While checking the ink remain lamp above the ink
tank, add ink. For details, refer to P.1-10 “Rough
standard for adding ink”.
7
Attach the ink tank cap firmly.
• Be sure to charge the IC chip whenever ink is 
added. Otherwise, the printer will be unable to 
manage the ink information.
• Do not remove the IC chip or turn off the printer 
during charging. Doing so will prevent the 
information on the IC chip from being charged 
correctly.
• After charging is complete, be sure to remove and 
dispose of the IC chip. Do not reuse IC chips.
• If the error message “INVALID INK CHARGE” 
appears on the display
• Charging was not possible for one or more of the 
following reasons:
(1) Faulty IC chip
(2) When the  remaining  charge  amount,  that  is
managed by the machine, is greater than or
equal to three liters
(3) Attempting to charge ink that has passed its
expiration date
• For more information about errors, press the 
[ENTER] key in Local. ( P.3-28)
• To retry charging, select the “Ink Charge” 
maintenance function. ( P.4-20)
• Before shaking it, check that the cap is firmly 
closed.
• If you shake it too strong, it may cause ink 
leakage. Therefore, perform this carefully.
• If the remaining amount of ink is less, ink in the 
bottle cannot be beaten enough. Tilt the ink bottle 
until it becomes vertical.
Ink remaining 
amount lamp

Ink remaining 
amount lamp

Cover with paper towel firmly and shake ink slowly
Repeat this

• Attach the cap firmly.
Cap





Chapter 1 Before Use
1-12
About IC chip
• The  IC  chip  has  information  of  ink  color,  remaining
amount of ink, expiration data, etc.
When filling the ink, insert the IC chip packed with the ink
bottle into the IC chip inserting port.
•If an IC chip that is not paired with the ink bottle is
inserted, ink can not use.
• The mark indicating color information is pasted on the IC
chip.
When [INK NEAR END] is displayed
There  is  a  little  of  ink  left.  You  can  print  continuously,
however, ink may end during printing. It is recommended
to add ink as soon as possible.
Press the [ENTER] key in Local to check the ink tank that
requires refilling in Local Guidance. 
( P.3 - 28 )
When [INK END] is displayed
When  it  becomes  Ink  end  (remaining  amount  of  ink  is
none), the machine cannot print. Refill ink.
About ink expiration date
The ink has its expiration date.
You can use the ink up to two months after the expiration
date  listed  on  the  ink  bottle,  but  you  cannot  use  it  after
three months. Try to use up any expired ink quickly.
The ink remain lamp’s red status and the display will notify
you when the ink is expired.
Ex.) When the expiration date is October
October: Usable
(“EXPIRATION” is displayed)
November: Usable
(“EXPIRATION(1M)”  is  displayed  and  Ink
bottle lamp blinks in red.)
December: Unusable
(“EXPIRATION(2M)”  is  displayed  and  Ink
bottle lamp blinks fast in red.)
When “INK CHARGE” is displayed in 
Local
If you could not perform the auto-charge for the following
reasons,  the  warning  message  “INK  CHARGE”  is
displayed to notify you.
• The inserted IC chip has expired.
(excluding “EXPIRATION(2M)”)
• The ink bottle to be charged has expired.
(excluding “EXPIRATION(2M)”)
If the message is displayed, check the ink expiration date,
then press the [MAINTE] key, browse to the “Ink charge”
Maintenance  function  ( P.4-20)  and  perform  the  ink
charge.
Caution in handling of ink bottles
• Press the [ENTER] key in Local to view the 
expiration date for the ink in Local Guidance. 
( P.3-28)
• When “EXPIRATION (2M)” is displayed and you 
can no longer use the ink, you will no longer be 
able to perform prints, cleaning, or IC chip charges 
(P.1-11).
In that case, dispose of the ink inside the ink tank 
( P.4-25) and refill with new ink ( P.1-10).
Ink color Indication mark
Black (one black circle)
Blue
(Each red circle 
and blue circle)
Magenta (one red circle)
Yellow (one yellow circle)
IC chip
Mark indication 

• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash your 
eyes with a lot of clean running water for at least 
15 minutes. In doing so, also wash the eyes to 
rinse ink away completely. Then, consult a doctor 
as soon as possible.
• If the ink bottle is moved from a cold place to a 
warm place, leave it in the room temperature for 
three hours or more before using it.
• Make sure to store ink bottles in a cool and dark 
place.
• Store ink bottles and waste ink tank in a place that 
is out of the reach of children.
• Request an industrial waste processor for 
processing of empty ink bottles.
• Be sure to thoroughly consume the ink in the ink 
bottle, once it is opened, within three months. If an 
extended period of time has passed away after 
opening the ink bottle, printing quality would be 
poor.
• Do not shake ink bottles violently. This may result 
in ink leakage from the ink bottles.
• Do not touch or stain the contacts of the IC chip. 
This may cause damages on printed circuit 
boards.




Chapter 1 Before Use
1-13
1
2
2
2
2
Media
Usable media sizes and notes for handling are described.
Usable sizes of media
Caution in handling of medias
Pay attention to the followings for handling of medias.
Restrictions on Using Media
It is hard to correct the following media on the printer side.
When using any of  the  following media,  we  recommend
performing a test print to check if the quality is acceptable.
• Large,  elasticated  material  (material  that  stretches,
knitted fabric that expands or contracts, etc.)
• Material that expands or contracts to a large degree when
it gets wet during printing
• Material with a large unevenness in the width
• Material  that  wrinkles  or  becomes  slack  when  it  is
stretched out flat, or that tends to becomes wavy
• Material  that  becomes  skewed  to  a  large  extent  when
winding on the roll
Model Tx500P-3200DS
Type of 
Recommended 
media
Preprocessed polyester material
Maximum 3300 mm (129.9 in)
Minimum 297 mm (11.7 in)
Max. printing width 3290 mm (129.5 in)
Roll media
Thickness 1.0 mm or less (0.039 in or less)
Roll outside 
diameter
Φ300 mm or less (Φ11.8 in or less)
Roll weight 
*1
*1. When holding the right and left side of roll media and when there is
no deflection on the roll
When using feeding unit: 
130 kg or less(286.6 lb or less)
Roll inside 
diameter
When using take-up unit and feeding 
unit 3 inches
Printing surface Either face in or face out
Roll end treatment
The roll end is gently fixed to the core 
with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue 
for easy removal.
• When handling media, wear the gloves.
If you touch the media with your bare hand, the 
media may be stained due to fingerprints or oil of 
your finger. Be careful about it.
• Do not leave the media with the heater ON for a 
long time.
Waviness may occur on the media and it may 
cause media clogging.
• Use the recommended media.
Use media recommended by MIMAKI to ensure 
reliable, high-quality printing.
• Set the heater temperature to meet the 
characteristics of the media.
Automatic temperature setting can be made on the 
operation panel by setting the profile on the 
dedicated RIP. For setting on the RIP, refer to the 
instruction manual for your RIP.
• Pay attention to the expansion and contraction 
of the media.
Do not use media immediately after unpacking. 
The media can be affected by the room 
temperature and humidity, and thus it may expand 
and contract. The media have to be left in the 
atmosphere in which they are to be used for 1 day 
or more after unpacked.
• Do not use curled media.
This may result in paper jamming. If a regular-
sized coated sheet of media is rolled and stored, 
the coated side has to face outside.
• Be careful to dusts on the edge face of the 
medium.
Some rolls have dusts contained in the package 
gathered on the edge surface of the roll. If you use 
as it is, the drawing quality may be degraded due 
to nozzle missing or ink drops. Be sure to set the 
roll after removing dusts adhering on the edge 
face of the roll.
• Please pay attention to the humidity of the 
media storage location.
Due to the nature of the media, such as the 
sticking of the media may occur by the humidity of 
the place that stores the media. Please follow the 
contents specified in recommended environment 
in “Machine specifications” on P.6-2 for the usage 
environment of this machine and the media 
storage environment.
• When setting fabric, make sure you adjust the 
height of the heads according to the thickness of 
the fabric. Otherwise, the print fabric or heads 
could be damaged.




Chapter 1 Before Use
1-14
• Material that bends when installed on the feeding device
because the paper core being used is not strong enough
Requirements for printing on fabric
About the emergency 
switch
Please press the emergency switch when you feel danger
such as hand or hair is caught or the like during operating
this machine.
The position of the emergency switch
Emergency switch is attached to the position shown in the
following figure.
If you feel the danger, please press near switch.
• When using media other than the above, make 
sure you perform a test print.
• Check the print results to determine if the media is 
suitable.
Item Requirements Notes
Uneven width
±5 mm or less 
from one side to 
the other
Curls when 
spread out
No one-direction 
curls
Height of wrinkles 
(slack) when 
spread out on a 
flat surface
1 mm or less
Differences in the 
roll edges
±15 mm, fabric 
(with a width of 
500 mm or less) 
±2 mm
Internal roll 
diameter
3 inches
Paper core 
strength
Roll curve of 5 
mm or less when 
set
(Paper core 
thickness of 5 mm 
or more)
Paper core 
extending beyond 
the edge of the 
fabric
20 mm or more
Fixing the paper 
core
Tape in 3 points or 
less or secure 
with a weak 
adhesive
Roll outside 
diameter
Φ300 mm or less
Roll weight 60 kg or less
Printing surface
Involuted/
Revoluted
N/A
Winding wrinkles None




Chapter 1 Before Use
1-15
1
2
2
2
2
If you feel the danger
1
Press the emergency switch.
• Buzzer  sounds  inform  you  that  you  have  an
emergency stop.
• The display will show the message.
2
Remove the cause you press the 
emergency switch and confirm the safety.
3
Cancel the emergency stop state.
• Emergency stop state is canceled by  turning the
emergency stop switch, or by pulling in front.
• When the cover such as the front cover is open, 
please close the cover.
This machine will not return to the local.
• The color fixation device also becomes the error 
state when pushing the emergency stop switch.
Cancel the error of the color fixation device, too.




1-16
Chapter 1 Before Use




This chapter
describes procedures and setting methods for ink and media preparation, and printing.
Workflow  .......................................................2-2
Turning the Power ON/OFF ..........................2-3
Turning the Power ON  ................................ 2-3
Turning the Power OFF ............................... 2-3
Setting a Media .............................................2-4
Checking the Spacers  ................................. 2-4
Installing the Antistatic Fabric  ..................... 2-5
Setting the Head Gap .................................. 2-6
Note for media setting  ................................. 2-6
Setting a roll media  ..................................... 2-7
Preparation to install Take-up tension bar 
weight ........................................................ 2-18
Changing the printing origin  ...................... 2-18
Preparing the Color Fixation Device  ...........2-19
Name and Function of Each Part of The 
Color Fixation Device  ................................ 2-19
Prepare Color Fixation Device  .................. 2-20
Operation Menu of Color fixation Device  .. 2-21
Setting Menu List  ...................................... 2-23
Setting color fixing temperature  ................ 2-23
Flow of color fixation device operation  ...... 2-25
Warming Up  .............................................. 2-27
Media Setting  ............................................ 2-27
Adjusting the opening at the aperture 
plate ...........................................................2-27
Processing when media is terminated  .......2-28
Resetting the proper temperature ..............2-29
Other Settings ............................................2-29
Setting the Color Fixation Device from 
the Printer  ..................................................2-31
Printing Workflow .......................................2-32
Test Printing  ................................................2-33
Test Printing ...............................................2-33
Head Cleaning  ............................................2-34
About head cleaning ..................................2-34
Perform head cleaning depending on 
the test printing result  ................................2-34
Setting of Media Correction .........................2-35
Setting of Media Correction  .......................2-35
Correct the ink drop position for bidirectional printing 
..2-36
Printing Data  ...............................................2-37
Starting a Printing Operation  .....................2-37
Stopping a Printing Operation ....................2-37
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear)  ........2-37
Behavior after printing has been 
completed  ..................................................2-38
Chapter 2
Basic Operations




2-2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Workflow
Turning the Power ON/OFF
Referring  to  “Turning  the  Power  ON/OFF”
( P.2-3).

Setting a Media
Referring to “Setting a Media” ( P.2-4).

Preparing  the  Color  Fixation
Device
Referring  to  “Preparing  the  Color  Fixation
Device” ( P.2-19).

Test Printing
Referring to “Test Printing” ( P.2-33).

Head Cleaning
Referring to “Head Cleaning” ( P.2-34).

Setting of Media Correction
Referring  to  “Setting  of  Media  Correction”
(P.2-35).

Correct  the  ink  drop  position  for
bidirectional printing
Referring  to  “
Correct  the  ink  drop  position  for
bidirectional printing
” ( P.2-36).

Printing Data
Referring to “Printing Data” ( P.2-37).





2-3
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Turning the Power ON/
OFF
Turning the Power ON
This  machine  is  provided  with  the  following  two  power
switches:
Main power switch :
It  is  located  on  the  side  of  this  machine.  Keep  this
switch ON all the time.
[END/POWER] key : 
Normally, use this key to turn the power ON/OFF.
The  nozzle  missing  prevention  function  periodically
operates even with the [END/POWER] key turned OFF
when the main power switch is turned ON.
1
Turn the main power switch ON.
• Set the main power switches located on the side
of this machine to the “I” side.
2
Turn the power on, by pressing the 
 key.
• The machine enters LOCAL.
• The firmware version is displayed when the power
is turned ON, and the machine performs its initial
operation.
3
The machine enters LOCAL.
4
Turn ON the power of the connected PC.
Turning the Power OFF
When having ended the operation of the machine, turn the
power OFF by  pressing the power  button located on the
front side.
Check the following items when turning the power OFF.
• If  the  machine  is  receiving  data  from  the  PC  or  if
there is any data that has not been output yet
• If the head has returned to the capping station
• f any error has occurred 
( P.5-12 “Error messages“)
1
Turn OFF the power of the connected PC.
2
Turn the power off, by giving the 
 key  a long press.
• Do  not  turn  OFF  the  main  power  switch  located
on the side of the machine.
• To  use  this  machine  again,  press  the  [END/
POWER] key.
Cautions about Turning the Power 
OFF
 Do not turn the main power switch OFF.
When  the  main  power  switch  is  ON,  the  power
periodically  turns  ON  and  the  nozzle  missing
prevention function (flushing function) operate.
When  the  main  power  switch  has  been  turned  OFF,
the auto maintenance functions, such  as flushing, do
not operate, and this may cause nozzle missing.
 Keep the front cover and the maintenance 
cover closed.

Turn the power OFF after having checked the 
position of the head.
If the power is turned OFF in a state where the head
has  not  returned  to  the  capping  station,  the  head
dries, which may cause nozzle missing.
In this case, turn the power ON again and check that
the head has returned to the capping station, and turn
the power OFF.
 Do not turn the power OFF during printing.
The head may not return to the capping station.
 After having turned the power switch OFF by 
pressing [END/POWER] key, turn the main 
power switch OFF.
When turning the main power switch off for moving the
machine or for solving the error or the like, press the
[END/POWER]  key  a  long  time  on  the  front  of  the
machine,  check  the  display  is  turned  off  on  the
operation panel, and turn the main power switch off.
• Turn the power ON after the front cover and 
maintenance cover are closed.
• Always make the main power switch ON. If you 
leave it OFF, it may cause nozzle missing of the 
head. In some cases, recovery may become 
difficult.
Power button

Power button





2-4
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting a Media
This  machine  can  be  used  with  a  roll  media  and  leaf
media.
For usable medias, refer to P.1-13 “Usable sizes of
media”.
Checking the Spacers
Attach  the  type  (you  can  attach  3  types)  of  spacer  you
need  to  use  according  to  the  media  and  print  method
being used.
About the different spacers
You can attach 3 types of spacers to the machine.
 When printing on fabric (When not using 
overprint)
Use the ink receiving spacer.
 When printing on fabric (When using overprint)
Use  the  ink  receiving  spacer  and  the  fabric  edge
spacer.
 When printing on cloth (when a print quality on 
a thick media is unstable)
Please use an  adjustment  spacer after having tested
by drawing data whether the ink does not bleed to the
back of the cloth.
 When correcting drop position
Use the adjusting spacer.
Installing and removing the ink receiving 
spacer and the fabric edge spacer
Make  sure  you  install  spacers  to  prevent  media  being
soiled  by  ink  mist  when  printing  and  to  apply  the  ink
correctly.
1
Apply fabric retainers on the left and right.
2
Installing the ink receiving spacer and the 
fabric edge spacer.
• The ink receiving spacer is 250 mm (W) x 177 mm
(D).
Adjust  the  number  of  ink  receiving  spacers  installed
according to the width of the image being printed.
Ink receiving spacer (Large/Small)
Fabric edge spacer
Adjusting spacer
If printing on a media of which the ink 
bleeds to the back, bled ink attaches to 
other points. As this causes that the 
printer becomes dirty and a picture quality 
turns worse, do not use such a media.
Ink receiving spacer Fabric edge spacer





2-5
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Installing the Antistatic Fabric
Some types of media have a tendency to generate static
electricity.
We recommend attaching the antistatic fabric to prevent a
decline in print quality caused by static electricity.
Installation position of the antistatic 
fabric
Standards  for  installing  the  ink  receiving
spacer and the fabric edge spacer
• Makes sure that the width of the ink receiving 
spacer and the fabric edge spacer combined is not 
less than the width of the image being printed.
• Adjust the number of spacers so that there is a gap 
of at least 10 mm to the edge of the image on the 
left and right.
• Move the edge of the fabric edge spacer as close 
as possible to the edge of the media.
Note  that  the  antistatic  fabric  does  not
completely eliminate static electricity.
• The antistatic fabric reduces the influence of static 
electricity. Therefore, attaching the antistatic fabric 
does not completely prevent any decline in print 
quality caused by static electricity.
• You can also reduce the generation of static 
electricity by using humidifiers in combination with 
the antistatic fabric.
Fabric edge spacer

Amount of overprint: 
less than 20 mm
Print width
Media
Ink receiving 
spacer
10mm or more
10mm or more
Fabric 
edge 
spacer
Increase the gap in the ink receiving spacer 
according to the margins in the media, and 
adjust so that the gap is equal.
Amount of overprint: 
less than 20 mm

Attach antistatic 
fabric to the front 
of the vertical 
section of the 
pinch rollers. 





2-6
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Setting the Head Gap
Set  the  head  gap  (height  from  the  media  to  the  nozzle
plane of the heads).
When the carriage is to move above the platen for printing
or maintenance, it moves while keeping the head gap at
the preset value.
The  upper  limit  of  the  head  gap  varies  with  media
thickness.
Available setting  values:  [1.5  mm  to 7.0 mm] (in units of
0.1 mm / Default : 2.0 mm)
1
Press the   key, and press the 
 (MEDIA) in LOCAL.
• Media setting menu will be displayed.
2
Press   to select “Head Gap”, and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select the Head Gap 
value, and press the   key.
• Set value : 1.5 to 7.0mm
4
Press   key.
5
Press   key several times to 
end the setting.
How to check the value of the head 
gap
When  you  check  the  head  gap  value  currently  set,
perform the following procedures:
1
Press the   key in Local.
2
Press the   key several times to 
display [HEAD GAP].
• The head gap value currently set is displayed.
Note for media setting
When setting media, read the following notes carefully.
• Head gap value must be changed each time when 
the media to be used is changed.
• In this machine you can register printing conditions 
(SETUP 1 to 4) in advance to match the media to 
be used.( P.3-5)
If the head gap value is registered in the SETUP 1 
to 4, you do not need to set the head gap value 
each time of changing the media.
• Take care not to drop the media on your foot when 
setting the media. It may cause an injury due to 
the media.
• When setting a roll media, work by two or more 
people. Otherwise, you may hurt your back by the 
weight of the roll media.
• In the cases below, be sure to fix tension-bars on 
both sides of the printer. If you leave the tension-
bars unfixed, the bars supported by media may fall 
down. Please be careful.
(1) When lifting up the clamp lever
(2) When cutting media manually
(3) When  cutting  media  with  tools  you  have
(cutter, scissors, etc.)
• In the following cases, the media may not be 
detected correctly.
• When setting a transparent media / when a media 
is exposed to direct sunshine.
• Do not use a printed media. Otherwise, ink can 
adhere to the pinch rollers and media may be 
stained or may not be detected.
• Straighten the significantly or internally curled 
media to be fed along the platen.
• If the media is left set on the machine for a long 
time, the media may form an irregular surface for 
the heat from the print-heater. If printing on such 
an irregular surface, the head may rub on the 
media. If an irregular surface is found on the 
media, feed the media with the [] key to avoid 
printing on the irregular surface, and set a new 
origin. ( P.2-18)
• Set the media based on the center of the machine.
• Periodically replace the paper core for taking up 
the media. If you use the one whose inner has 
been peeled due to long-term use as shown in the 
right photo, taking up the media cannot be 
performed normally in some cases.




2-7
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Setting a roll media
Prepare for the take-up device first
Prepare  for  the  take-up  device  before  setting  the  roll
media.
1
Remove the roll shaft on the take-up 
device at the front of this machine.
(1) Loosen the cover fixing screw attached to the
cover of left of take-up device and unlock the
AMF lock by sliding it.
(2) Open the covers.
(3) Loosen the cover fixing screw attached to the 
cover of left of take-up device and unlock the 
AMF lock by sliding it.
(4) Open the covers.
(5) Remove the roll shaft.
2
Remove the roll holders.
• The roll holders are on both for the right and left of
the roll holder. Remove both with the procedures
below:
(1) Loosen screws (1 each on the right and left)
with supplied ratchet handle.
(2) Remove the holders.
• Handle the roll shaft with care, since it is very 
heavy with media. To avoid an accident or injury, 
be sure to grip the handles on both ends.
Handle

Cover(left)
Cover(right)
Roll shaft

Cover fixing 
screw
AMF lock

• When remove the AMF lock, the bottom cover will 
be lowered.
AMF under cover

Ratchet handle
Roll holder





2-8
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
l
3
Attach the paper core.
(1) Put the roll shaft through a paper core.
(2) Adjust the paper core so that it comes to the 
center of the roll shaft.
(3) Turn the handle of the right and left roll 
holder,  and set to the innermost of the green 
part of the movable range seal.
(4) Push both sides of the roll holders into the 
paper core, and tighten screws with supplied 
ratchet handle to fix.
(5) Turn the handle of the take-up roll holder to 
tightly secure the paper core.
• Please be careful not to pinch your hand between 
the paper tube and the roll shaft.
Paper core

Handle
left right
movable range seal

Ratchet 
handle

When you fix the roll holder, please do not lift 
the lever of the fixing screws.
• When the entire fixing screws are raised above, 
screws idle and can not be fixed.
Please note the orientation of the ratchet handle 
at the time of fixing.
• If the ratchet handle is turned 
sideways, hit the roll shaft during 
the unit is in operation, and may 
not be able to rotate smoothly.
After tightening the screw, turn 
the ratchet handle in toward the 
roll holder.
• As the paper core is not idling in the middle of 
taking up the media, please tightly secure the 
paper core.
• When you fix the paper core, keep it within the 
range indicated with the “movable range seal”.
Handle
movable range seal
Roll holder

movable range seal 
(Green part)





2-9
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
4
Set the roll shaft with the paper core on the 
take-up device, and close the covers on 
the right and left sides of the roll shaft.
(1) Fitting the A part of the roll shaft to the B part
bearing of the machine, put it on.
(2) Close the left cover.
(3) Slide the lever to lock.
(4) Close the right cover.
(5) Lifting the AMF bottom cover.
(6) Slide the lever to lock.
Setting a roll media
Set a roll media to the feeding device on the back.
When setting a roll media, set “Feeding unit” and “Take-up
unit” of the machine setting to “ON”.
Fabric  media  that  is  set  in  the machine  is  fed  along  the
route shown in the figure below.
Understanding  the  route  the  media  will  take  beforehand
allows you to set the media smoothly and efficiently.
① Lapel bar 1
② Lapel bar 2
③ Lapel bar 3
④ Lapel bar 4
⑤ Lapel bar 5
⑥ Lapel bar 6
⑦ Lapel bar 7
⑧ Lapel bar 8
• Carefully set A part so as not to hit near frame. 
Scratches can cause malfunction.
• Put the shaft on gently, not roughly.
A part
B part

Lever

Lever

• Take care not to drop the media on your foot when 
setting the media.
• Handle clamp levers carefully.
Do not push the lever up when tension-bar is lifted. 
Be sure to fix the tension-bar with the tension-bar 
lock plate and push up / down the lever.
• When using the media take-up machine, be 
careful about the points below:
At the feeding side, make sure you set the media 
so that the the print surface for the media being 
used matches the route.
At the take-up side, set the printed surface to 
“Revoluted”.
• When feeding fabric through the machine, make 
sure you pull the fabric straight out from the roll to 
avoid getting wrinkles in the fabric.
• Make sure that the grit roller and ink landing plate 
are clean before setting the fabric media. If the 
areas are soiled, see P.4-4 to clean them.
When the pr
inting surface is involuted
When the pri
nting surface is revoluted
①②③
④⑧⑦⑤⑥





2-10
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
1
Set both of “Setting Feeding unit” and 
“Setting Take-up unit” of the machine 
setting to “ON”.( P.3-18,P.3-19)
2
Slowly lower the tension bar at the rear of 
the machine
• Unlock the tension-bar, and then lower it.
3
Remove the roll shaft on the feeding 
device at the back of this machine.
(1) Lower  the  lever  that  is  attached to  the right
and left of the cover of media feeding device
and release the lock.
(2) Open the covers.
(3) Remove the roll shaft.
• To  prevent  dust,  set  paper  core  or media  to  the
roll shaft on the table or sheet. Dust on the paper
core or the media may cause defective print.
4
Remove the roll holders.
• The roll holders are on both for the right and left of
the roll holder. Remove both with the procedures
below:
(1) Loosen screws (1 each on the right and left)
with supplied ratchet handle.
(2) Remove the holders.
5
Set a media on the roll shaft.
(1) Put the roll shaft through a paper core.
• Need to adjust the position of the paper core
to come in the middle of the roll shaft. Set the
media so  as  to  align  the scale of  media  set
label  and  the  center  position  of  the  paper
core .
(2) Push both sides of the roll holders into the 
paper core, and tighten screws with supplied 
ratchet handle to secure.
6
Put the roll shaft with the media on the 
feeding device.
(1) Fitting the A part of the roll shaft to the B part
bearing of the machine, put it on.
(2) Close the right cover.
(3) Slide the lever to lock.
• When carrying the roll shaft, be sure to grip 
handles on the both ends. Gripping other parts, 
your hand may get stuck in the printer.
Tension-bar 
lock plate
Tension-bar

Ratchet handle
Roll holder

• Please be careful not to pinch your hand between 
the paper tube and the roll shaft.
• Carefully set A part so as not to hit near frame. 
Scratches can cause malfunction.
• Put the shaft on gently, not roughly.
A part
B part





2-11
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
7
Open the front cover and raise the clamp 
lever at the front of this machine.
8
Lift the tension-bars at the front and rear of 
the machine, and fix them with the tension-
bar lock plates.
9
Feed the media through lapel bar 1.
10
Feed the media from outside the feeding 
tension bar to lapel bar 2.
11
Feed enough of the media under lapel bar 
3.
• At  this  point,  remove  any  wrinkles  from  the
surface of the media.
12
Insert the edge of the media between the 
grit roller and the pinch roller, and slide it 
to the front of the machine.
13
Lower the clamp lever at the rear of this 
machine.
• The media is held.
Clamp lever
Clamp lever
Front cover





2-12
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
14
Go to the front of the machine, raise the 
clamp lever while holding the edge of the 
media in your hand, and pull out the 
media.
• Make sure that there are no wrinkles at the front
or back of the machine.
15
Close the cover on the left of the feeding 
device at the back of this machine.
• Close the covers and rock the cover.
• Lock the roll shaft rotation.
16
Go to the front of the machine, and lower 
the clamp lever while stretching the media.
17
Adjust the position of the tension-bar with 
the switches on the left of the  feeding 
device.
(1) Set the rotation direction switch to the bottom
arrow.
(2) While pulling the pin on the outside of the 
tension-bar lock plate, set the left side switch 
to [Manual].
(3) The tension-bar lowers a little. Switch back 
and forth between [Manual] and [Auto] until 
the tension bar is almost parallel to the floor. 
When the tension bar is almost parallel to the 
floor, switch back to [Auto].
18
Confirm that the opening at the aperture 
plate on the color fixation device is large 
enough.
• Make sure that the media is fed straight to the 
brake roller.
• Exercise caution when setting the media on a hot 
color fixation device, as its extremely high 
temperature may cause you to sustain burns.
Opening at the 
aperture plate
Aperture plate
Side view
Pulling roller
Opening at the 
aperture plate
Front Back
Pulling roller





2-13
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
19
Open the hood cover of the coloring 
heater.
20
Pull out the edge of the media until it 
reaches the top part of the color fixation 
device.
Pull out the edge of the media to cover a length
of  approximately  30  mm,  and  place  it  on  top  of
the aperture plate on the color fixation device.
• If you pull the edge of the media too far out, it will
not  fit  into the  color  fixation device,  and  you  will
not be able to guide the media.
If you pull the edge too far out, use the back feed
function or a similar method to adjust the amount
of media.
21
Use the jig to pass the media through the 
opening at the aperture plate.
• Use  the  following  jig:    Guiding  fabric  jig
(accessory box 1)
(1) Insert the jig into the central part of the color
fixation  device  until  the  auxiliary  moving
rollers touch the surface.
(2) Press the jig gently against the pulling roller.
(3) Move the jig to the right and left, and slowly 
insert the edge of the media into the color 
fixation device.  Move the jig gradually, and 
completely insert the media into the opening 
at the aperture plate.
• If the jig hits the  screws or  some other parts, do
not push the  jig inside by  force, but rather pull it
out first, move it, and then try to reinsert it.
Approx. 30 mm
Aperture plate
Approx. 30 mm
Aperture 
plate
Side view
Media
Pulling roller
Front Back
Opening at the 
aperture plate

Opening at the 
aperture plate

Auxiliary moving rollers
Handle

(1)
(3)
(2)(3)

(2)

Side view
Guiding fabric jig
Aperture plate
Media
Front Back
Pulling roller
Auxiliary 
moving rollers





2-14
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
22
Use the jog keys on the main printer unit to 
feed the media until its edge comes out of 
the bottom part of the color fixation device.
When  feeding  the  media,  pay  attention  to  the
following.
• Make sure the media does not get stuck.
• Make  sure  the  media  does  not  get  wrapped
around the pulling roller.
• Make sure the media does not accumulate on top
of the aperture plate of the color fixation device.
(If the  media accumulates on  the aperture  plate,
use  the  jig  to  adjust  any  accumulated  or  loose
media.)
23
 Press   to loosen the media.
• Loosen the media until it reaches to the floor.
24
 Feed the media to the base of lapel bar 4.
• Use  [▲][▼]  to  loosen  the  media  as  much  as
necessary.
25
Feed the media to the top of lapel bar 5 and 
label bar 6.
• Use  [▲][▼]  to  loosen  the  media  as  much  as
necessary.
26
Feed the media under the tension bar.
• Use  [▲][▼]  to  loosen  the  media  as  much  as
necessary.
Aperture 
plate





2-15
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
27
Feed the media through the top of lapel bar 
7 until it reaches the take-up device.
• Make sure that the media is fed straight.
• Check that neither end of the media is curling and
wrapping  around  the  lapel  bars.  Pay  particular
attention to the lapel bar for the coloring heater as
it is difficult to check.
28
Secure the media on the take-up device.
(1) As indicated, fix the media on the paper core
with  tape  so  that  the  printed  surface  is
“revoluted”.
• Along  the  paper  core,  fix  the  media  on
several positions with tape in the order in the
figure so that the media may not wrinkle.
29
Press   to loosen the media.
• Loosen the media until it reaches to the floor.
30
With switches of the take-up device, roll up 
the media about once.
(1) Making the left switch to [MANUAL] and the
right  ↑↓  switch  to  the  direction  taking  up
the media, take up the media.
(2) Just before the media stretched tight, turn 
the left switch to [AUTO] to stop.
31
Press   to loosen the media.
• Loosen the media until it reaches to the floor.
32
At the front, lift the tension- bar down 
slowly.
• Remove the  stopper, and  then  while  holding  the
tension bar, unlock it, and then lower it.
33
Press   to lift the tension-bar up 
and to stretch the loosened media.
• Turn the switch to [AUTO]. Tension-bar lifts, taking
up  the  media,  and  automatically  stops  at  the
proper position.
• Surface waviness or ruck may affect the quality of 
currently printed image.
When fixing media with tape, align the media 
along the direction indicated with an arrow in the 
figure.
• If you pull the media too much when fixing with 
tape, the media tension may not be even. And, it 
may negatively affect the media feeding.
• Rolling up the media too tight, covers of take-up 
device opens and an error [Cover Open] appears. 
In this case, open the right cover of the take-up 
device, and loosen the tension of the media.
• When the tension bar does not move upward even 
if you press the [][] switch, stretch the slack 
media by operating the switch.
(1) Set the 
↑↓ switch to the take-up direction
of  the  media,  and  turn  the  switch  to
[MANUAL]. (The tension-bar is lifted.)
• When the media is fed and the tension-bar
is not lifted, turn the ↑↓ switch to the other
side.
(2) When  the  tension  bar  rises,  tension  is
applied  to  the  media,  so  turn  the  switch  to
[AUTO] to stop the tension bar.
(3) Turn the 
↑↓ switch to the take-up direction
of the media.
• The media between the take-up device and 
carriage cannot be printed.




2-16
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
34
Holding the media on both sides, lift it 
carefully.
35
Open the hood cover for the coloring 
heater.
Entering the media width and 
remaining amount
When  you  set  “Media  remaining  amount  display”  and
“Media detection/ width” to “ON” and “MANUAL”( P.3-
19,  P.3-20),  input  screen  for  the  media  width  and  the
remaining  amount  is  displayed  after detecting the  media
thickness.
1
Display the screen for entering media 
width.
• When  you  set  the  to  “AUTO”  in  the  “Setting  the
Media  Detect/Width”  of  the  machine  setting,  this
screen is not displayed. ( P.3-20)
2
Press   to enter the media width.
3
Press   key.
4
Display the screen for entering media 
remaining amount.
• When  you  set  “Setting  the  Display  of  Media
Remain”  of  the  machine  setting  to  “OFF”,  this
screen is not displayed. ( P.3-19)
5
Press   to enter the media 
remaining amount.
6
Press   key.
• When the tension bar of media take-up device 
locates at a high position, the following message is 
displayed.
Press [▼] to take the media out. 
When Tension bar goes down to a certain height, 
the screen is switched into the following.
Press [ENTER] key to switch into the next screen.
巻取テンションバー高い
搬送方向スイッチを確認し
OKが表示されるまで
フィ ードしてく ださい

Take-up Tension bar is
high. Please feed media
until OK is displayed.

巻取テンションバーOK
[ENT]

Take-up Tension bar is OK





2-17
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Installing the counter weight for 
adjusting the take-up/ feeding tension-
bar weight
Install  the  proper  number  of  counter  weights  depending
on the media condition.
You  can attach the counter weight up  to 5 each  for right
and left.
For the feeding tension bar
Attach weights to the tension bar when you want to make
the feeding tension bar heavier.
After  attaching  the  counter  weight,  stop  so  that  the
weights do not fall.
If you want to reduce the weight of the tension bar, tighten
the nut and shorten the spring.
For the take-up tension bar
Attach weights to the carabiner on the base of the tension
bar  when  you  want  to  make  the  take-up  tension  bar
heavier.
Adjust the number of weights according to your needs.
If  you  want  to  reduce  the  weight  of  the  take-up  tension
bar, connect the carabiner on the base of the tension bar
to  the  carabiner  at  the  top,  and  attach  weights  to  the
machine’s carabiner.
Adjust the number of weights according to your needs.
Media condition Solution
Ruck is generated in the media 
feeding direction.
The tension applied on the 
media is too strong.
According to your media, 
reduce the weight of the 
tension bar.
The media skews at printing.
The media sags and the 
machine cannot take it up 
beautifully.
The tension applied on the 
media is too weak.
According to your media, 
increase the weight of the 
tension bar.
The media floats on the platen.
If you want to reduce the 
weight of the tension bar, 
please tighten the nut 
and shorten the spring.
After attaching the 
counter weight, please 
stop so that the weight 
does not fall.
Attach the weight of the tension bar when you want to 
make the take-up tension bar and the feeding tension bar 
heavier.

• The counter weight is very heavy. Handle it with 
care.
If your finger or foot is stuck in the weight, you may 
be injured.
• Not to lose the unused counter weight, put it in the 
storage box.




2-18
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Preparation to install Take-up tension 
bar weight
In case of using Tension bar by 
making it heavy
Stack  the  ring  parts of  CW  wire  both  ends  and  hitch  the
hook.
In case of using Tension bar by 
making it light
1
Remove the wire guide cover.
2
Hitch the wire to two pulleys.
3
Stack the ring parts of CW wire both ends 
and hitch the hook.
4
Hitch the hook of the weight to the rings of 
CW wire both ends.
Changing the printing origin
The position of the printing origin can be changed.
1
In Local, Press   .
• It enters into the origin setting mode.
2
Press   to set the 
temperature of heater.
• Select the  carriage and  media,  moving the  point
with [][][][].
• When  you  press  [FUNC2](CUT)  here,  you  can
perform media cutting.
3
After determining the origin, press the 
 key.
• The printing origin is changed.
Changing the printing origin
When  media  is  automatically  detected,  the  printing  start
point  (origin)  is  set  at  the  position  shown  in  the  figure
below.
You  can  change  the  printing  origin  according  to  your
needs.
Hook
Ring part

Wire guide cover
Screw

フック
リング部
Wire
Pulleys

Hook
Ring part

Hook

Set Origin
X Position
0.0
Y Position
0.0

Origin
(Length)
Origin
(Width)

Printing 
origin
10mm
Fabric 
retainer





2-19
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Preparing the Color Fixation Device
This machine performs a consistent dry to color fixation process for after printing. Additionally, make sure you perform a
test for each media type (fabric) in advance to realize optimum color quality.
You need to set the heater temperature for the color fixation device before printing.
Name and Function of Each Part of The Color Fixation Device
Turn on / off the color fixation device
1
Turn on the main power switch
• Turn the main power switch to the "ON" position.
• When turning on the main power supply, please do not touch the heater part.
• When performing maintenance, be sure to turn off the main power.
• When turning on the main power supply, please do not block the filter part and the punching part.
Heater ON/OFF switch
Turn on / off heater on local control.
LED blinking: Heater is waiting 
(WAITING). Turn the switch to the right 
to turn on the heater.
LED lit: Heater is ON. Turn the switch 
to the left to turn off the heater.
Main power switch
Turn ON / OFF the main power supply 
of color fixation device.
Emergency switch
Emergency stop the heater and printer by 
pressing the switch in case of emergency.
To cancel, please turn to the right to release 
the switch and reset from the touch panel.
Punching section
Pilot lamp
Displays the state of the color fixation device.
Off: Main power OFF / Heater OFF.
Green blinking: Heater is warming up 
(HEATING).
Green lit: Ready for coloring (READY).
Red blinking: Cover is open.
Red lit: Error.
Filter
Operation panel
Perform various operations of the 
heater.





2-20
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Emergency stop
The emergency stop switch is attached to the heater (1 point) and the printer side (5 points).
The emergency stop switch on the printer side is effective only when the printer is activated.
If you feel danger, please push the switch near you.
For details, refer to P.1-14「About the emergency switch?
Prepare Color Fixation Device
Control Panel
Operation of the color fixation device is performed on the operation panel of the color fixation device.
The operation panel of the color fixation device adopts a touch panel. Please tap the screen and operate.
TOP screen
① Status indication
The following eight types of status are displayed.
•OFF
• WAITING (Waiting)
• READY (Reached Coloring temperature)
• STAND BY (Standby temperature)
• HEATING (Heating)
• COOLING (Cooling)
• ERROR (Error occurring)
• MAINTE (Turning on the power, during maintenance)
② Interlock control display
The following two interlocking control modes are displayed.
•LOCAL
•REMOTE
Tap to switch.
However, it can not be used when the ERROR is shown on the display.
③ Time Display
The current time is displayed.
④ Screen transition 1
Tap to move to the motion setting screen.
⑤ Screen transition 2
Tap to switch to the temperature chart screen.
⑥ Setting menu
Various setting screen is displayed.
⑦ Temperature display
The following two types of temperature are displayed.
• Current temperature
• Set temperature
By tapping, the set temperature can be changed.
①②
③
④
⑤
⑥
⑦





2-21
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Operation Menu of Color fixation Device
[Status]
WAITING  Displayed in the waiting mode.
HEATING  Displayed while the device is 
heating up to the color fixation 
temperature.
READY  Displayed when the color 
fixation temperature has been 
reached.
COOLING  Displayed until the 
temperature in the furnace 
drops after you switch off the 
heater.
HEATING
 
:
 
S
  Displayed while the device is 
heating up to the standby 
temperature.
STANDBY  Displayed when the standby 
temperature has been 
reached.
ERROR  Displayed when an error 
occurs.
MAINTE  Displayed when the power 
supply is switched on.
[LOCAL]
Select this when turning the heater on or 
off on the heater side.
[REMOTE]
Select this when turning the heater on or 
off on the printer side.
[PV]
Current temperature
[SV]
Set temperature
[HEATER]
Switches the heater on or off in the LOCAL 
control mode.
Only the OFF setting is available in the 
REMOTE control mode.
[DOOR]
This button releases the door lock.
You can release the lock when the 
temperature inside the furnace does not 
exceed 50°C in the MAINTE 
mode (when LOCAL or REMOTE is 
switched off).
[LOG]
Displays a list of the operation and error 
logs of the heater.
Refer to the error list for error descriptions.
[ERROR]
Opens a window with simple error 
descriptions.
Displays the changes in the temperature 
inside the furnace.
[SSR 1~8]
Lights up when a power controller,
heater or SSR error occurs.
* To reset the warning lamps, turn the main 
power supply off.
[BLOWER1]
Lights up when an error occurs in the 
inverter.
[BLOWER2]
Lights up if the blower stops when the 
command for its operation is active.
[TEMPERATUBE]
Lights up when a control temperature error 
occurs.
[PRINTER_EMR]
Lights up when the emergency button is 
pressed on the printer side.
[HEATER_EMR]
Lights up when the emergency button is 
pressed on the color fixation device side.
[THERMOSTAT]
Lights up when an error in the internal 
temperature of the furnace occurs.
* This warning lamp cannot be reset until 
the temperature inside the furnace drops.
[COVER OP HI TEMP]
Lights up if you open the cover when the 
temperature inside the furnace is high.
[COVER OPEN]
Lights up when the cover is opened.
[HT TIMEOUT]
Lights up when the heater is left on.
[FILTER CLEANING]
Lights up when the cleaning alarm for the 
filter of the heater electric components is 
activated.
[FILTER REPLACE]
Lights up when the replacement alert for 
the filter of the heater electric components 
is activated.
[Ext ERR]
Lights up when an external input signal 
stops the heater.
[SD CARD ERR]
Lights up when the SD card is missing, 
broken, or when its cover is opened.
[VERSION ERR]
Lights up when the main PLC unit and 
touch panel versions do not match.
[PLC BATT ERR]
Lights up when an internal battery error 
occurs in the main PLC unit.
* You need to reconfigure the parameters, 
as they are reset after you replace the 
battery.
[TEMP CTRL1/2 ERR]
Lights up when an error occurs in the 
temperature control unit.
[Log window (2 lines per log)]
Line 1: Date and time of occurrence
Line 2: Event code/error code
[  /  ]
Log scroll
* This function is disabled if the log window 
is not selected.
[Clearing the log]
To clear the log, go to the setting menu 
and select [Log Clear].
Status Time Status Time Status Time
Status Time
Status Time Status Time
Display clear





2-22
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
HEATER SETTING 1
[Temperature Indication]
Changes the displayed 
temperature units.
[Temperature Setting]
Sets the temperature.
[Timer Setting]
Configures the timer or clears the 
filter time.
[External Setting]
Sets the external input and output.
[Log Clear]
Clears the log.
Changes the displayed temperature units.
[Celsius]
Displays the temperature in Celsius.
[Fehrenheit]
Displays the temperature in Fahrenheit.
Temperature Setting
[Fixing Heater Temperature]
Displays the temperature set for color 
fixation.
* Displays the temperature when the heater 
is on in the LOCAL mode, or when the 
printer sends the command to turn the 
heater on.
[STAND-BY Temperature]
Displays the temperature set for the 
standby mode.
* 
The transition to the standby temperature 
is available only with the printer command.
Timer Setting
[Automatic Heater Off Timer]
Displays the time required for the status 
to change from “Ready” to “OFF”.
* The timer is disabled during printing.
[Filter Cleaning Timer]
Displays the time elapsed after the filter 
is cleaned.
[CLR]
Clears the time elapsed after the filter is 
cleaned.
[Filter Replace Timer]
Displays the time elapsed after the filter 
is replaced.
[CLR]
Clears the time elapsed after the filter is 
replaced.
External setting
[External Input]
The heater is switched off after the signal 
input.
[Extermal Output]
Activates the non-voltage output mode 
when the heater is on.
Backlight setting
[Backlight off function]
Backlight ON / OFF at heater OFF
[OFF Timer]
Time to turn off at Enable setting (minutes)
HEATER SETTING 2
[Backlight Setting]
Backlight Setting
[Version]
Displays the version.
Displays the version.
[PLC Version]
Displays the version of the main PLC unit.
[Touchpanel Version]
Displays the touch panel version.
Status Time





2-23
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Setting Menu List
*1 Transition to standby is only from the printer.
*2 Heater is not turned off while printing locally.
*3 Value can not be set, only time can be cleared
Setting color fixing temperature
Estimation of temperature setting
The color fixing temperature is based on 180 °C and should be adjusted according to the nature of the media to be used.
Set the color fixing temperature
1
Touch the display temperature of [SV] on the top screen.
2
Set the color fixing temperature
• Setting range:150.0 ~ 200.0 °C
• Some of the following setting items can also be set from the printer side.
Function name Set value
Set from 
printer
Overview
Coloring temperature setting 150.0~180.0~200.0 Yes Set the temperature at color development.
Standby temperature setting 100.0
~120.0~150.0 Yes
16/5000
Set the temperature at standby.*1
Temperature display setting
●
Celsius(°C)
Select the display of current temperature and set 
temperature of heater from Celsius, Fahrenheit.
○ Fahrenheit(
°F)
Automatic OFF time setting 1
~5~60(min) Yes
Local :Set the time to turn off the heater after 
transition to Ready. * 2
Remote:Set the time from the end of printing to 
turning OFF.
Time after filter cleaning 300(H)
Set the time until the alert is issued after cleaning 
the filter. * 3
Time after filter replacement 2000(H) Time until alert comes out after filter exchange * 3
External input setting
○ ON
External input setting
Set whether or not to turn off the heater from 
external input.
●
OFF
External output setting
○ ON
External output setting
Set whether to output no-voltage contact during 
heater ON.
● OFF
Clear log – Clear event and error log.
Backlight setting
○ Enable
Set backlight auto OFF.
Set whether to turn the backlight OFF or not when 
the heater is off.
●
Disable
1
~10~60 Set the time for turning OFF.
Set higher temp Set lower temp  Remarks
Color development Uncolored (dull color)
Stain Many stains
Media shrinkage Shrinking is large
Depending on the media characteristics, media may shrink 
by 2% when coloring.
Resolution (pass) Low pass mode High pass mode
When the high pass is set, the time in the furnace 
becomes long, so set the set temperature low.
Media thickness Thick media Thin media
Please set the temperature high for thick (high density) 
media.




2-24
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Set the color fixing temperature and standby temperature
Set the color fixing temperature and standby temperature when heater is ON from LOCAL mode and the printer.
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
2
Touch the [Temperature Setting]
 
button.
• The temperature setting screen will be displayed.
3
Set color fixing temperature and standby temperature.
• Touch the display temperature to set the temperature.
• [Fixing Heater Temperature]
Setting range: 150.0 
~ 200.0 °C
Setting unit: 0.1 °C
• [STAND-BY Temperature]
Setting range: 100.0 
~ 150.0 °C
Setting unit: 0.1 °C
Temperature chart screen
Displayed when you tap [F2] (Screen transition 2).
Changes in the set temperature and current temperature are displayed in the temperature chart.
Displays changes in temperature for the last 60 minutes.
Returns you to the TOP screen, when you tap  .
Set off timer
Set the time until the heater turns off automatically.
Depending on the mode, the operation of the off timer varies.
• Standby temperature is the holding temperature for shortening heating time of the heater and reducing damage to the 
media.
• The transition to the standby temperature is only possible from the printer.
Mode
Operation
LOCAL
When leaving in the Ready state, the heater automatically turns off after the set time has elapsed.
When printing etc., it turns OFF after the set time has elapsed from the end of printing etc.
REMOTE
After completion of printing, the heater automatically turns OFF after the set time has elapsed.




2-25
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
2
Touch the [Timer Setting]
 
button.
• The timer setting screen is displayed.
3
Set off timer time.
• Touch  the  value  of  [Automatic  Heater  Off  Timer]
and set the time. (1 to 60 minutes).
Flow  of  color  fixation  device  opera-
tion
When you control the color fixation 
device from the printer
1
Turn on the main power supply of color 
fixation device.
2
Start REMOTE mode.
(1) Touch the   button.
The  status  changes  from  [MAINTE]  to
[WAITING].
3
Send print data from computer to printer.
• For the method of sending data, please read the
operation manual of the output software.
• The heater turns ON and the status changes from
[WAITING] to [HEATING].
4
Start printing.
• When  the  furnace  temperature  stabilizes  at  the
set  temperature,  the  status  changes  from
[HEATING]  to  [READY],  and  printing  starts
automatically.
• If  you  have  not  adjusted  the  opening  at  the
aperture  plate  (
P.2-27),  follow  the  procedure
described in  "When you  do  not  control  the  color
fixation device from the printer (
P. 2 - 26 )”".
The automatic printing function is available when
all of the three conditions below are fulfilled.
•You have adjusted the opening at the aperture
plate( P.2-27).
•You have not replaced the media since the last
printing operation.
•You have not changed the temperature settings
since the last printing operation
5
Finish printing.
• When  printing  is  finished,  the  heater  turns  off
automatically  and  the  status  changes  from
[HEATING] to [COOLING].
If the standby time is set in the printer setting, the
status changes to [HEATING: S].
• When  the  furnace  temperature  falls  below  60
degree C, the status changes from [COOLING] to
[WAITING].
• The setting time of [Automatic Heater Off Timer] is 
linked with the setting time of [Heater OFF] on the 
printer side.
25.0
MAINTE
180.0

WAITING

HEATING
READY
COOLING
59.0
WAITING
180.0




2-26
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
6
Exit REMOTE mode.
(1) Touch the   button.
              The status changes from [WAITING] to [MAINTE].
When you do not control the color 
fixation device from the printer
1
Turn on the main power supply of color 
fixation device.
2
Start LOCAL mode.
(1) Touch the button.
The  status  changes  from  [MAINTE]  to
[WAITING].
3
Turn on heater.         
(1) Touch the button.
The operation screen is displayed.
(2) Touch the of the [HEATER].
The heater turns ON and the status changes 
from [WAITING] to [HEATING].
You  can go  back  to  the  previous  screen by  pressing
  button.
4
Start printing.
• When  the  furnace  temperature  stabilizes  at  the
set  temperature,  the  status  changes  from
[HEATING] to [READY].
(1) Adjust  the  opening  at  the  aperture
plate.( P.2-27)
(2) Send print data from computer to printer.
Printing will start.
5
Turn OFF heater.
(1) When printing is completed, touch the 
button.
The operation screen is displayed.
(2) Touch the of the [HEATER].
The heater turns off and the status changes 
from [READY] to [COOLING].
You  can go  back  to the  previous  screen  by  pressing
  button.
• When  the  furnace  temperature  falls  below  60
degree  C,  the  status  changes  to  [COOLING]  →
[WAITING].
6
Exit LOCAL mode.
(1) Touch the button.
The  status  changes  from  [WAITING]  to
[MAINTE].
25.0
MAINTE
180.0
WAITING
HEATING
• If you leave the heater on without starting printing, 
the heater will turn off automatically.
• For the time to turn off the heater, refer to 
P.2-24「Set off timer」
READY

COOLING

59.0
WAITING
180.0





2-27
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Checking the Logs
1
Tap [F1] (Screen transition 1).
• Displays the various settings screens.
2
Tap [LOG].
• The Check Logs screen is displayed.
• Use the up and down keys to switch between logs.
The up key moves you backwards through the logs.
The down key moves you forwards through the logs.
About a cancellation of ERROR of the 
color fixation device
When  the  status  of  the  color  fixation  device  becomes
[ERROR], its error status can be cancelled  by  canceling
the error status.
Cancellation of ERROR
1
Tap [F1] key.
2
Tap [CHECK] key.
3
Tap [RES] key.
• If it cannot be cancelled even by pushing [RES],
turn off the main power once.
• In  case  of  THERMALSTAT  error,  it  cannot  be
cancelled until the inside temperature decreases.
Warming Up
• It  takes  about  40  minutes  from  when  turning  on  the
heater until coloring becomes possible.
• You can warm the coloring machine by turning on the
heater in local mode in advance.
• You can change to control from the printer by changing
from local to remote in the middle.
Media Setting
Set media according to the procedure of Chapter 2
 P.2-4「Setting a Media」
Adjusting the opening at the aperture
plate
This adjustment allows you to set the opening to the ideal
size in order to maintain a constant temperature inside the
furnace  of  the  color  fixation  device,  and  ensure  high
quality colors.
Be  sure  to  adjust  the opening  after  setting  the  media  or
changing the temperature settings.
Adjust  the  opening  when  the  following  conditions  are
fulfilled.
• The  temperature  inside  the  furnace  has  stabilized  at
the  set  temperature,  and  the  status  on  the  operation
panel has changed from [H] to [R].
• The media has been set.
㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊 㪫㫀㫄㪼

㪪㫋㪸㫋㫌㫊 㪫㫀㫄㪼
ERROR
Opening at the aperture plate





2-28
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
1
Use the guiding fabric jig to close the 
opening at the aperture plate (8 locations).
• Use  the  following  jig:    Guiding  fabric  jig
(accessory box 1)
(1) Insert  the  guiding  fabric  jig  into  the  square
hole of the aperture plate.
(2) Move the aperture plate to the back to close 
the opening. (8 locations)
2
Adjust the size of the opening at the 
aperture plate.
(1) Insert the guiding fabric jig vertically between
the  aperture  plate  in  the  center  of the  color
fixation  device  and  media  in  order  to
increase the opening at the aperture plate.
• Insert  the  jig  until  the  auxiliary  moving  rollers
touch the surface.
(2) Move the guiding fabric jig to the right and 
left to adjust the opening size (all aperture 
plates).
• Use  the  thick  part  under  the  auxiliary  moving
rollers  of  the  guiding  fabric  jig  to  adjust  the
opening size.
• Do not slant the jig when you move it.
• If the jig hits the  screws or  some other parts, do
not push the  jig inside by  force, but rather pull it
out first, move it, and then try to reinsert it.
Processing when media is terminated
1
Retract the feeding side tension bar.
2
Retract the take-up side tension bar.
3
Open both right and left AMF covers on the 
feeding side.
Auxiliary moving rollers
Handle

(1)
(2)
(2)

Aperture 
plate
Side view
Guiding fabric jig
Aperture plate 
before moving
Slide
Media
Aperture plate 
after moving
Front Back

(1)
(2)
(2)

Aperture 
plate
Auxiliary 
moving rollers
Media
Guiding fabric jig: Keep the jig in a 
vertical position when moving it.
Side view
Front Back





2-29
2
2
2
2
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
4
Remove the used media from the paper 
tube on the feeding side.
5
Remove the roll shaft on the feeding side 
and remove the paper pipe.
6
Set a new roll media on the roll shaft.
7
Set the roll shaft on the feeding side AMF.
8
Use safety pin to hold new media on used 
media.
• In  the  case  of  full-width  media,  keep  it  even  at
about 5 places.
9
Raise the clamp.
10
Switch the take-up side AMF to "manual" 
and wind up the new media connected to 
the used media.
11
When new media is wound up to the 
winding roll shaft, change the switch on 
the take-up side AMF to "AUTO" and stop 
winding.
12
Close both right and left AMF covers on 
the feeding side.
13
Remove the safety pin holding the media.
14
Keep the media tension evenly and lower 
the clamp.
15
Remove the used roll media from the take-
up roll shaft and set the paper tube 
removed from the feed roll shaft.
16
For the subsequent media setting 
procedure, refer to the manual 2 and the 
following "Set role media" manual 18. 
(Tension bar position adjustment)
• P.2-12「Adjust the position of the tension-bar
with  the  switches  on  the  left  of  the  feeding
device.」
Resetting the proper temperature
Estimation of temperature setting
The color fixing temperature is based on 180 °C and should be adjusted according to the nature of the media to be used.
Other Settings
Reset timer for filter cleaning, filter 
change
Filter  cleaning  alerts  are  displayed  every  300  H,  filter
exchange alerts are displayed every 2000 H.
Clean  the  filter  or  replace  the  filter,  then  reset  the  timer
with the following procedure.
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
• Do not close the cover of the feeding side AMF yet 
at this point.
• Be careful not to wrinkle the joined media.
If wrinkles are contained in the media, there is a 
possibility that safety pins and media get caught in 
the color fixation device frontage and inside.
• During winding, check that the media does not get 
caught on the upper part of the grid roller or the 
upper part of the color fixation device.
Set higher temp Set lower temp  Remarks
Color development Uncolored (dull color)
Stain Many stains
Media shrinkage Shrinking is large
Depending on the media characteristics, media may shrink 
by 2% when coloring.
Resolution (pass) Low pass mode High pass mode
When the high pass is set, the time in the furnace 
becomes long, so set the set temperature low.
Media thickness Thick media Thin media
Please set the temperature high for thick (high density) 
media.




2-30
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
Touch the [Timer Setting]
 
button.
• The filter time clear screen is displayed.
3
Reset the timer.
• [Filter Cleaning Timer]
                 Touch the button to reset the timer.
• [Filter Replace Timer]
                 Touch the button to switch the screen.
                 Touch the button to reset the timer.
Change the temperature notation
Select the display of current temperature and set
temperature of heater from Celsius, Fahrenheit.
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
2
Touch the [Temperature Indication]
 
button.
• The temperature display setting screen is displayed.
3
Select temperature notation.
• Please  select  the  notation  unit  of  current
temperature  of  the  heater  and  coloring
temperature.
• [Celsius]
Displays the temperature of the heater in degrees
Celsius.
• [Fehrenheit]
Displays the temperature of the heater in degrees
Fahrenheit.
Configure external input / output
Set ON / OFF of external input / output. Please set it when
using  external  stop  switch  function,  no  voltage  contact
output.
•Function
External output: No-voltage contact output is performed
in conjunction with heater ON.
External input: Stop  the  heater  from  the  outside.
(External stop switch function)
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
2
Touch the [External Setting]
 
button.
• The external input / output setting screen is displayed.
3
Select ON / OFF of external input / output.
• [External Input]
When ON, the heater turns OFF when a signal is
input.
• [Extermal Output]
When  ON,  no  voltage output  is  performed  when
the heater is ON.




2-31
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Specification  of  terminal  block  for  external  input
connection
• Connection example
The external input sensor is NPN connected
: Short the terminal numbers 1 and 2, and connect the
sensor output 3 and GND to 4.
The external input sensor is PNP connected
: Short the terminal numbers 3 and 4, and connect 1 to
the sensor power supply and 2 to the output.
Set backlight of the touch panel
It sets whether to turn off the backlight of the touch panel
when heater is off.
1
Touch the  button on the top screen.
• The setting menu will be displayed.
2
Touch the button.
• The backlight setting screen will be displayed.
3
Touch the [Backlight Setting] button.
• The backlight setting screen will be displayed.
4
Set the backlight.
• [Backlight off function]
[Enable] : Turn  off  the  backlight  when  the
heater is off.
[Disable] : Always on.
•[OFF Timer]
[Enable] : Set  the  time  (minutes)  until  the
backlight is turned off.
Setting  the  Color  Fixation  Device
from the Printer
You can turn the color fixation device on/off, as well as set
the  temperature  and  the  timer  from  the  printer's  Setup
menu.
Setting the color fixation device
1
Press the   (MENU)   key 
in Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select [Color fixation 
device], and press the   key.
• Set the [Color fixation device] to [ON] to display a
variety of settings.
• Color fix.temp.
Set the temperature when fixing the color.
Setting range: 150.0 to 200.0 ℃
Setting unit: Increments of 0.1 ℃
• Stand-by temp.
Set the temperature when standing by.
Setting range: OFF,  100.0 to 150.0 ℃
Setting unit: Increments of 0.1 ℃
•Timer OFF
Set  the  time  before  the  heater  turns  off
automatically.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 60 min
•Timer ON
Set  the  time  before  the  heater  turns  on
automatically.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 12H
Terminal 
number
Signal 
name
Spec
1
+24V 24V output Max 500mA
2
IN+ External input plus side
3
IN- External output minus side
4
GND GND
5
OUT+
Non-voltage contact output
24 V 3A or less
6
OUT-
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos.Correct
>
ON
Host
Color Fix. Device
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1
1/4

Color fix.temp.
180.0℃
Stand-by temp.
100.0℃
30min
12H
Timer OFF
Timer ON
>><<
Color fixation device





2-32
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Displaying the status of the color 
fixation device
The  color  and  the  letter  of  the  icon  on  the  local  TOP
screen  change  depending  on  the  status  of  the  color
fixation device.
Example 1) Stable
Example 2) OFF
Status Table
Printing Workflow
Print flow when timer function is OFF
Print flow when timer function is ON
NO.
State Icon Descriptions
1
Stable CONSTANT
The machine has 
arrived at the Color 
fix.temp. and is 
stable.
2
OFF OFF
Just after starting 
up, or door OPEN.
3
Waiting WAITING Heater OFF
4
Cooling 
down
COOLING
Lowering the 
temperature in the 
heater.
5
Standing by STAND-BY
Maintaining the 
stand-by 
temperature.
6
Heating up HEATING
Raising the 
temperature in the 
heater.
7
Error Event ERROR
Error has been 
generated.
• You can set the temperature when fixing the color 
in FUNC2 (HEATER).
Setting range: 150 to 200
℃
Setting unit: Increments of 1 ℃
Local <Setup 1>
12:00
Media Select
Roll
<   >
Leaf
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1>
12:00
Media Select
Roll
<   >Leaf
----/----
OFF
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local→Remote
Heater ON
Heater ON
Screen display: “HEATING”
Waiting to reach coloring heater
temperature
“Please wait. Under temperature
   control.”
Attained Color fix.temp.
Screen display: “READY”
Start printing
Stop printing
Heater OFF
Heater OFF
Screen display: “COOLING”
Printer
Color fixation device
Send print data
Local→Remote
Heater ON
Heater ON
Screen display: “HEATING”
Waiting to reach coloring heater
temperature
“Please wait. Under temperature
   control.”
Attained Color fix.temp.
Screen display: “READY”
Start printing
Stop printing
Heater OFF
Screen display: “COOLING”
Printer
Color fixation device
Send print data
Timer set time elapses
Heater OFF




2-33
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Error while printing
Printing stopped
Test Printing
Print a test pattern to check that there are no discharging
defects such  as  nozzle missing (slight touching of ink or
nozzle missing).
Relationship between head row and 
test pattern
The  relations  between  head  row  and  test  pattern  print
position are as follow.
Note on test printing
Test Printing
Print a test pattern to check that there are no discharging
defects such  as  nozzle missing (slight touching of ink or
nozzle missing).
In  addition,  you  can  select  the  orientation  of  the  test
pattern  to  print  from  two  types  in  order  to  perform  test
printing repeatedly. Select one depending on your use.
Local→Remote
Heater ON
Heater ON
Screen display: “HEATING”
Waiting to reach coloring heater
temperature
“Please wait. Under temperature
   control.”
Attained Color fix.temp.
Screen display: “READY”
Start printing
Heater OFF
Screen display: “COOLING”
Printer
Color fixation device
Send print data
Printing stops
Heater OFF
Error occurs
Error display
(Error occurs)
Error display
* The operations are the
  same when a  printer
  error or a color fixation
  device error occurs.
When a color fixation 
device error occurs, 
the heater is turned 
off immediately.

Local→Remote
Heater ON
Heater ON
Screen display: “HEATING”
Waiting to reach coloring heater
temperature
“Please wait. Under temperature
   control.”
Attained Color fix.temp.
Screen display: “READY”
Start printing
Data clear
Heater OFF
Screen display: “COOLING”
Printer
Color fixation device
Send print data
Heater OFF
Hold down remote key

• When using leaf media, set a media of more than 
210mm put horizontally. If a media with narrow 
width is set, printing will only be conducted to 
midway.
• When performing a test print, be sure to close all 
the covers (front cover).
Pattern for 
Head 1
Media-feeding direction
Head 1 Head 4Head 3Head 2
Pattern for 
Head 2
Pattern for 
Head 3
Pattern for 
Head 4
Overhead view





2-34
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
1
Press the 
 (TEST PRINT/CLEANING)
, 
and press the   key in LOCAL.
• TEST PRINT menu appears.
•Press  [][]  to  change  the  test  pattern
orientation.  The  orientation selected here  will  be
reflected on when you will print next time.
• When  performing  test  printing  after  having
changed  the  orientation  from  “SCAN  DIR”  to
“FEED DIR”, the line is fed to the position of the
first test printing.
2
Press   key.
• Test printing starts.
• When  the  printing  has  been  completed,  the
screen returns to LOCAL.
3
Check the printed test pattern.
• When the result is normal, end the operation.
• When  the  result  is  abnormal,  perform  head
cleaning. ( P.2-34)
Head Cleaning
About head cleaning
Check the printed test pattern result and perform cleaning
depending on the status.
Select one from the three types below:
Soft : When lines are bent, when any line is missing
Normal :  When  any  line  is  missing,  when  colors  are
mixed
Hard : When poor image quality cannot be improved
even by Normal or Soft cleaning
Perform head cleaning depending on
the test printing result
There  are  three  types  of  head  cleaning.  Use  one  by
checking the test pattern.
1
Press 
(TEST PRINT/CLEANING)
 in 
LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Cleaning”, and 
press the   key.
• CLEANING menu appears.
3
Press   to select the cleaning type.
• Soft : When lines are bent, when any line is
missing
• Normal : When any line is missing, when colors
are mixed
• Hard :  When  poor  image  quality  cannot  be
improved  even  by  Normal  or  Soft
cleaning
4
Press   key.
5
Select the cleaning head by pressing  
 ,and put a check in the check 
box by pressing 
 ()
• After selecting the head,  press the [FUNC2]  and
put a check in the check box.
The  head  whose  box  has  been  checked  will  be
cleaned.
6
Press   key.
7
Perform test printing again, and check the 
result.
• Repeat the cleaning and the test printing until the
drawing result becomes in normal.
Check before test printing.
• If a media has been set P.2-4
• If the origin position has been set
• If the head gap has been adjusted P.2-6
Media-feeding direction
: When the set value is "FEED DIR."
: When the set value is "SCAN DIR."

Abnormal pattern
Clogged with ink
Normal pattern
Nozzles are dirty

When the image quality is not improved after the 
head cleaning.
• Clean the wiper and ink cap. ( P.4-10)
• Wash the head nozzle. ( P.4-15)




2-35
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Setting of Media Cor-
rection
Correct  the  media  feed  amount  to  match  the  type  of
media you are using.
If  the  correction  value  is  not  appropriate,  stripes  may
appear  on  the  printed  image,  thus  resulting  in  a  poor
printing.
Setting of Media Correction
A  pattern  for  media  correction  is  printed  and  a  media-
feeding rate is corrected.
1
Setting a Media ( P.2-4)
2
Press the   key and press 
 
(ADJUST) in LOCAL.
• Adjust menu appears.
3
Press   key.
4
Press the   key to print the 
correction pattern.
5
Check the correction pattern and enter a 
correction value.
• A  screen  for  entering  the  correction  value
appears.
• Enter a correction value in "+":
The boundary between the two bands is widened.
• Enter a correction value in "-":
The  boundary  between  the  two  bands  is
narrowed.
• When  you  change  the  correction  value  by  "30",
the width of  the  boundary changes by  about  0.1
mm.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Correcting Media-feeding during 
Printing
A media-feeding rate can be corrected even in the remote
mode or when image data is printed.
1
Press the   
(ADJUST)
 in the Remote.
2
Press   to enter a corrected 
feeding rate.
• Corrected feeding rate: -9999 to 9999
• The  value  entered  here  is  reflected  in  the
corrected feeding rate soon.
3
Press   key.
• The changed value is registered.
• When you press the [ENTER] key instead of the
[END/POWER] key, the value entered here will be
invalid.
4
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• Be sure to perform feed correction each time 
before printing. The media feed amount may vary, 
depending on the remaining amount of the roll 
media.
• If use by setting the media to Narrow roll holder, 
rewind the roll media by hand and set without 
slack.
There may not be accurate to correct the feed 
amount.
• On completion of [MEDIA COMP.] during use of a 
roll media, the media returns to the printing origin. 
When a media is set on the narrow roll holder, 
slack occurs in the roll media on the backside of 
this machine.
Before printing, take up the slack in the roll media 
by hand; a loose roll media can result in an inferior 
image quality.
• When printing with a take-up device, set the media 
first and then perform media correction.
• When printing without using the take-up device, 
feed the media until the media reaches the floor 
before performing the correction. Otherwise, the 
feed amount may not be adjusted normally.
• Two bands are printed in the correction pattern.
• Make adjustment so that an even color density is 
obtained in the boundary between the two bands.
Second band
First band
Media-feeding direction

• You can select “Feed Comp.” by using the 
[FUNC1](MENU) in the Local without pressing the 
[FUNC2] (ADJUST) key. ( P.3-6)
Remote
Feed Comp.
0
Current Value
10
Changed Value

Current 
correction 
value





2-36
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Correct the ink drop posi-
tion for bidirectional printing
When the condition for printing (Distance of the platen and
the  head  /media  thickness/media  type/etc.)  has  been
changed,  perform  the  following  operation  to  correct  the
ink drop position  for  bidirectional  (Bi)  printing  and  obtain
the proper printing result.
Example of a Printed Pattern
1
Set a media on the machine and set a 
printing origin. ( P.2-4)
2
Press the   key and press 
 
(ADJUST) in LOCAL.
• Adjust menu appears.
3
Press   to select 
“DropPos.Correct” , and press the   
key.
4
Press   key.
• Printing  of  the  Drop  position  correct  printed
pattern will start.
• Multiple  test  patterns  are  printed.  (The  printed
patterns  are  called  Pattern  1,  Pattern  2  in  the
order of printing.)
5
Press   to enter the correction 
value for pattern 1, and press the   
key.
• Corrected feeding rate: -40 to 40
• Check  the  test  patterns.  The  position  where  an
outward  feeding  line  and  a  return  feeding  line
become one straight line is the correction value.
• When the correction value in not between -40 and
40,  adjust  the  height  of  the  printing  heads  and
then perform the operations in Step 2 and later.
6
In the same way as step 5, enter the 
correction value for patterns 2 to 5, and 
press the   key.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• When using leaf media, set a media of more than 
210mm put horizontally. If a media with narrow 
width is set, printing will only be conducted to 
midway.
The dots at the fourth position 
counted from the zero position in 
the positive direction form a 
straight line.
In this case, the dot position 
correction value is 4.0.
Output 

• You can select “DROP.POScorrect” by using the 
[FUNC1](MENU) in the Local without pressing the 
[FUNC2] (ADJUST) key. ( P.3-7)




2-37
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
2
2
2
2
Printing Data
Starting a Printing Operation
1
Setting a Media ( P.2-4)
2
Checking the Heater Temperature
3
Press the  (REMOTE) key in LOCAL.
• If  the  heater  temperature  has  not  reached  the
setting  value,  the  warning  message
“TEMPERATURE CONTROL” is displayed. Even
if  it  has  not  reached,  you  can  move  to  Remote
when pressing the [ENTER] key.
• The screen changes to Remote, and data can be
received from the PC.
4
Transmit data to be printed from the PC.
• For  the  method  of  data  transmission,  see  the
instruction manual for the output software.
*
1
This  is  indicated  when  turning  on  the  automatic
cleaning and the RIP separation.
If executing the manual cleaning when this is in a state
displaying,  there  is  a  blank  in  the  timing  of  the  RIP
end.
5
Start printing.
• The  printing  speed  may  change,  depending  on
the  width of  the  set  media  or  the  position  of  the
print origin even  when  the  same  data is  printed.
This is because of a difference in resolution.
Stopping a Printing Operation
Perform the following operation when stopping a printing
operation halfway.
1
Press the   
(LOCAL)
 during printing.
• The printing operation stops.
• Interrupt data  sending  at the PC side during the
data is sent from the PC.
• Printing  restarts  from  the  interrupted  data  by
repressing the [REMOTE] key.
Deleting Received Data (Data Clear)
When  you  want  to  stop  printing,  delete  the  already
received data.
1
Press the   key, and press 
 
(DATA CLEAR) in LOCAL.
2
Press   key.
• The received data is erased then it returns to the
Local.
• When the same data is printed, the color may 
differ if print conditions are changed, including the 
resolution, pass, scanning speed, and printing 
direction. Check the effects before printing.
REMOTE
540x360         VD
0.0m
4/ B / x1 / W1 / ALL / R

Resolution
Number of passes
The length of 
media printed
Scan direction
U :Unidirectional / B : Bidirectional
Scan speed
x1 : Standard speed/ x2 : Double speed
Data type
VD : Variable data 
/ 
ND : Normal data
Nozzle recovery information
R: Nozzle recovery is performed.
Select head
Waveform selection
W1 : WF1/ W2 : WF2
C0.1m
The length before 
starting the automatic 
cleaning
*1





2-38
Chapter 2 Basic Operation
Behavior  after  printing  has  been
completed
Fixing Feed
When printing has been completed, the feeding operation
is performed to fix the color to the printed surface with the
color fixation device.
• Perform the feeding operation until the back edge of print-
ing passes the drying heater.
• When you press the [END/POWER] key, the operation is 
terminated.
• When the machine has been received next data continu-
ously, it will operate after the last data is received.
Screen display during fixing feeding
Fixing
Please Wait





This chapter
describes the operation procedures for using the machine more conveniently and each
setting procedure.
About Setup menu .........................................3-2
Setup menu table ......................................... 3-3
Register the optimal print conditions to 
match the use............................................... 3-5
Setting of Media Correction.......................... 3-6
If the Positions of Dots Shift... ...................... 3-7
Setting the color fixation device ................... 3-8
Setting of Logical Seek ................................ 3-8
Setting of Overprint ...................................... 3-9
Setting of Drying Time.................................. 3-9
Setting of Left and Right Margins................. 3-9
Setting of Refresh ........................................ 3-9
Setting of Refresh Left ............................... 3-10
Setting of Drying Fan ................................. 3-10
Setting of Feed Speed ............................... 3-10
Setting of MAPS4....................................... 3-11
Setting of Auto Nozzle Maint...................... 3-12
Setting Interval wiping ................................ 3-15
Setting Head Gap....................................... 3-15
About Machine Setup menu.........................3-16
Machine Setup menu table ........................ 3-17
Setting a AUTO Power-off.......................... 3-18
Setting Feeding unit ................................... 3-18
Setting Take-up unit ................................... 3-19
Setting the Display of Media Remain..........3-19
Setting Time................................................3-19
Setting Unit (Temperature/ Length) ............3-19
Setting a Key Buzzer ..................................3-20
Selecting the head line to use.....................3-20
Setting the Media Detect/Width ..................3-20
Setting a Drying Feed.................................3-20
Setting the Confirm.....................................3-21
Setting the amount of blank space 
between printed lines..................................3-21
Setting the feed mode of the space of 
no data to be printed...................................3-21
Set the network...........................................3-22
Setting event mail function..........................3-22
Setting the Setting Lock function ................3-26
Setting a LANGUAGE.................................3-26
Initializing the Settings................................3-26
About Information menu...............................3-27
Information menu table...............................3-27
Displaying the Information ..........................3-28
Displaying the Information of this machine. 3-28
Chapter 3
Setup




Chapter 3 Setup
3-2
About Setup menu
On Setup menu, you can set the print conditions to match the media you usually use.
MENU
Setup
>
>
Maintenance
Media Reset
>
>
Machine Setup
Information
>
>><<
Setup
●
Setup 1
○
Setup 2
○
Setup 3
○
Setup 4
○
Temporary
>><<
Select “SETUP 1 to 4” or “Temporary”,
and then press the                key.
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
POST 1L
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
HOST
Heater
HOST
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4
Drying Time
>
Margin/L
0mm
Margin/R
0mm
Host
OFF
Refresh
Refresh Left
>><<
Setup 1 2/4
Drying Fan
Standard
Feed Speed
>
MAPS4
>
Auto Nozzle Maint.
>
OFF
Interval Wiping
>><<
Setup 1 3/4
Head Gap
2.0mm
Setup Reset
>
>><<
Setup 1 4/4
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
Host
Heater
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4
Drying Time
>
Margin/L
0mm
Margin/R
0mm
Host
OFF
Refresh
Refresh Left
>><<
Setup 1 2/4
Drying Fan
Standard
Feed Speed
>
MAPS4
>
Auto Nozzle Maint.
>
OFF
Interval Wiping
>><<
Setup 1 3/4
Head Gap
2.0mm
Setup Reset
>
>><<
Setup 1 4/4
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
Host
Heater
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4
Drying Time
>
Margin/L
0mm
Margin/R
0mm
Host
OFF
Refresh
Refresh Left
>><<
Setup 1 2/4
Drying Fan
Standard
Feed Speed
>
MAPS4
>
Auto Nozzle Maint.
>
OFF
Interval Wiping
>><<
Setup 1 3/4
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
Host
Heater
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4
Drying Time
>
Margin/L
0mm
Margin/R
0mm
Host
OFF
Refresh
Refresh Left
>><<
Setup 1 2/4
Drying Fan
Standard
Feed Speed
>
MAPS4
>
Auto Nozzle Maint.
>
OFF
Interval Wiping
>><<
Setup 1 3/4
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
Host
Heater
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4
Drying Time
>
Margin/L
0mm
Margin/R
0mm
Host
OFF
Refresh
Refresh Left
>><<
Setup 1 2/4
Drying Fan
Standard
Feed Speed
>
MAPS4
>
Auto Nozzle Maint.
>
OFF
Interval Wiping
>><<
Setup 1 3/4
Feed Comp.
>
DropPos. Correct
>
>
Host
Heater
Host
Logical Seek
Overprint
>><<
Setup 1 1/4

 Setup menus at-a-glance
:  Press  this  to  select  SETTING  menu,  or  to  switch  to  the
previous screen.
: Press this to use the adjust function.
: Press this to switch to the next screen.
: Use these to select a setting item.
: Press this to confirm a setting, etc..





3-3
Chapter 3 Setup
3
2
2
  Screen transition when  (ADJUST)  key is pressed
When  adjustment  functions  (Feed  Comp./  Prop  Pos.  Correct)  are  performed,  the  Adjust  menu  can  be  displayed  easily
without  selecting  [MENU]-[Setup]  from  Local.  Press  the [SEL]  key  to  display “ADJUST”  for  [FUNC1], and  then press  the
[FUNC1] key.
Setup menu table
• For each setting item below, you can set it so that the machine may operate according to the value specified when you 
printed from your RIP software in the connected host PC.
• Set Item : DRYING Time/ Vacuum Fan
• When you operate the machine according to the contents specified with the RIP software, set each item to “Host” when 
registering this machine type. When you set it other than “Host”, the machine operates according to the machine setting.
• For the specifying method with the RIP software, refer to the operation manual of the RIP software.
Function name
Set value 
*1
When no 
instruction 
from RIP 
exists  
*2
Outline
Feed Comp.( P.3-6) -9999 to 0 to 9999                 
Used to print a pattern for correcting a media-
feeding rate and correct it.
Drop Pos. Correct ( P.3-7) -40.0 to 0
 to 40.0                 
Used to adjust the dot position in go and return 
printing.
Color fixation 
device
(P.3-8)
EXTERNAL HEATER ON/OFF                 
Sets ON/OFF of the external heater.
Logical Seek ( P.3-8) Host 
/ ON/OFF                  Sets the scan movable area during printing.
Overprint ( P.3-9)
Host / 1 to 9 1
Sets the number of layers in which ink is to be 
applied.
Drying Time 
(P.3-9)
Scan Host /0.0 ~ 9.9 sec 0 sec Sets the drying time of ink per scan.
Margin/L ( P.3-9)
Host
 /-10 to 0 to 85mm
                
Sets a non-printing area along the right and left 
edges of the media.
Margin/R ( P.3-9)                 
Refresh ( P.3-9) Host / Lv.0 to Lv.3 Lv.3
Sets the interval of refresh performed during 
printing.
Refresh Left ( P.3-10) ON/OFF OFF
Depending on the type of ink to be used, if the 
flushing operation on the capping station can not 
fully refresh the head, you can also set to allow the 
flushing operation on the left side.
Drying fan ( P.3-10)
Host
 / 10 to 200% (in 
increments of 10%)
Normal 
speed
Sets the power for the drying fan.
Feed Speed ( P.3-10) Host
 / 10 to 200 %                  Changes the media feeding speed in printing.
MAPS4
(P.3-11)
Auto/ Manual
                 Perform setting to reduce stripes between passes.
Manual
Speed 50 to 100 %
Smoothing 
Lv.
0 to 25
 to 100%
Feed Comp.
>
>
PropPos. Correct
Adjust
Feed Comp.
>
>
PropPos. Correct
Adjust
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1>
12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT




Chapter 3 Setup
3-4
Auto Nozzle 
Maintenance 
(P.3-12)
Auto Cleaning ON
 / OFF
                
Sets the automatic cleaning operation for the head 
performed before or during printing.
Cleaning 
Interval
Length 0.1 to 20.0 to 100.0 m Performs cleaning at intervals of the set length.
File 1 to 10
 to 1000
Performs cleaning whenever the set number of 
files has been processed.
Time 10
 to 120 min Performs cleaning at intervals of the set time.
Type Soft
, Normal, Hard Sets the type of cleaning to be performed.
Cln.BeforePrint 10 to 720 min/ OFF
Performs cleaning before printing start if the 
specified time has passed since the previous 
printing completion time.
Separation OFF
 / RIP Separation
According to the instruction from the RIP, the cleaning is 
performed at the separation of the image.
Nozzle Check ON
 / OFF
                
Set it to ON to perform nozzle check automatically.
Check 
Interval
Length 0.1 to 30.0
 to 100.0 m
Performs nozzle check at intervals of the set 
length.
File 1 to 30
 to 1000
Performs nozzle check whenever the set number 
of files has been processed.
Time 10 to 30
 to 120 min Performs nozzle check at intervals of the set time.
Cleaning Type Soft
, Normal, Hard, Auto
Sets the type of cleaning to be performed when 
any nozzle missing error is detected.
If “Auto” is selected, the machine performs an 
optimum cleaning according to the nozzle 
recovery state.
RETRY COUNT 0
 to 3
Performs recovery operations for missing nozzles 
by the set number of times.
Auto Nozzle 
Recovery
ON
 / OFF
Set it to ON to perform nozzle recovery 
automatically.
Judgement 
Condition
1 to 10
 to 100 / OFF
Sets the number of detected missing nozzles in 
each head line and color that leads to 
determination of a “nozzle missing” error.
When set to OFF, the machine performs no nozzle 
check.
Separation OFF
 / RIP Separation
According to the instruction from the RIP, the nozzle check is 
performed at the separation of the image.
Feeding Set ON
 / OFF                  Set whether or not feed during the maintenance.
Interval Wiping ( P.3-15) 3 to 255 min, OFF                 
Sets the wiping operation performed after printing 
is completed.
Head Gap ( P.3-15) 1.5 to 2
 to 7.0mm                  Sets the head gap.
Setup Reset ( P.3-26) The configuration in the settings 1-4 can be reset individually.
*1. The underlined has been set as default.
*2. This is the setting value to be used for printing when setting value is not specified at the RIP software (Host) side, or, you give priority to the setting value at
the machine side.
Function name
Set value 
*1
When no 
instruction 
from RIP 
exists  
*2
Outline




Chapter 3 Setup
3-5
3
2
2
Register the optimal print conditions
to match the use
In  this  machine,  you  will  be  able  to  register  print
conditions, SETUP 1 to 4 individually to match the media
in advance.
For example, after print on different types of media, return
to  the  media  always  use.  In  such  case  you  can  set  the
optimum  printing  conditions  by  simply  selecting  the
registered SETUP 1 to 4.
Register the print conditions to SETUP 
1 to 4
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• The item selected indicates ● and others show ○.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select and set each item 
in the setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
How to use [Temporary]
[Temporary]  is  not  only  to  set  the  print  condition  to  be
used only once, but also can be used for partial change of
the  registered  SETUP "1  to  4",  or for  reflecting  the  print
conditions set by the [Temporary] to SETUP 1 to 4.
 Register the print conditions in [Temporary]
Registration of the print conditions to [Temporary] can be
done as the same method as to SETUP 1 to 4.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select “Temporary”, and 
press the   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select and set each item 
in the setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
 Copy the contents of SETUP 1 to 4 to 
[Temporary]
You  can  use  it  with  changing  the  part  of  registration
contents of Setup 1 to 4.
Select “copy” from the Setup Reset menu of Temporary,
and specify the copy source (Setup 1 to 4).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select “Temporary”, and 
press the   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the   (<<).
4
Press   to select “Setup Reset”, 
and press the   key.
• Selection  screen  of  the  copy  source  will  be
displayed.
5
Press   to select “Copy”  and 
press the   key.
• Selection  screen  of  the  copy  source  will  be
displayed.
6
Press   to select copy source 
(Setup 1 to 4), and press   key.
• Confirmation screen of the copy will be displayed.
7
Press   key.
• Settings selected in step 6 is copied to Temporary.
8
Press   to change the setting item, 
and press the   key.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
 Reflect The Content Set In [Temporary] To 
Setup 1 To 4
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select “Temporary”, and 
press the   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select and set each item 
in the setup menu list.
• Please see the reference page in the setup menu
list for detailed configuration procedure.
4
Display the last page of Temporary and 
select “SAVE SETTING”, and press the 
 key.
• Selection  screen  of  the  save  location  will  be
displayed.
• Print conditions that can be pre-registered with the 
machine are the four types, “SETUP 1” to “SETUP 
4”.
• If you print with the print condition which do not 
often use, you will be able to set the print 
conditions by selecting “Temporary”.
If turn on the power again, settings in “Temporary” 
will return to the original state when it was 
purchased.
Also if turn on the power again in “Temporary” 
state, it will be the state in selecting “SETUP 1”.




3-6
Chapter 3 Setup
5
Press   to select the save location 
(Setup 1 to 4), and press   key.
• Save confirmation screen will be displayed.
6
Press   key.
• Settings of Temporary will be saved to the location
selected in step 5.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Reset the registered contents
Reset the contents registered to SETUP 1 to 4.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4 to 
be reset and press the   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the   (<<).
4
Press   to select “Setup Reset”, 
and press the   key.
• Confirmation  screen  of  reset  settings  will  be
displayed.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Media Correction
Correct  the  media  feed  amount  to  match  the  type  of
media you are using.
If  the  correction  value  is  not  appropriate,  stripes  may
appear  on  the  printed  image,  thus  resulting  in  a  poor
printing.
A  pattern  for  media  correction  is  printed  and  a  media-
feeding rate is corrected.
1
Setting a Media ( P.2-4)
2
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
3
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
4
Press   to select “Feed Comp.” , 
and press the   key.
5
Press the   key to print the 
correction pattern.
• Be sure to perform feed correction each time 
before printing. The media feed amount may vary, 
depending on the remaining amount of the roll 
media.
• If use by setting the media to Narrow roll holder, 
rewind the roll media by hand and set without 
slack.
There may not be accurate to correct the feed 
amount.
• On completion of [MEDIA COMP.] during use of a 
roll media, the media returns to the printing origin. 
When a media is set on the narrow roll holder, 
slack occurs in the roll media on the backside of 
this machine.
Before printing, take up the slack in the roll media 
by hand; a loose roll media can result in an inferior 
image quality.
• When printing with a take-up device, set the media 
first and then perform media correction.
• When printing without using the take-up device, 
feed the media until the media reaches the floor 
before performing the correction. Otherwise, the 
feed amount may not be adjusted normally.
• Two bands are printed in the correction pattern.
• Make adjustment so that an even color density is 
obtained in the boundary between the two bands.
Second band
First band
Media-feeding direction





Chapter 3 Setup
3-7
3
2
2
6
Check the correction pattern and enter a 
correction value.
• A  screen  for  entering  the  correction  value
appears.
• Enter a correction value in “+”:
The boundary between the two bands is widened.
• Enter a correction value in “-”:
The  boundary  between  the  two  bands  is
narrowed.
• When  you  change  the  correction  value  by  “25”,
the width  of the boundary  changes by about  0.1
mm.
7
Press   key.
• Print a correction pattern again and check it.
• When  media  correction  is  needed,  perform  the
operation in Step 6 to make correction.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Correcting Media-feeding during 
Printing
A media-feeding rate can be corrected even in the remote
mode or when image data is printed.
1
Press the 
 (ADJUST)
 in the Remote.
2
Press   to enter a corrected 
feeding rate.
• Corrected feeding rate: -9999 to 9999
• The value entered here is reflected in the corrected
feeding rate soon.
3
Press   key.
• The changed value is registered.
If the Positions of Dots Shift...
When the condition for printing (Distance of the platen and
the  head  /media  thickness/media  type/etc.)  has  been
changed,  perform  the  following  operation  to  correct  the
ink drop position  for  bidirectional (Bi) printing  and  obtain
the proper printing result.
Example of a Printed Pattern
1
Setting a Media ( P.2-4)
• In order to print a pattern, a media that is 500 mm
wide at least is necessary.
2
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
3
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
4
Press   to select 
“DropPos.Correct” , and press the   
key.
5
Press   key.
• Printing  of  the  Drop  position  correct  printed
pattern will start.
• Multiple  test  patterns  are  printed.  (The  printed
patterns  are  called  Pattern  1,  Pattern  2  in  the
order of printing.)
6
Press   to enter the correction 
value for pattern 1, and press the   
key.
• Corrected feeding rate: -40 to 40
• Check  the  test  patterns.  The  position  where  an
outward  feeding  line  and  a  return  feeding  line
become one straight line is the correction value.
• When the correction value in not between -40 and
40,  adjust  the  height  of  the  printing  heads  and
then perform the operations in Step 2 and later.
7
In the same way as step 6, enter the 
correction value for patterns 2 to 5, and 
press the   key.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
The dots at the fourth position 
counted from the zero position in 
the positive direction form a 
straight line.
In this case, the dot position 
correction value is 4.0.
Output 
direction





3-8
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting the color fixation device
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select “Color fixation 
device” and press the   key.
4
Press   to select the Color fixation 
device and press the   key.
• Heater: Print-heater, Post-heater (1L/1R/2L/2R)
5
Press   to set ON/OFF, and press 
the   key.
Select [ON] to display each setting.
• Color fix.temp.
Set the temperature when fixing the color.
Setting range: 150.0 to 200.0 °C
Setting unit: Increments of 0.1 °C
• Stand-by temp.
Set the temperature when standing by.
Setting range: OFF,  100.0 to 150.0 °C
Setting unit: Increments of 0.1 °C
• Timer OFF
Set  the  time  before  the  heater  turns  off
automatically.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 60min
• Timer ON
Set  the  time  before  the  heater  turns  on
automatically.
Setting range: OFF, 1 to 12H
6
Press   to select setting item, and 
press the   key.
7
Press   to select a set value, and 
press the   key.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Logical Seek
The  head’s  operation  varies  depending  on  the  Logical
Seek settings, as shown in the figure below.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select “Logical Seek”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set value : Host / ON / OFF
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• When Color fixation device is set to ON, Logical 
Seek becomes invalid to prevent color 
irregularities.
UNI-DIRECTIONAL BI-DIRECTIONAL
UNI-DIRECTIONAL BI-DIRECTIONAL
Media
Red arrow :  Movement of head
Print area
Red arrow : Movement of head
Print area
Media
Media Media
Movement of heads when LOGICAL seek is OFF
Movement of heads when LOGICAL seek is ON





Chapter 3 Setup
3-9
3
2
2
Setting of Overprint
Sets the number of layers in which ink is to be applied.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press   to select “Overprint”, and 
press the   key.
4
Press   to set the number of 
Overprint, and press the   key.
• Setting value :  Host/ 0 to 9 times
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Drying Time
In the drying time setting, the each scanning is set.
(during  bidirectional  printing,  the  machine  stops  for  a
certain  period  of  time  specified  for  each  of  the  outward
and return scanning.)
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the
  
(
>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Drying Time”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   key.
6
Press   to set drying time, and 
press the   key.
• Set  the  drying  time  for  scanning  the  media.  To
enable  the  drying  time  specified  in  your  RIP,
select “Host”.
• Setting value : Host or 0.0 sec. to 9.9 sec.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Left and Right Margins
Set  a  non-printing  area along  the  left  and  right  edges  of
the media.
The offset value against the standard margin 15mm is set
hereupon.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the 
 
(
>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Margin/L” or 
“Margin/R” , and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set value : Host/ -10 to 85 mm
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Refresh
Sets the interval of refresh performed during printing.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the
 
(
>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Refresh” and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set value : Host/Lv.0 to Lv.3.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• When you give priority to the setting at the 
RasterLink side, make the setting value “Host”.
• “SCAN” set in this machine is displayed as “Pause 
Time per Scan” in the RasterLink.
• You cannot specify the print end at the RasterLink 
side. When you set this machine to “Host”, printing 
will be performed in “PRINT END= 0 sec.” status.
• Pay attention to the settings of the right and left 
margins when printing with the media press. If any 
of the margins is set to a negative value, printing 
may start from a position on the media press.




3-10
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting of Refresh Left
When  you  want  to  make  a  flushing  operation  at  the  left
side of the machine, set to “ON”.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Refresh Left”  
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set Value : ON/ OFF
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Drying Fan
Set the airflow for the fan for drying media.
You can set the airflow for the drying fan to dry the media
effectively.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the   
(>>) twice.
4
Press   to select “Drying Fan” and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Setting value: Host/10 to 200% (in increments of
10%)
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting of Feed Speed
Changes the media feeding speed in printing.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the   
(>>) twice.
4
Press   to select “Feed Speed”  
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set value : Host/ 10 to 200%
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• If you change the settings of the print speed, the 
color might change. After changing the feed 
speed, please check there is no change in the 
color in advance.
• After changing the settings, please perform the 
media correction ( P.3-6).




Chapter 3 Setup
3-11
3
2
2
Setting of MAPS4
If  performing  media  correction  does  not  resolve  feeding
stripes,  use  the  MAPS  (Mimaki  Advanced  PassSystem)
function  to  disperse  the  pass  boundary  to  make  the
feeding stripes less visible.
Setting MAPS4 Function
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the 
 (>>) twice.
4
Press   to select “MAPS4”, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select a set value, and 
press the   key.
• Set value: Auto/ Manual
• If you have selected “Manual”, proceed to step 5.
Otherwise, proceed to step 10.
6
Press   to select the “Speed”, and 
press the   key.
7
Press   to select the speed, and 
press the   key.
• Set value: 50 to 100%
8
Press   to select the “Smoothing 
Lv.”, and press the   key.
9
Press   to change the smoothing 
level, and press the   key.
• Set Value : 0 to 100% (set in units of 5%)
• The  MAPS4  effect  become  strong  as  the  set
value  increase,  and  become  weak  as  the  set
value decrease.
10
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• Changing the MAPS4 settings may change the 
color tone. Check the effects before use.
• MAPS may not be effective depending on image to 
be printed. Check the effects before use.
 Conditions which the effect of the MAPS 
function is not obtained
The MAPS function may be disabled under the follow-
ing conditions. In addition, the MAPS is not effective, 
depending on the image to be printed.

4-colors ink set
Resolution Pass Scan speed MAPS MODE
540 x 360 2 pass High speed
Manual
(Speed: 100%)
540 x 720 4 pass High speed
720 x 720 4 pass High speed
720 x 1080 6 pass High speed
6-colors ink set
Resolution Pass Scan speed MAPS MODE
540 x 360 4 pass High speed
Manual
(Speed: 100%)
540 x 540 6 pass High speed
720 x 1080 12 pass High speed





3-12
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting of Auto Nozzle Maint.
You can set the machine so that it automatically performs
nozzle  maintenance  operations  before  and  during
printing.
For  the  maintenance  operation,  you  can  set  the  head
cleaning and the nozzle check using NCU.
Feeding Set
• Set  whether  or  not  feed  during  the  auto  nozzle
maintenance.
• When  it  is  set  ON,  the  feeding  starts  simulta-
neously  with  the  auto  nozzle  maintenance
operation and the image, which was being printed
until  just  before  the  maintenance,  is  passed
through  the  color  fixation device to  development
colors.
• When  it  is  OFF,  the  feeding  during  auto  nozzle
maintenance operation will not be performed.
In  this  case,  the  image  printed  just  before
maintenance may become uneven coloring.
• Feed it when the color fixation device is ON.
Setting Auto Cleaning
You can set the machine so that it counts the number of
printed files or  the  length  or  time  after printing has been
completed,  and  performs  cleaning  automatically  if
required.
You can select the auto cleaning setting from three types
below:
File : Set the cleaning intervals by the number of 
printed files.
Length : Set the cleaning intervals by the printed 
length.
Time : Set the cleaning intervals by the printed 
time.
The machine can perform a stable printing operation with
its heads always kept clean.
1
Press the 
 (MENU)
   key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, 
and press  key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press 
 (>>) 
 twice.
4
Press   to select “Auto Nozzle 
Maint.”, and press   key.
5
Press   to select “Auto Cleaning”, 
and press   key.
6
Select “ON”, and press   key.
7
Press  key, and press   to 
select the type of auto cleaning.
• There  are  “PAGE”,  “LENGTH”  and  “TIME”  for
auto cleaning.
• File : When the set number of files has been
completed,  the  machine  performs
head cleaning automatically.
• Length :  When  the  set  length  has  passed, the
machine  performs  head  cleaning
automatically.
• Time :  When  the  set  time  has  passed,  the
machine  performs  head  cleaning
automatically.
• If you do not set auto cleaning, first select “OFF”
and then proceed to the Step 9.
8
Press  key, and press   to 
select the cleaning interval.
• Depending on the auto cleaning type selected in
the Step 5, the setting value differs.
• For File : 1 to 1000 (in 1 file increment)
• For Length : 0.1 to 100.0m (in 0.1m increment)
• For Time : 10 to 120min (in 10min increment)
9
Press  key, and press   to 
select the cleaning type.
• Set Value : Normal/ Soft/Hard
10
Press  key, and press  to 
select “Cln.BeforePrint”.
• The  machine  automatically  performs  cleaning  at
the time of printing start after the preset time has
passed since the  last printing. Select OFF if  this
function is not necessary.
• The  time  counter  is  reset  when  cleaning  is
performed  manually  or  another  maintenance
operation is performed.
11
Press  key, and press  to 
select “Separation”.
• When  “RIP  Separation”  is  selected,  cleaning  is
performed  at  the  break  between  the  images
specified by the RIP.
12
Press  key.
13
Press   key several times to 
end the setting.
• Depending on the state of the heads, etc., the 
image quality deterioration may not be improved 
even with this function performed. In this case, 
contact our service office or the distributor in your 
region.




3-13
Chapter 3 Setup
3
2
2
Nozzle Check Flow
Nozzle check is conducted according to the following flow.
Printing Operations at “Nozzle Missing” Judgment and Error Occurrence
 When judged to be “Nozzle Missing”Printing is stopped.
 When error occurs during nozzle checkPrinting is stopped and “Nozzle Check” is automatically turned 
OFF. After recovering from the error, set “Nozzle Check” once again.
• Turn the “Nozzle Check” setting ON to be enabled.
• Only perform RETRY COUNT and Printing Check settings when the settings are enabled.
1
Nozzle check  Judgment
2
3
Recovery operation 
Nozzle Check  
Judgment
4
Retry  Judgment
Printing Check  Judgment
Detects missing nozzles.
If  more  missing  nozzles  than  “Judgement
Condition”  are  detected  after  the  nozzle  check,
cleaning  is  performed  and  nozzle  check  is
conducted again.
5
Nozzle Missing judgment
If  more  missing  nozzles  than  A  are  eventually
detected,  continued  printing  will  be  deemed
impossible and printing will stop.
If  more  missing  nozzles  than  “Judgement
Condition”  are  detected  after  the  recovery
operation,  the  recovery  operation  is  conducted
again.
• If the “RETRY COUNT” setting is configured to 1 or more, 
this becomes effective.
Nozzle  recovery  is  automatically  conducted
following nozzle check and recovery operation.
• Turn the “Printing Check” setting ON to be enabled.





3-14
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting the Nozzle Check
Select ON when you want to conduct nozzle check during
online printing.
1
Press 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
LOCAL.
• Nozzle Check menu will be displayed.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the 
 (>>) twice.
4
Press   to select “Auto Nozzle 
Maint.” and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Nozzle Check”  
and press the   key.
6
Select “ON”, and press  key.
7
Press   to select setting item, and 
press the   key.
• select  the  nozzle  check  interval  from  “LENGTH”
or “FILE”.
• Length : nozzle  check  is  conducted  when  the
printed length reaches the set length.
• File : nozzle  check  is  conducted  when  the
number  of  printed  files  reaches  the
set number.
• Time : When the print time reaches the time
set, perform the nozzle check.
8
Press   to select the setting 
value, and press the   key.
• The  set  value  will  differ  according  to  the  setting
selected in Step 5.
• Length : 0.1 to 100.0m (in 0.1m increment)
• File : 1 to 1000 (in 1 file increment)
• Time : 10 to 120min (in 10min increment)
9
Press  key.
10
Press   to select the cleaning 
type, and press the  key.
• Setting value: Soft/ Normal/ Hard / Auto
• When Auto is selected, the most suitable cleaning
is  performed  automatically  depending  on  the
condition of the nozzles.
11
Press   to select “Retry Count”, 
and press the   key.
12
Press   to select “Retry Count”, 
and press the   key.
• Setting value: 0 to 3
13
Press   to select “Auto Nozzle 
Recovery”, and press the   key.
14
Press   to select "Judgement 
Condition", press   to select the 
head line and color, and press the 
 key.
15
Press   to set the number of 
nozzles for judgment, and press the 
 key.
• Setting value: 0 to 100 / OFF
• When  set  to  “OFF”,  the  nozzle  check  is  not
performed.
16
Press   to select  “Separation”, 
and press the   key.
17
Press   to select setting value, 
and press the   key.
• When  “RIP  Separation”  is  selected,  cleaning  is
performed  at  the  break  between  the  images
specified by the RIP.
18
Press  key to end the setting.




Chapter 3 Setup
3-15
3
2
2
Setting Interval wiping
When a set time has elapsed, the machine automatically
wipes the nozzle surfaces of the head to remove any ink
droplets attached to the surfaces.
In case that deflection, nozzle missing, or symptom which
ink droplets fall  down  occurred,  set  the interval  between
each operation shorter.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the 
 (>>) twice.
4
Press   to select “Interval Wiping” 
, and press the   key.
5
Press   to set intervals.
• Set Value : 3 to 255 min, OFF
• When  selecting  3~255  min,  execute  the  feed
setting.
• When  turning  it  ON, it  feeds  the  media  until  the
media passes Color fixation device.
• When  [OFF]  is  set,  periodical  wiping  is  not
executed.
6
Press   key.
7
Press  key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting Head Gap
Set  the  head  gap  (height  from  the  media  to  the  nozzle
plane of the heads).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
 key in 
Local.
2
Press   to select SETUP 1 to 4, and 
press   key.
• Setup menu will be displayed.
3
Press the   (<<).
4
Press   to select “Head Gap”  and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select the Head Gap 
value, and press the   key.
• Set value : 1.5 to 7.0mm
6
Press   key.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• The color tone may change, depending on the 
timing when periodic wiping is performed. Check 
in advance that the color tone is not affected.




Chapter 3 Setup
3-16
About Machine Setup menu
Common settings are functions for using this machine easily.
The following items can be set in Machine settings.
twice
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
MENU
Setup
>
>
Maintenance
>
Machine Setup
Information
>
>
Media Reset
>><<
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1>
12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
Machine Setup
Unit / Temp
°C
Unit / Length
Key Buzzer
mm
ON
ALL
Head Select
AUTO
MediaDetect/Width
>><<
2/4
Machine Setup
Drying Feed
OFF
View Feed
Space Btwn PP.
OFF
OFF
INTER
Space Feed Mode
>
Network & Mail
>><<
3/4
Machine Setup
LANGUAGE
>
Reset
>
>><<
4/4
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
1/4
Machine Setup
Unit / Temp
°C
Unit / Length
Key Buzzer
mm
ON
ALL
Head Select
AUTO
MediaDetect/Width
>><<
2/4
Machine Setup
Drying Feed
OFF
View Feed
Space Btwn PP.
OFF
OFF
INTER
Space Feed Mode
>
Network & Mail
>><<
3/4
Machine Setup
LANGUAGE
>
Reset
>
>><<
4/4
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
1/4
Machine Setup
Unit / Temp
°C
Unit / Length
Key Buzzer
mm
ON
ALL
Head Select
AUTO
MediaDetect/Width
>><<
2/4
Machine Setup
Drying Feed
OFF
View Feed
Space Btwn PP.
OFF
OFF
INTER
Space Feed Mode
>
Network & Mail
>><<
3/4
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
1/4
Machine Setup
Unit / Temp
°C
Unit / Length
Key Buzzer
mm
ON
ALL
Head Select
AUTO
MediaDetect/Width
>><<
2/4
Machine Setup
Drying Feed
OFF
View Feed
Space Btwn PP.
OFF
OFF
INTER
Space Feed Mode
>
Network & Mail
>><<
3/4
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
1/4
Machine Setup
Unit / Temp
°C
Unit / Length
Key Buzzer
mm
ON
ALL
Head Select
AUTO
MediaDetect/Width
>><<
2/4
Machine Setup
Drying Feed
OFF
View Feed
Space Btwn PP.
OFF
OFF
INTER
Space Feed Mode
>
Network & Mail
>><<
3/4
Machine Setup
Auto Power-off
30min
Feeding Unit
Take-up Unit
ON
ON
OFF
Media Remain
>
Time Set
>><<
1/4
: Press this to select Machine  Setup  menu, or to  switch  to
the previous screen.
: Press this to switch to the next screen.
: Use these to select a setting item.
: Press this to confirm a setting, etc..
Machine Setup menus at-a-glance





3-17
Chapter 3 Setup
3
2
2
Machine Setup menu table
Function name Set value Default Description
AUTO Power-off ( P.3-18) NONE/ 10 ~ 600min 30min
When no operation has been performed for the set 
time, the power supply is automatically turned 
“OFF”.
Feeding device missing( P.3-18) ON/ OFF ON
You can set the operation method when the ON/
OFF button for the take-up device is pressed.
Take-up Unit ( P.3-19) ON/ OFF ON
You can set the operation method when the ON/
OFF button for the take-up device is pressed.
Media Remain ( P.3-19) ON/ OFF OFF You can control the remaining amount of media.
Time Set ( P.3-19) Hours/Minutes/Seconds Time difference is corrected.
Unit/ Temp. ( P.3-19)
°C (Centigrade)/°F 
(Fahrenheit)
°C A unit for displaying temperature is set.
Unit/ Length ( P.3-19) mm / inch mm A unit for displaying length and area is set.
Key Buzzer ( P.3-20) OFF / ON ON A buzzer sound when keys are pressed is set.
Select head ( P.3-20)
All/ Head Line 1/ 
Head Line 2/ Head Line 3/ 
Head Line 1&2/ Head Line 2&3
All
If troubles such as the nozzle clogging is not solved, 
you can print with another head which has no error.
Media Detect/ Width ( P.3-20) Auto/ Manual Auto
When you want to enter the optional media width 
when setting media and there is a problem with the 
media width sensor, use "MANUAL" to set the width.
Drying Feed ( P.3-20) OFF/100 to 1000mm OFF
To dry evenly up to the back edge of the printing 
data, set the length to be fed after printing has been 
completed.
CONFIRM. FEED ( P.3-21) ON/ OFF OFF
Set whether media feeding is performed for 
checking the result of the test printing etc. or not.
Space Btwn PP. ( P.3-21) None/10 to 500mm
None
Sets the amount of blank space between printed 
lines.
Space Feed Mode ( P.3-21)
INTERMITTENT/ 
CONTINUOUS
INTERMIT
TENT
Change the feed mode of the margin included in the 
image data.
Network & 
Mail
Network
(P.3-22)
Set the network.
Check IP 
Address
The IP address currently used by this machine is displayed.
Check 
MAC 
Address
The MAC address currently used by this machine is displayed.
DHCP OFF / ON
When it is ON, the IP address given by the DHCP 
server is used.
AutoIP OFF / ON
When it is ON, the IP address is determined by the 
AutoIP protocol. However, DHCP is ON, DHCP has 
priority.
IP 
Address
*1
Set the IP address used by this machine.
Def.
Gateway *1
Set the default gateway used by this machine.
DNS 
Address 
*1
Set the DNS server address used by this machine.
SubNet 
Mask *1
Set the digit number of the subnet mask used by this machine.
Event Mail
(P.3-22)
Mail 
Delivery
ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
the set event occurs.
Select 
Event
Print Start ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at the 
start of printing.
Print End ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at the 
end of printing.
Error Event ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
an error occurs.
Warning Event ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
a warning occurs.
Other Event ON / OFF OFF
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail when 
an event other than the above occurs.
Mail 
Address
Set the e-mail address to 
which you send the event mail.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols (within 96 characters)
Message 
Subject
Set the characters to write in 
the subject of the event mail.
Alphanumeric characters and symbols (within 8 characters)




3-18
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting a AUTO Power-off
When  no  operation  has  been  performed  for  the  set
time, the power supply is automatically turned “OFF”.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “AUTO Power-
off” and press the   key.
4
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set Value : none, 10 to 600min
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting Feeding unit
For setting whether the Feeding unit is used or not used.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “Feeding unit”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select ON/ OFF, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Network & 
Mail
Event Mail
(P.3-22)
Server 
Setup
SMTP Address Set the SMTP server.
SMTP PORT No. Set the SMTP port number.
SENDER ADDRESS Set the e-mail address to be used as the sender mail address.
Auth.
POP before 
SMTP
Set the SMTP server authentication method (SMTP 
authentication).
SMTP Auth
OFF
USER NAME 
*2
Set the user name used for the authentication.
PASS WORD *2 Set the password used for the authentication.
POP3 ADDRESS 
*3
Set the POP server.
APOP *3 Set ON/ OFF of APOP.
Transmit 
Tes t
Send the test e-mail.
Setting Lock 
(P.3-26)
Lock
(Password is 
not set)
0000 to 9999 0000
You can freely specify a four digit password so that 
no one other than an administrator can perform 
network and mail settings.
Unlock
(Password is 
set)
Language ( P.3-26)
日本語
English 
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Português
English Displayed language is changed.
Reset ( P.3-26)                                        
                 All setting values are returned to the status default.
*1.  Settable when both of DHCP and AutoIP are [OFF]
*2. Settable only when Auth. is not OFF
*3. Settable only when Auth. is POP before SMTP
Function name Set value Default Description
• If the machine received data from the PC in the 
auto-power-off status, the power supply is turned 
ON, however, printing operation is not started 
automatically.
• In case of using the automatic power off function, 
turn off the power of Color fixation device.




Chapter 3 Setup
3-19
3
2
2
Setting Take-up unit
For setting whether the take-up unit is used or not used.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “Take-up unit”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select ON/ OFF, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
 
Setting the Display of Media Remain
Whether  the  screen  displays  the  remaining  amount  of  a
media is set.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press  to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press  to select “Media Remain”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select ON/ OFF, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting Time
You can set time of your country (time difference).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “Time Set”, and 
press the   key.
• The time that is currently set is displayed.
4
Press the 
 (

)
  to shift to time input 
mode.
5
Press   to enter the time, 
and press the   key.
• Time/ Minute/ Second selecting:  by  the  [][]
keys.
• Time/ Minute/ Second inputting: by the  [][]
keys.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting Unit (Temperature/ Length)
Units used by this machine are set.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
.
4
Press   to select  “Unit/Temp” or 
“Unit/Length” and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the setting value, 
and press the   key.
• Set value of temperature: °C / °F
• Set value of length: mm / inch
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
When the media 
remaining amount 
display is turned to 
“ON”
the remaining amount of a media is 
displayed in Remote.
(However, when a leaf media is used, 
the length of the media to be printed is 
displayed.)
When the media 
remaining amount 
display is turned to 
“OFF”
the remaining amount of a media is not 
displayed in the Remote.
• The displayed amount of a media is a rough 
indication. It may be different from the actual 
remaining amount.
• The amount of a media that has been fed by the 
printing and jog keys is reflected in the remaining 
amount of a media.
• The length of a media (initial value of the 
remaining amount) is entered when a roll media is 
detected. ( P.2-16)
• The setting configured here does not become 
effective unless media detection is performed after 
the setting has been complete.
• -20 hours to +4 hours can be set.




3-20
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting a Key Buzzer
You can turn off the buzzer sound when pressing the key.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Key Buzzer”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select ON/ OFF, and 
press the   key.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Selecting the head line to use
If troubles such as the nozzle clogging is not solved, you
can print with another head which has no error.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Select head”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Use head”, and 
press the   key.
• Set value: 
All/ Head Line 1/ Head Line 2/ Head Line 3/
Head Line 1 &
 
2/ Head Line
 
2 &
 
3
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting the Media Detect/Width
When  you  want  to  enter  the  optional  media  width  when
setting  media  and  there  is  a  problem  with  the  media
width sensor, use "MANUAL" to set the width.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
.
4
Press   to select “Media Detect/
Width”, and press the   key.
5
Press   , select “Auto” or 
“Manual”, and press the   key.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting a Drying Feed
To dry evenly up to the back edge of the printing data, set
the length to be fed after printing has been completed.
Depending to your external heater position, set it so that
the  data  end  may  be  fed  until  it  passes  the  external
heater.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the   
(>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Drying Feed”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the length you 
want to feed, and press the   key.
• Set value : OFF / 100 to 1000mm
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• The buzzer sound is not disabled for errors, 
warnings and/or operation completion even if this 
setting is set to “OFF”.
• When the color fixation device is ON, you cannot 
make dry feed settings.




Chapter 3 Setup
3-21
3
2
2
Setting the Confirm.
Set whether media feeding is performed for checking the
result of the test printing etc. or not.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “View Feed”, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select ON/ OFF, and 
press the   key.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting  the  amount  of  blank  space
between printed lines
Sets the amount of blank space between printed lines.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Space Btwn PP.” 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to set the amount of blank 
space, and press the   key.
• Set value : None / 10 to 500mm
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting the feed mode of the space of
no data to be printed
Change  the  feed  mode  of  the  margin  included  in  the
image data (the space of no data to be printed). If print
data  with  much  margin,  set  to  “Continuous”,  then  the
print time can be shorten.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Space Feed 
Mode”, and press the   key.
5
Press   to select the space feeding 
mode, and press the   key.
• Intermittent:  Perform intermittent  feed operation
of the path division unit
• Continuous: Feed the no data part at a time
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• In case of checking the print result after the 
confirmation feed, check with the upper lid of Color 
fixation device open.
• If the printed data already has a blank space, 
using this function will result in “Blank space of the 
data + Amount of blank space set by using this 
function” being output as a blank space.




3-22
Chapter 3 Setup
Set the network
You  can  also  perform  network  setting  with  “Network
Configurator”,  the  tool  to  perform  network  setting  of
Mimaki’s  product.  To  download  the  Network
Configurator,  check  “Driver  /  Utility”  on  the  download
page  at  Mimaki  Engineering  (
http://mimaki.com/
download/
).
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Check MAC 
Address” and press the   key.
• The IP address currently used by this machine is
displayed.
7
Press   to select “Check MAC 
Address”, and press the   key.
• The MAC address currently used by this machine
is displayed.
8
Press  to select “DHCP”, and 
press the   key.
•Press [][] to set ON/ OFF.
• When it is ON, the IP address given by the DHCP
server is used.
9
Press   to select “AutoIP”, and 
press the   key.
•Press “”“” to set ON/ OFF.
• When  it  is  ON,  the  IP  address  is  determined  by
the  AutoIP  protocol.  However,  DHCP  is  ON,
DHCP has priority.
10
Press   to select the next items, 
and press the   key.
• Both of DHCP and AutoIP is OFF, you can set IP
Address/  Default  Gateway/  DNS  Address/  Sub
Net Mask. For  other  than  above,  proceed to  the
Step 13.
11
Press   to select the set 
values.
12
Press   key to confirm the value.
13
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting event mail function
Set the function to send e-mails to the set e-mail address
when events such as cutting start/ end and stop due to
an error.
You  can  also  perform  network  setting  with  “Network
Configurator”,  the  tool  to  perform  network  setting  of
Mimaki’s  product.  To  download  the  Network
Configurator,  check  “Driver  /  Utility”  on  the  download
page  at  Mimaki  Engineering  (
http://mimaki.com/
download/
).
Enable the event mail function
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”  and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Mail Delivery”, 
and press the   key.
7
Press   to select “ON” and press 
the   key.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• After connecting with the network, it takes time 
until the IP address is determined.
If the IP address has not been determined, 
“0.0.0.0” is displayed.
• To reflect network setting, once turn off the power 
supply and then turn it on again.
Disclaimer
• The customer is responsible for the communication fee for 
Internet communication such as e-mail notification.
• The notification by the event mail function may not be 
delivered due to Internet environment, failure of the device/ 
the power supply, etc. Mimaki has absolutely no 
responsibility for any damages or loss resulting from non-
delivery or delays.
• You can use event mail function by connecting 
LAN to this machine. Please prepare for LAN 
cable connection beforehand.
• Not compatible with SSL communication.




Chapter 3 Setup
3-23
3
2
2
Set the event to send an event mail
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”  and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Select Event”, 
and press the   key.
7
Press   to select an event, and 
press   
(

)
 .
• After selecting the event, press the [FUNC2] key
and put a check in the check box.
An email will be sent when the event whose box
has been checked occurs.
• To  select  multiple  events,  use  [][] to put the
cursor over the events you want, and put a check
in their boxes by pressing [FUNC2].
8
Press the   key.
9
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Set the e-mail address
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”  and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Mail Address”, 
and press the   key.
7
Press   to set mail 
address and press the   key.
• Set  the  e-mail  address  to  which  you  send  the
event mail.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 96 characters.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Set the subject
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”, and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Message 
Subject”, and press the   key.
7
Press   to set subject, 
and press the   key.
• Set  the  characters  to  write  in  the  subject  of  the
event mail.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 8 characters.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Event 
name
Outline
Print Start
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at 
the start of printing.
Print End
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail at 
the end of printing.
Error Event
Sets sending/not sending of an email when 
printing is stopped due to occurrence of an error.
Warning 
Event
Sets sending/not sending of an email when a 
warning occurs during printing.
Other Event
Set whether you send/ do not send the e-mail 
when an event other than the above occurs.




3-24
Chapter 3 Setup
Set the server
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”, and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select “Server Setup”, 
and press the   key.
7
Press   to select “SMTP Address”, 
and press the   key.
8
Press   to set SMTP 
Address and press the   key.
• Press  the  jog  key  [][][][] to set SMTP
address.
• Input the SMTP address name.
9
Press   to select “SMTP PORT 
No.”, and press the   key.
10
Press   to set SMTP Port No. and 
press the   key.
• Set the SMTP port number.
11
Press   to select “SENDER 
ADDRESS”, and press the   key.
12
Press   to set Sender Mail 
Address and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] and set the e-mail address to
be used as the sender mail address.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 64 characters.
13
Press   to select “Authentication”, 
and press the   key.
14
Press   to select “Authentication”, 
and press the   key.
• Set  the  SMTP  server  authentication  method
(SMTP authentication).
• When you select [OFF], proceed to the Step 15.
• If  you  select  [SMTP  Authentication],  after  the
operation of the steps 15-18, go to step 23.
• When you select [OFF], proceed to the Step 23.
15
Press   to select “USER NAME”, 
and press the   key.
16
Press   to set the user 
name, and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] to  set the user name to  use
for the authentication.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 30 characters.
17
Press   to select “PASSWORD”, 
and press the   key.
18
Press   to set Password 
and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] to set the password to use for
the authentication.
• Set it with alphanumeric characters and symbols
within 15 characters.
19
Press   to select “POP3 Address”, 
and press the   key.
20
Press   to set POP3 
Address and press the   key.
•Press [][][][] to set POP server.
• Input the POP server name.
21
Press   to select “APOP”, and 
press the   key.
22
Press   to set ON/OFF, and press 
the   key.
23
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• Depending on your server, if you do not 
set the e-mail address not supporting the 
account, sending/ receiving e-mails may 
be unavailable.
• On the password setting screen, you can 
only check the value that you are currently 
inputting.




3-25
1
2
3
4
5
6
Chapter 3 Setup
Send a test e-mail
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Event Mail”, and 
press the   key.
6
Press the 
 (>>) 
 key.
• “Transmit Test” will be selected.
7
Press   key.
• The sent result is displayed.
• If sending test e-mail has failed, an error code is
displayed.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Transmit Test
Failer
＊＊＊
Error Code

Error Code

• The sent result of the test e-mail is the result of e-mail sending process performed by this machine to the e-mail server.
It does not indicate that the e-mail was received at the address.
• If the spam e-mail filter etc. has been set in the terminal in which e-mails are received, even if “Sending has been 
completed” is displayed, the e-mail cannot be received in some cases.
• If sending test e-mail has failed, the error code below is displayed.
• If the error cannot be solved, try again after a while.
• For the server setting etc., contact with the network administrator or the provider.
Error Code
The expected cause Measures
10
Network connection error
• Check that the machine is connected with the network.
•  Check that the machine IP address is correct.
•  Check that the machine is in the environment where 
DNS is available.
20
No valid e-mail address.
• Enter the correct e-mail address.
11003
11004
The POP server cannot be found.
Or cannot access DNS server.
• Check the POP server address.
• Check that the machine is in the environment where DNS 
is available.
11021
Cannot connect with the POP server.
• Check the POP server setting.
• Check the firewall setting.
12010
An error returns from the POP server.
• Check the POP server setting.
13000
The POP authentication has failed.
• Check the user name and the password.
•  Check the APOP setting.
• Confirm the authentication method.
10013
10014
The SMTP server cannot be found.
Or cannot access DNS server.
• Check the SMTP server address.
• Check that the machine is in the environment where DNS 
is available.
10021
Cannot connect with the SMTP server.
• Check the SMTP server setting.
• Check the SMTP port number.
• Check the firewall setting.
10∗∗∗
11∗∗∗
20∗∗∗
21∗∗∗
An error returns from the SMTP server.
• Check the SMTP server setting.
• Cannot communicate with a server that requires 
mandatory SSL communication.
• Check protocol filter settings.
12∗∗∗
It is invalid sender address.
• Check that the e-mail address supporting the account 
entered in the user name/ the password is set in 
SENDER ADDRESS.
13∗∗∗
The e-mail address cannot be found.
• Check the e-mail address.
• Even if there is a mistake in the e-mail address, this error 
cannot be detected in some cases.
22000
22008
SMTP authentication error
• Confirm the authentication method.
23∗∗∗
24∗∗∗
25∗∗∗
The SMTP authentication has failed.
• Check the user name and the password.
“∗∗∗” is the error code returned from the e-mail server.





3-26
Chapter 3 Setup
Setting the Setting Lock function
You can freely specify a four digit password so that no one
other  than  an  administrator  can  perform  network  and
mail settings.
Specifying the password for the 
network and event mail functions
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Setting Lock” , 
and press the   key.
6
Specify a password (four digits) and press 
the   key.
• A  notification  that  setting  has  started  is  briefly
displayed.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Releasing the password for the 
network and event mail functions
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>) 
twice.
4
Press   to select “Network & Mail”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Setting Lock” , 
and press the   key.
6
Enter a four-digit password and press the 
 key.
• When releasing is successful
The message “Release Success” is displayed.
• When releasing fails
The message “Release failure” is displayed.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting a LANGUAGE
Displayed language is changed.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (<<) 
4
Press   to select “Language”, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select language and 
press the   key.
• Set Value: 日本語 / English / Deutsch / Français /
Español / Italiano / Português
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Initializing the Settings
You  can  return  the  setting  of  “SETUP”,  “Maintenance”
and“Machine Setup” to the status before shipment.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select machine setup, 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (<<) 
4
Press   to select “Setup Reset”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press the   key.
• The already configured settings are initialized.
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• If you forget the password, you can press the 
“[FUNC2] ()” key displayed in the screen of Step 
7 to display the password forced release screen.
Be careful as although you can press the [ENTER] 
key to forcibly release the password, items set for 
the network and event mail also return to their 
initial values, making it necessary to re-specify 
them.




3-27
Chapter 3 Setup
3
2
2
About Information menu
The information of this machine can be confirmed.
The following items can be confirmed as machine information.
Information menu table
Item Description
Usage
Wiping This displays how many wipings have been done.
Print Length This displays the total length of the printing done to date.
Latest print 
length
It indicates the length of last printing of the file.
Print Area This displays the total area of the printing done to date.
Use Time This displays the total time for which the machine has been used to date.
Head Maint. This displays the elapsed time after the last head maintenance.
Station Maint. This displays the elapsed time after the last station maintenance.
Nozzle Wash This displays the elapsed time after the last nozzle cleaning.
Disway Wash This displays the elapsed time after the last pump cleaning.
Custody Wash This displays the elapsed time after the last cleaning for storage.
Version This displays the version information of this machine.
List This allows you to print the settings of this machine.
Ink Repl. Report This prints ink history of this machine.
Error History
This displays the history of errors and warnings to date.
When you press [][], the date of occurrence (year/month/day/hour/minute) and the error/
warning information are displayed alternately in the order of occurrence.
4 times
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
List
Ink Repl.Report
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
List
Ink Repl.Report
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
List
Ink Repl.Report
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
List
Ink Repl.Report
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
Information
Usage
>
>
Version
>
Ink Repl.Report
List
>
>
Errot History
>><<
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1>
12:00
1340mm
POST 1L
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
MENU
Setup
>
>
Maintenance
>
Machine Setup
Information
>
>
Media Reset
>><<
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT

: Press this to select Information menu,  or to switch to the
previous screen.
: Press this to switch to the next screen.
: Use these to select a setting item.
: Press this to confirm a setting, etc.





3-28
Chapter 3 Setup
Displaying the Information
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Information” and 
press the   key.
• Information menu appears.
3
Press   to select a item.
• Refer  to  the  “Information  menu”,  and  select  the
information to be displayed.
4
Press   key.
• If  you  selected  [List]  in  step  2,  the  machine’s
settings will be printed.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Resetting wiper use count
1
“Usage” of Information menu is displayed.
(1) Press the [FUNC1] (MENU) in Local
(2) Press [][] to select “Information”, and 
press the [ENTER] key twice.
2
Press   to select “Wiping” , and 
press 
the
 
 (
) key.
• A confirmation screen appears asking if you want
to clear the use count of the wiper.
3
Press the   key to clear the counter.
• The use count of the wiper is cleared.
Displaying  the  Information  of  this
machine
1
Press the   key in Local.
2
The information is displayed sequentially 
with the   key .
• The information shown on the below appear.
3
Press the   key to return to Local.
Ink information
Error/ Warning
(Only at the time of 
occurrence)
Machine information 
(
Media width/ Serial No. /
Version
)
Nozzle check result 
(
The number of missing 
nozzles detected by nozzle 
check
)
Sb310
4. B    80%  No Error
3. B   80%  No Error
2. M   90%  No Error
1. M   90%  No Error
Warning
  Media Undetected
!NCU CONNECT
Warning
Media width
3200mm
0.5mm
Head gap
'00000000
Serial No.
V1.00
TS500P-3200
No Connect
LAN status
Information
Nozzle Check
０
０
０
０
０
M
B
Y
K
M
Line1 M
Line1 B
Line1 Y
Line1 K
Line2 M
1/3
>><<





This chapter
describes  the  items  required  to  use  this  machine  more  comfortably,  which  are  the
methods for the daily care, the maintenance of the ink unit etc.
Maintenance  .................................................4-2
Precautions for Maintenance  ...................... 4-2
About Cleaning Solution .............................. 4-2
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces  ................... 4-2
Cleaning the Platen ..................................... 4-2
Cleaning the Lapel Bar (Take-up Side)  ....... 4-3
Cleaning the Tension Roller ........................ 4-3
Cleaning the Brake Roller  ........................... 4-4
Cleaning the Ink Landing Plate  ................... 4-4
Cleaning the Fabric Retainer  ...................... 4-4
Maintaining the Grit Roller ........................... 4-4
Cleaning the Color Fixation Device ............. 4-6
Cleaning the Area around Flushing Unit  .......4-6
Cleaning the Flushing BOX Sensor  ............ 4-6
Cleaning the ink receiving sponge  .............. 4-7
About Maintenance Menu  .............................4-8
Maintenance menus at-a-glance ................. 4-9
Maintaining the Capping Station ................. 4-10
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap  ..................... 4-10
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage  ........ 4-12
When the Machine Is Not Used for a Long 
Time (Custody Wash)  ............................... 4-12
Cleaning the Ink Head and the Area 
around It  ......................................................4-14
When nozzle missing Cannot Be Solved  ....4-15
Washing the Head Nozzle  .........................4-15
Nozzle Recovery Function .........................4-16
Automatic Maintenance Function ................4-19
Setting the Refreshing level .......................4-19
Setting the Cleaning level ..........................4-19
Charging ink  ................................................4-20
Replacing the Waste Ink Tank  ....................4-21
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation 
Message Appears ......................................4-21
For the operation limitation by the 
amount of waste ink ...................................4-23
Replacing consumables  ..............................4-24
Replacing the wiper  ...................................4-24
Replacing the HF filter  ...............................4-24
Discard the expired ink  ..............................4-25
Replacing the Ink Tank ..............................4-26
Replacing the ink absorber ........................4-27
Tank Calibration .........................................4-28
Chapter 4
Maintenance




Chapter 4 Maintenance
4-2
Maintenance
Maintain the machine regularly or as necessary so that its
accuracy will be maintained and it can continue to be used
for a long time.
Precautions for Maintenance
Pay attention to the following items when maintaining this
machine.
About Cleaning Solution
Use the cleaning liquid dedicated for the ink being used.
Cleaning the Exterior Surfaces
When  the  exterior  surfaces  of  the  machine  are  stained,
dampen  a  soft  cloth  with  water  or  a  neutral  detergent
diluted with water, squeeze it, and wipe the surfaces with
the cloth.
Cleaning the Platen
When  printing  on  coarse  fabric,  some  ink  may  miss  the
fabric and stick to the platen.
If you are concerned about ink soiling the platen, follow the
steps below to wash ink off the platen in water.
(Approximately once a week)
1
Install the tank for collecting dirty water.
• The hose for discharging dirty water is on the right
of  the  machine.  Attach  the  polyethylene  tank  to
the end of the hose.
2
Remove the fabric retainer
•  Slide the fabric retainer to the end of the platen to
remove it.
• When using cleaning solution for maintenance, be 
sure to wear the supplied glove and protective 
glasses.
• Never disassemble the machine. Disassembling it 
can result in electric shock hazards or damage to 
the machine.
Before maintenance, be sure to turn off the power 
button and main power switch, and unplug the 
power cable; otherwise, an unexpected accident 
may occur.
• Prevent moisture from entering the machine. 
Moisture inside the machine can cause electric 
shock hazards or damage to the machine.
• To ensure stable ink jetting, it is necessary for the 
machine to eject a small amount of ink (flushing) 
regularly when a printing (outputting) operation 
has not been performed for a long time.
• When the machine is not to be used for a long 
time, turn off only the power button on the front 
side, leave the main power switch at the side 
turned ON (in the position of | ), and leave the 
power cable connected.
• Do not use benzene, thinner, or any chemical 
agent containing an abrasive. Such materials can 
deteriorate or deform the surface of the cover.
• Do not apply a lubricant, etc. to any parts inside 
the machine. Doing so can cause printing failure.
• Be careful that the cleaning solution, ink, etc. not 
to stick to the cover because this may cause the 
surface of the cover to deteriorate or deform.
Type of Ink Applicable maintenance washings
Sublimation dye ink
Cleaning Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT
ML003-Z-K1
• When cleaning the platen, you need a tank to 
collect the dirty water. Since a polyethylene tank 
for holding dirty water is not supplied with this 
machine, the user needs to prepare one in 
advance.




4-3
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
2
3
Wash the platen in water.
4
Discharge the dirty water that collects on 
the platen.
• Turn the handle on the hose for discharging dirty
water  clockwise  to  discharge  the  water  from the
platen.
5
Wipe away any dirty water that remains on 
the platen with a waste cloth etc.
6
Tighten the handle for discharging dirty 
water, and then remove the tank.
• Dispose  of  the  dirty  water  collected  in  the  tank
according to your local rules and regulations.
7
Attach the fabric retainer.
Cleaning the Lapel Bar (Take-up Side)
From the front of the machine, wipe away any dirt, such as
ink, attached to the lapel bar used during media take-up.
Soak a soft cloth in water or diluted mild detergent, wring it
out thoroughly, and then wipe away any dirt.
Cleaning the Tension Roller
From the front of the machine, wipe away any dirt, such as
ink, attached to the tension roller.
Soak a soft cloth in water or diluted mild detergent, wring it
out thoroughly, and then wipe away any dirt.
Handle





Chapter 4 Maintenance
4-4
Cleaning the Brake Roller
From the front of the machine, wipe away any dirt, such as
lint, attached to the brake roller.
Use  adhesive  tape  to  clean  any  lint  that  is  stuck  to  the
surface of the brake roller.
Cleaning the Ink Landing Plate
Since media can become soiled when setting it, use a cloth
etc. soaked in cleaning solution to clean any ink stains.
Cleaning the Fabric Retainer
To clean any dirt such as ink stains on the fabric retainer,
remove the retainer to clean it.
Maintaining the Grit Roller
Use a resin brush to periodically remove any preprocessing
solution or lint that is attached to the grit roller.
1
Turn off the machine.
• Set the main power switch of this machine to the
“O” side.
2
Open the front cover and raise the clamp 
lever.
Ink landing plate

• Make sure you clean the grit roller periodically.
• If the grit roller is left with preprocessing solution 
for the media being used, it could lead to rusting.
• If the grit roller rusts, it may become impossible to 
feed the media.
Fabric retainer





4-5
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
2
3
Remove the pinch roller.
• Loosen the knob screws (2 points) and pull them
towards you.
4
Wipe the surface of the grit roller using a 
brush to remove any dirt.
• Lightly brush the surface of the grit roller several
times.
• Rotate the grit roller with your hand to make sure
you brush the entire circumference of the roller.
• If the brush gets dirty, wipe it with a dry cloth.
5
Remove dirt from the surface of the pinch 
roller.
• Wipe the surface of the pinch roller with a cloth to
remove any ink stains.
6
Install the pinch roller.
• When installing the pinch roller, align the convex
section on the installation side, and then install.
7
Turn on the machine and check that it is 
operating correctly.
(1) Press the   key in Local mode.
(2) Press  , and select [Carriage Out].
(3) Press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
(4) Open the front cover.
(5) Push the carriage with your hand to move it 
to the left edge, and then check that the 
carriage and the pinch roller do not obstruct 
each other.
• If  the  carriage  and  the  pinch  roller  obstruct
each  other,  re-install  the  pinch  roller,  and
then check that there is no obstruction.
(6) If there are no problems, close the front 
cover.
(7) Press the   key.
• After  the  initial  operations,  the  media
selection screen is displayed.
• Make sure you use a resin brush to clean the grit 
roller. If you wipe it with a cloth or paper, lint sticks 
to the uneven sections. Also, using a hard, 
metallic brush can damage the surface of the grit 
roller.
• Do not use water or cleaning solution when 
brushing the roller. This can cause rusting.
Grit roller

Remove ink 
stains





Chapter 4 Maintenance
4-6
Cleaning the Color Fixation Device
Mist  soiling  occurs  around  the  sublimation  gas  collection
hood  on  the  top  of  the  color  fixation  device,  and  on  the
partitioning  board  inside  the  hood.  Make  sure  you  clean
this section daily to prevent mist soiling from accumulating.
1
Turn off the main power on the machine.
2
Open the color fixation device hood.
3
Wipe off an adhesion dirt inside of Hood 
cover of Color fixation device with a paper 
towel putting alcohol on.
4
Wipe off an adhesion dirt on the partition 
plate inside of Hood cover with a paper 
towel putting alcohol on.
• After wipe the dirt off, check whether the partition
plate inside of Hood cover can slide up and down.
Cleaning the Area 
around Flushing Unit
In order to prevent ink clogging of the head, this machine
ejects ink regularly to flushing unit.
To  comfortably  use  this  machine,  please  keep  clean  the
peripheral of flushing unit.
Cleaning the Flushing BOX Sensor
Please clean flushing BOX sensor regularly (about once a
week).
1
Remove the lower part of the left side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws (for two positions) of the
lower part of the left side front cover.
(2) Pull the lower part of the left side front cover 
in front , lift it above, and remove the lower 
part of the left side front cover.
• Remove the screws use the supplied screwdriver.
2
Shift the flushing unit to the left.
(1) Remove the clasp.
(2) Hold The Handle And Shift The Flushing 
Unit.
• Before cleaning, make sure you turn off the main 
power supply, and make sure the color fixation 
device has cooled down.
• When around a lower part of Hood duct is dirty, 
wipe off with a paper towel putting alcohol on.
Partition plate inside of Hood

Tools required for cleaning
• Clean stick  • Gloves
• Goggles
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles and gloves 
when replacing the ink absorber. Otherwise, you 
may get ink in your eyes.
• The ink contains organic solvent. If you get the ink 
on your skin or in your eyes, wash it away with 
plenty of water immediately.
Screw
Lower part of the 
left side front cover

Handle
Clasp





4-7
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
2
3
Clean the part of the sensor with a clean 
stick.
4
Return the flushing unit to the original 
position.
(1) Hold  The  Handle  And  Shift  The  Flushing
Unit.
(2) Fasten the clasp.
Cleaning the ink receiving sponge
1
Shift the flushing unit to the left.
• Please  conduct  the  operation  up  to  P.4-6
“Cleaning the Flushing BOX Sensor” step 2.
2
Remove the flushing cover, and take out 
the ink receiving sponge.
(1) Remove the screws (4 locations) of flushing
cover, and remove the cover.
(2) Remove the ink receiving sponge holding, 
and take out the ink receiving sponge.
3
Soak the ink receiving sponge in tap water, 
and lightly rubbing wash.
• Please  ask  the  industrial  waste  treatment
company  for  the  waste  liquid  treatment  of  the
waste that washed the sponge.
4
Return the flushing unit to its original 
state.
• Install  the  flushing  cover  with  the  screw  on  the
back side.
• Please make  sure  that ink  receiving sponge, ink
sponge  holder,  and  flushing  cover  are  seated in
the ink receiver.
Sensor

Handle
clasp

Handle
clasp

Flushing cover

Sponge

Screw
Ink receiver





4-8
Chapter 4 Maintenance
About Maintenance Menu
This provides various settings for doing maintenance on the machine.
The following items can be set in Maintenance settings.
>><< >><< >><< >><< >><<
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
POST 2L
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
MENU
Setup
>
>
Maintenance
>
Media Reset
Machine Setup
>
>
Information
>><<
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
REMOTEMENU
TEST PRINT /
CLEANING
Local <Setup 1> 12:00
1340mm
179°C/180°C
CONSTANT
Maintenance
Carriage Out
>
>
Nozzle Wash
>
Disway Wash
>
Custody Wash
>
Sub Tank
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Replace Wiper
>
>><<
2/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Replace Ink Tank
Tank Calibration
>
>
>
>><<
Waste Expored ink
2/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Replace Ink Tank
Tank Calibration
>
>
>
>><<
Waste Expored ink
2/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Replace Ink Tank
Tank Calibration
>
>
>
>><<
Waste Expored ink
2/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2
Maintenance
Station
>
>
Nozzle Recovery
>
Auto Maint.
>
Sub Tank
>
Charge Ink
>><<
1/2

 Maintenance menus at-a-glance
: Press this to select Maintenance menu, or to switch to the
previous screen.
: Press this to use the maintenance function.
: Press this to switch to the next screen.
: Use these to select a setting item.
: Press this to confirm a setting, etc..
 Press the   key to perform “Station maintenance”.
The Station menu can be displayed easily without selecting [MENU]-[Maintenance] from Local.
Press the [SEL] key to display “MAINT” for [FUNC2] , and then press the [FUNC2] key.





4-9
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Maintenance menus at-a-glance
Item Set value Description
Maintenance cover
For carrying out maintenance on the carriage and station periphery.
Carriage Out
(P.4-10)
Moves the carriage out, for carrying out cleaning of the cap periphery, 
head, wipers, etc.
Nozzle Wash
(P.4-15)
1 to 15min
Soaks the nozzle surfaces in maintenance cleaning fluid, for carrying 
out recovery from nozzle missing or bent.
Pump Tube Wash
(P.4-12)
Executes washing of the suction pump tubes.
Custody Wash
(P.4-12)
1 to 15min
Carried out when the machine is going to be out of use for an extended 
period. Washes the nozzles and tubes beforehand, to keep the 
machine in fine condition.
REPLACE WIPER
(P.4-24)
Used when replacing the wiper. If the wiper is replaced, the number of 
times the wiper was used that is managed in this device is reset.
Nozzle Recovery
(P.4-16)
For printing using another nozzle, if nozzle wash and so forth fail to effect recovery from nozzle missing, etc.
Print Used to print a pattern and to check and/or register clogged nozzles.
Entry Registers the faulty nozzle identified by “Print”.
Check Checks recoverable printable conditions.
Reset Resets a registered faulty nozzle.
Auto Maint. ( P.4-
19)
For having the various maintenance functions executed automatically. Set the execution interval for each 
maintenance function.
Refresh
OFF/Lv.1/
Lv.2
/Lv.3
For setting the activation interval for refresh.
Cleaning
OFF/Lv.1/
Lv.2
/Lv.3
For setting the activation interval for head cleaning.
When set to other than "OFF", you can set the cleaning type (Soft / 
Normal / Hard).
Sub Tank ( P.5-4)
Used to charge ink and to solve the problems including ink errors and 
nozzle missing .
Charge Ink ( P.4-20)
Used when ink cannot be automatically charged, or if you want to 
charge ink after confirming the contents of the IC ship.
Replace Ink Tank ( P.4-26)
Used to replace a expired ink tank and to reset the ink charge 
information.
Waste Expired Ink ( )P.4-25 Discard the expired ink and reset charged information.
Tank Calibration ( )P.4-28 Make the correction of the weight balance of the ink supply unit.




4-10
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Maintaining the Cap-
ping Station
Maintain  the  ink  cap,  wiper,  etc.  located  in  the  capping
station.
(Station maintenance)
The ink cap and wiper function as follows.
• Wiper : It wipes off ink sticking to the head nozzles.
• Ink cap : It prevents the head nozzles from clogging 
due to dryness.
s the  machine is used  repeatedly, the  wiper and ink cap
gradually become dirty with ink, dust, etc.
If  nozzle  missing  cannot  be  corrected  even  after  head
cleaning  ( P.2-34)  has  been  performed,  use  a
Cleaning Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT and clean stick.
Cleaning the Wiper and Cap
It  is  recommended  that  the  wiper  and  cap  be  cleaned
frequently  in  order  to  maintain  the  high  image  quality  of
the machine and keep the machine itself in good working
order.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press  , select [Carriage Out], and 
press the   key twice.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
3
Open the lower part of the right side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws of the right side front
cover (for two positions).
(2) Hold the upper of the lower part of the right 
side front cover and pull it to the front.
• Open the  lower  part  of  the  right  side  front cover
with the supplied screwdriver.
Tools required for Maintenance
• Cleaning Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT (ML003-Z-K1)
• Clean stick (SPC-0527)
• Gloves • Goggles
• Be sure to wear the supplied goggles and gloves 
when maintaining the capping station. Otherwise, 
you may get ink in your eyes.
• Do not move the carriage out of the capping 
station by hand. When it is desirable to move the 
carriage, press the [FUNC2] (TEST PRINT/
CLEANING) key to execute the carriage-out. 
( P.4-10 Steps 1 to 2)
• Be sure to perform maintenance for the ink cap 
and the wiper of capping station every day. If you 
leave it dirty, dirt may adhere to the nozzle 
surface, or, dust and dry ink may be rubbed 
against the nozzle. It may cause discharge defect.
• When work is complete at the end of the day, 
clean the wipers and surrounding areas.
• Replace the wiper with a new one when it is 
extremely dirty or bent. ( P.4-24)
• When cleaning the wiper, be careful that lint from 
the clean stick does not get left on the wiper. 
Remaining lint may cause image quality to 
deteriorate.
Carriage

Screw
Lower part of 
the right side 





4-11
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
Remove the wiper.
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its
both ends.
5
Clean the wiper and bracket.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper and bracket
with a  clean stick dipped  in cleaning  solution for
maintenance.
Wipe off so that cleaning solution for maintenance
will not remain.
6
Clean the wiper cleaner.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the wiper and bracket
with a  clean stick dipped  in cleaning  solution for
maintenance.
7
Clean the wiper ink pan.
• Water-based  ink  does  not  flow  easily.  Ink  dries,
gets  stuck,  and  accumulates.  Use  a  rubber
spatula or the like to frequently push the ink that
piles up in the ink pan beneath the wiper towards
the waste route.
8
Set the wiper at the original position.
• Insert the wiper by holding both ends of the wiper.
9
Clean the cap rubber and cap rubber 
cover.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber and cap
rubber cover with a clean stick dipped in cleaning
solution for maintenance.
Wipe off so that cleaning solution for maintenance
will not remain.
10
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
step1.
Performing the Station without 
[FUNC2] (MAINT)
You  can  select Station by using  the [FUNC1] (MENU) in
the Local without pressing the [FUNC2] (MAINT).
(1) Press the [FUNC1] (MENU) in Local.
(2) Press [][] to select “Maintenance”, and press the 
[ENTER] key.
(3) Press [][] to select “Station”, and press the 
[ENTER] key.
• The Station menu appears. Then proceed to step 2.
Projection

Wiper
Bracket

wiper cleaner

Cap rubber Cap rubber cover





4-12
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Washing the Ink Discharge Passage
Wash the ink discharge passage on a regular basis (once
every  2  -  3  months)  to  prevent  ink  coagulation  from
clogging the passage.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press   to select “Disway Wash”, 
and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
• Dry  suction  operation  is  performed  repeatedly
until the washing work is completed.
3
Open the lower part of the right side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws of the right side front
cover (for two positions).
(2) Hold the upper of the lower part of the right 
side front cover and pull it to the front.
• Open the  lower  part of the right  side  front  cover
with the supplied screwdriver.
4
Suction the cleaning solution into a 
syringe and squirt about three syringes 
worth of solution into each cap.
5
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
• After running a dry suction for a certain period of
time, the screen returns to step1.
When the Machine Is Not Used for a
Long Time (Custody Wash)
When the machine is not going to be used for a week or
more,  use  the  cleaning  function  for  custody  to clean the
head nozzles and ink discharge passage. After this, keep
the machine in custody.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press   to select “Custody Wash”, 
and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
Carriage

Screw
Lower part of 
the right side 

Check the items on the right beforehand.
 Is “NEAR END” or “INK END” displayed?
• The cleaning solution or ink is absorbed when the nozzles 
are washed.
At this time, if the state of "no ink" or "almost no ink" is 
detected, the nozzle washing operation cannot start.
• Refill ink.
• Be sure to use the dedicated  cleaning Liquid 03 
MAINTENANCE KIT (ML003-Z-K1).
• Until wiper/ bracket cleaning is competed, “Please 
clean the wiper.” is displayed on the screen. After 
the work up to the step 5 is completed, press the 
[ENTER] key.
Carriage





4-13
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
3
Open the lower part of the right side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws of the right side front
cover (for two positions).
(2) Hold the upper of the lower part of the right 
side front cover and pull it to the front.
• Open the  lower  part of the right  side  front  cover
with the supplied screwdriver.
4
Clean the wiper and the bracket, and press 
the   key.
(1) Open  the  right  maintenance  cover  then  pull
out it by holding projections  at  both  ends of
the wiper.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean 
stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid  
for maintenance. (ML003-Z-K1:  Cleaning 
Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT)
• Wipe off so that maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance will not remain.
(3) Insert it in the original position by holding the 
projections at both ends of the wiper.
5
Clean the cap rubber and cap rubber 
cover.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber and cap
rubber cover with a clean stick dipped in cleaning
solution  for  maintenance.  Wipe  off  so  that
cleaning solution for maintenance will not remain.
• At  this  time,  the  discharge  passage  is  cleaned
automatically.
6
Press   key.
7
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance, using a dropper.
• Fill the cap with the cleaning solution just before
the solution overflows from the cap.
8
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
• The nozzles are washed.
• When the nozzles have been completely washed,
the head moves onto the platen.
9
Press   to set the resting time, and 
press the   key.
• The nozzles are washed.
• When the nozzles have been completely washed,
the head moves onto the platen.
Screw
Lower part of the right 
side front cover

Projection

• Until washing liquid is filled, “Fill the liquid.” is 
displayed on the screen. After the work up to the 
Step 8 is completed and you close the front cover, 
press the [ENTER] key.
Cap rubber Cap rubber cover





4-14
Chapter 4 Maintenance
10
Suction the cleaning solution into a 
syringe and squirt about three syringes 
worth of solution into each cap.
11
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
• After  the  idle  absorbing  operation  has  been
performed for 30  seconds,  the  screen  returns  to
step1.
Cleaning the Ink Head 
and the Area around It
Because  the  ink  head  employs  a  very  precise
mechanism,  due  care  needs  to  be  taken  when  it  is
cleaned.
Using a clean stick, etc., rub off gelatinous ink or dust that
may  stick  to  the  lower  part  of  the  slider  and  the  area
around the ink head. In doing so, never rub the nozzles of
the head.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press  , select [Carriage Out], and 
press the   key.
3
Press   to select “Head Maint.”, 
and press the   key.
• The  carriage  will  move  to  the  left  end  of  this
machine.
4
Remove the lower part of the left side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws (for two positions) of the
lower part of the left side front cover.
(2) Pull the lower part of the left side front cover 
in front , lift it above, and remove the lower 
part of the left side front cover.
• Remove the screws use the supplied screwdriver.
Tools required for cleaning
• Clean stick • Gloves
• Goggles
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles and gloves 
when replacing the ink absorber. Otherwise, you 
may get ink in your eyes.
• The ink contains organic solvent. If you get the ink 
on your skin or in your eyes, wash it away with 
plenty of water immediately.
Screw
Lower part of the 
left side front cover





4-15
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
5
Shift the flushing unit to the left.
(1) Remove the clasp.
(2) Hold The Handle And Shift The Flushing 
Unit.
6
Wipe ink sticking to the side of the head off 
with a clean stick.
• Never rub the nozzles.
7
Press the   key after the cleaning.
8
Return the flushing unit to the original 
position.
(1) Hold  The  Handle  And  Shift  The  Flushing
Unit.
(2) Fasten the clasp.
9
Close the lower part of the left side front 
cover then press the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
Local.
When nozzle missing 
Cannot Be Solved
When  nozzle  missing  cannot  be  solved  even  after  the
head  cleaning  ( P.2-34)  has  been  done,  perform  the
following three functions:
Washing the Head Nozzle
Perform cleaning of the nozzles  in  the  heads to prevent
them being clogged with coagulated ink.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press   to select “Nozzle Wash”, 
and press the   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
3
Open the lower part of the right side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws of the right side front
cover (for two positions).
(2) Hold the upper of the lower part of the right 
side front cover and pull it to the front.
• Open the  lower  part  of  the  right  side  front cover
with the supplied screwdriver.
Handle
clasp

The nozzle part
(Never touch it.)
Clean the side surface of the 
head (shown in deep gray) 
with a clean stick.
Clean with a clean stick or a 
waste cloth.

Handle
clasp

Nozzle Wash
• Wash the head nozzle. ( P.4-15)
Nozzle 
Recovery
• Alternative nozzles for printing, when 
nozzles missing can not be improved. 
(P.4-16)
Sub Tank
• Fill the head with ink.
(P.5-4)
Carriage

Screw
Lower part of the right 
side front cover





4-16
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
Clean the wiper and the bracket, and press 
the   key.
(1) Pull out it by holding projections at both ends
of the wiper.
(2) Clean the wiper and bracket with a clean 
stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid  
for maintenance. (ML003-Z-K1:  Cleaning 
Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT)
• Wipe off so that maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance will not remain.
(3) Insert it in the original position by holding the 
projections at both ends of the wiper.
5
Clean the cap rubber , and press the 
 key.
• Wipe off the ink sticking to the cap rubber with a
clean stick dipped in maintenance washing liquid
for maintenance.
• Wipe off so that cleaning solution for maintenance
will not remain.
• At  this  time,  the  discharge  passage  is  cleaned
automatically.
6
Fill up the cap with cleaning solution for 
maintenance, using a dropper.
• Fill the cap with the cleaning solution just before
the solution overflows from the cap.
7
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
8
Press   to set the resting time and 
press the   key.
• When the  resting time  has  passed,  the  machine
absorbs the cleaning solution filled in the cap, and
performs  cleaning.  Then  the  machine  returns  to
the display in step 1.
Nozzle Recovery Function
Nozzle  Recovery:  When  nozzles  missing  can  not  be
improved  at  specific  points,  other  good  nozzles  can  be
used as alternatives for printing.
Print the nozzle pattern
Used  to  print  a  pattern  and  to  check  and/or  register
clogged nozzles.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Nozzle 
Recovery”, and press the   key.
4
Press   key.
5
Press   to select desired head(s) 
(Head Line 1 to 3), and press the   
key.
Projection

• When nozzle missing is not cleared even after this 
washing is carried out several times, contact the 
distributor in your region or our service office.




4-17
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
6
Press   key.
• Printing of the nozzle pattern will start.
• Select  “ENTRY”  then  “Move  to  select  of  the
Nozzle line (Step 5) without drawing a pattern”
7
Select the Nozzle line that needs Nozzle 
Recovery by pressing   , and press 
 key.
8
Register the Nozzle number that needs 
Nozzle Recovery and then press   
key.
(1) Select  the  registration  number  from  1  to  10
by  pressing  [][]  key  and  press  the
[ENTER] key.
(2) Register the nozzle number that needs 
recovery by pressing [][] key and press 
the [ENTER] key.
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310
1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
241
250
261
270
281
290
301
310

Overhead view
L1-1AB
• Set a media of more than 210mm put horizontally. 
If a media with narrow width is set, printing will 
only be conducted to midway.
Nozzle pattern 
L1-1CD L1-2AB L1-2CD
Line 1Line 2Line 3

SELECT NOZZLE
L1- 1 AB
>
>
L1- 1 CD
>
L1- 2 AB
>
L1- 2 CD
>><<
>
＊＊＊＊
Head Line 
(L1 to L3)
Nozzle 
line
Head No. (1 to 4)

Line-1AB
No.1
No.2
16
128
No.3
184
No.4
OFF
No.5
OFF
>><<
Recovery nozzle No.  or OFF
Registration number :  1 to 10

1
10
21
30
41
50
61
70
81
90
101
110
121
130
141
150
161
170
181
190
201
210
221
230
Nozzle miss
No.184
Nozzle
number
Nozzle
missing
Nozzle
missing
No.128
Registration 
number
Recovery 
nozzle No.
State
1 16 Target for nozzle recovery
2 128 Target for nozzle recovery
3 184 Target for nozzle recovery
4 OFF No registration
5 OFF No registration
Example of nozzle to be recovered





4-18
Chapter 4 Maintenance
9
Press   key several times to 
end the setting.
Check the print condition for which 
nozzle recovery cannot be performed
Depending on the nozzle registered, there is the mode not
reflected by “RECOVERY”. Check the unrecoverable print
conditions with the check function.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Nozzle 
Recovery”, and press the   key.
4
Press   to select “Check”,  and 
press the   key.
• The mode for which  nozzle recovery is  invalid is
displayed.
• If there is  no  mode  for  which  nozzle recovery  is
invalid, “NONE” is displayed.
5
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Reset the set value
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Nozzle 
Recovery”, and press the   key.
4
Press   to select “Setup Reset”, 
and press the   key.
5
Press   to select desired head(s) 
(Head Line 1 to 3), and press the   
key.
6
Press   and 
 (<<) 
 
 (>>) 
 
to select the Nozzle line that needs to be 
reset, and  press the   key.
• A reset confirmation message appears.
7
Press   key.
8
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• Up to 10 nozzles can be registered per 1 nozzle 
line.
• Even if you use this function, time required for 
drawing does not change.
• The nozzle recovery may not reflected if printing is 
performed under the following conditions:
• If there are many registered nozzles, it takes time 
to display the check result.
4-colors ink set
Resolution Pass Scan speed
540 x 360 2 pass High speed
720 x 720 4 pass High speed
720 x 1080 6 pass High speed
6-colors ink set
Resolution Pass Scan speed
540 x 360 4 pass High speed
540 x 540 6 pass High speed
720 x 1080 12 pass High speed





4-19
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Automatic Mainte-
nance Function
To  use  this  machine  comfortably,  you  can  set  various
maintenances to be performed automatically.
Here,  set  performing  intervals  of  various  automatic
maintenances.
You  can  prevent  problems  such  as  ink  clogging  by
performing automatic maintenance periodically (automatic
maintenance function).
(Auto maintenance function)
For the Auto Maint. functions, the following items can be
set:
Setting the Refreshing level
For nozzle  clogging prevention, set  the  amount of  some
ink to be discharged from the nozzle.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Auto Maint.”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   key.
• “Refresh” will be selected.
5
Press   to set the refresh level, and 
press the   key.
• Set value: OFF/Lv.1/Lv.2/Lv.3
6
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Setting the Cleaning level
Sets the head cleaning level.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Auto Maint.”, 
and press the   key.
4
Press   to select “Cleaning”, and 
press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Cleaning level”, 
and press the   key.
• Set value : OFF/Lv.1/Lv.2/Lv.3
• When you select OFF, proceed to the Step 7.
6
Press   to select the cleaning type, 
and press the  key.
• Set value: Soft/ Normal/ Hard
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
• When you perform maintenance manually, after 
manual maintenance is completed and when time 
set with the automatic maintenance function has 
passed, maintenance starts automatically.
Function name Descriptions
Refresh Sets the refresh level.
Cleaning Sets the head cleaning level.
• If an ink tank error occurs, the operation set by the 
Automatic Maintenance function is not performed. 
Release the error. ( P.5-12)
• During the execution of automatic maintenance, 
ink flows into the waste ink tank. Check the 
amount of ink in the waste ink tank every day, and 
discard the ink if necessary. ( P.4-21)




4-20
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Charging ink
If auto charging is not possible, or if you want to check the
content  of  the  IC  chip  before  charging  ink,  perform  the
following operation.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
3
Press   to select “Charge Ink”, and 
press the   key.
4
Press   to select the ink tank to be 
charged.
5
Press   key.
6
Insert the IC chip included with the 2 liter 
ink bottle.
• When an IC  chip  is  inserted  into the  printer  and
the  information  on  the  IC  chip  is  loaded,  the
display will change as shown on the right.
• Insert the IC chip  with the  metal part facing rear
side  and  down.  If  you  insert  the  wrong  side  by
accident,  it  causes  faulty  or  damage  of  the  IC
chip.
• Do not touch the metal part of the IC chip. It may
break  the  IC  chip  by  static,  or  may  cause  read
error by stain or flaw.
• If the selected ink tank is near its expiration date, a 
confirmation screen will appear. If OK, press [].
• The selected tank cannot be charged an either of 
the following situations. (P.3-28)
(1) The  volume  of  remaining  ink  managed  by
the printer is 100%.
(2) The  ink  expiration  date  has  passed  by  2
months or more.
Expiration
CHARGEANYWAY?
Displayed alternately
Displayed alternately
Expiration
NO < > YES
Expiration:1MONTH
CHARGEANYWAY?
Expiration:1MONTH
NO < > YES

• If the inserted IC chip is near its expiration date, a 
confirmation screen will appear. If OK, press [].
• If there is a problem with the inserted IC chip and 
you can not charge , the display shows the reason.
• If there are multiple problems, use [][] to scroll 
through them.
Down
Metal part facing 
rear side
CHARGEINK:TANK1-M
PLEASEINSERTINKIC
IC chip inserting 
port

Expiration
CHARGEANYWAY?
Displayed alternately
Displayed alternately
Expiration
NO < > YES
Expiration:1MONTH
CHARGEANYWAY?
Expiration:1MONTH
NO < > YES





4-21
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
7
When the “CHARGE START” confirmation 
screen appears, press   key.
• Charging starts.
• The ink information on the IC chip appears in the
display.
8
When charging is complete, the buzzer will 
sound momentarily and then the screen 
will display the message “Complete Ink 
Charge”.
Replacing the Waste 
Ink Tank
If a Waste Ink Tank Confirmation
Message Appears
Ink used in head cleaning, etc. is stored in the waste ink
tank on  the  lower  right side  of  the machine.  The  sensor
monitors  the  discharged  amount  of  ink  in  this  machine.
When  that  reaches  a  specified  amount,  the  machine
displays  a  confirmation  message.  (When  this  message
is  displayed,  consider  the  replacement  of  the  waste
ink tank.)
Confirmation Message in LOCAL
1
The confirmation message is displayed.
• The following message will be displayed.
“Waste ink near full”
“Waste ink full”
“Waste ink tank none”
2
Check the state of the waste ink tank
Replace the waste ink tank on the right 
side of the machine
In the waste ink tank of the right side of the machine, the
ink and cleaning solution discharged  around the head at
the printing or head cleaning will be accumulated.
When  replacing  the  waste  ink  tank,  please  perform  the
following tasks.
1
Open the waste ink tank cover.
• Remove the screw attaching to the waste ink tank
cover and open the cover to the front.
• While the ink is charging, the screen is displayed 
*Ink Charge*.
Do not remove the IC chip or turn the printer off.
• To check the volume and expiration date of the ink 
that has been charged, press the [ENTER] key in 
Local. (P.3-28)




4-22
Chapter 4 Maintenance
2
Lift the waste ink tank a little.
• Lift the waste ink tank up to the position where it
does not hit the stopper.
3
Take out the waste ink tank.
(1) Hold  the  handle  of  the  waste  ink  tank  and
pull it out to the front.
(2) Raise the waste ink tank and take it out.
• Put a cap on the waste ink tank removed.
4
Replace the waste ink tank.
(1) Prepare a waste ink tank (SPC-0197).
• Prepare a new tank, or use the same waste ink
tank  after  you  have  disposed  of  the  waste  ink
inside.
(2) Hold the handle of the waste ink tank and 
insert it along the rail.
(3) Raise the waste ink tank.
5
Close the waste ink tank cover.
• When the machine recognizes the new waste ink
tank, the warning message is released.
Stopper

Cap
Waste ink

• Request that an industrial waste disposal 
company process the disposal ink.
Rail





4-23
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Discarding the waste ink on the left 
side of machine
In the waste ink tank on the left side of the machine, the
ink and cleaning solution discharged at the flushing will be
accumulated.
When  discarding  the  waste ink  tank,  please  perform the
following tasks.
1
Remove the waste ink tank.
• Pull out the tube inserted into the waste ink tank,
and take out the waste ink tank.
2
Move waste ink to a polyethylene tank.
• Move  waste  ink  pooled  in  the  waste  ink  tank  to
another polyethylene tank.
3
Return the empty waste ink tank to the 
original position.
• Reinsert the tube pulled out.
For  the  operation  limitation  by  the
amount of waste ink
According  to  the  amount  of  waste  ink  that  has
accumulated  in  the  waste  ink  tank,  there  are  items  that
will not be able to operate in this machine.
Discarding waste ink diligently is recommended.
• Discard the waste ink in the waste ink tank every 
day. If left for a long time, the ink in the waste ink 
tank may be cured or overflow.
• When disposing of the waste ink, be sure to wear 
attached goggles and gloves to perform the work. 
Otherwise, you may get ink in your eyes.
• If you get the ink on your skin or in your eyes, 
wash it away with plenty of water immediately.
• When pulling out the tube, ink may drop from the 
tip of the tube. Wipe the tube with waste cloth and 
cover the tip before starting work.
• Request the treatment of waste ink you moved to 
a polyethylene tank for an industrial waste 
disposal contractor.
• A part of the ingredients (photo polymerization 
initiator) has toxicity against aquatic organisms. 
Please prevent leakage flow to natural water 
systems (river, etc.) and domestic sewages (toilet, 
road, etc.)
• Store the plastic container  containing the waste 
ink out of the sun. Otherwise, the waste ink may 
cure.
Waste ink near full
Waste ink full
Waste ink tank none
No
Following operations will 
not be activated.
• Operation using ink
•Print
• Remote transition
• If occurs during print-
ing, transit to local 
after printing comple-
tion
It can be used as they are, 
but waste ink tank would be 
immediately full.
Dispose the waste ink as 
soon as possible.
Dispose of waste ink 
according to regional laws 
and regulations.
Emptying the waste ink 
tank referring to "Replacing 
the Waste Ink Tank" Then, 
please reset the waste ink 
tank.
Dispose of waste ink 
according to regional laws 
and regulations.
Message

Operation restriction

Measures





4-24
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Replacing consum-
ables
Replacing the wiper
The  wiper  is  consumable.  When  the  warning  message
"Replace a WIPER" is displayed, it is necessary to
replace  the  wiper,  immediately  replace  the  wiper  with  a
new one.
Also,  wipe  ink  sticking  to  the  lower  surface  of  the  wiper
cleaner off.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press   to select “Replace Wiper”, 
and press the   key.
3
Press   key.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
• The number of times when the wiper was used is
reset.
4
Open the right maintenance cover then 
remove the wiper.
• Pull out the wiper by holding the protrusions at its
both ends.
5
Insert a new wiper.
• Insert a new wiper by holding its both ends.
• There is no direction to the wipers. They can be
inserted with either side facing forward.
6
Close the lower part of the right side front 
cover, and press the   key.
• After  its  initial  operation,  the  machine  returns  to
Local.
Replacing the HF filter
Replace it once a month.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press  , select [Carriage Out], and 
press the   key twice.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
3
Remove the HF filter cover at the left and 
right of the carriage.
(1) Remove the HF filter cover of right and left of
the carriage.
(2) Pinch the claw attached to the upper part of 
the HF filter cover and pull it to the front.
4
Remove the used HF filter.
• A cleaning wiper (SPA-0193) is an option. Buy one 
through the dealer in your region or at our service 
office.
• Until the replacement work is completed, 
[COMPLETED” is displayed on the screen. After 
the work up to the Step 3 is completed and you 
close the lower part of the right side front cover, 
press the [ENTER] key.
Projection

Carriage

Claw
HF filter cover

HF filter





4-25
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
5
Mount a new HF filter (SPA-0189).
• Insert the holes of right and left of the HF filter into
the convex part of the carriage.
6
Return the HF filter cover to the original 
status.
7
When replacement has been completed, 
press the   key.
Discard the expired ink
If  the  expired  ink  is  continued  to  use,  it  may  cause  a
reduction of print quality and a failure of the machine.
Once  ink  exceeds  its  expiration  date,  please  promptly
exchange it with the following procedure.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>)
.
4
Press   to select “Waste Expired 
ink” and press the   key.
5
Press   to select a discard ink tank 
and press the   key.
• The display it will display a confirmation screen of
discard  the  expired  ink.  Also,  ink  type  and  date
(month and year) will display.
6
If there is no problem on the confirmation 
screen, press the   key.
• This resets the ink charge information embedded
in this machine.
7
Discard the ink in the ink tank selected in 
step 4.
• When  disposing  of  ink,  call  for  service  from  our
company or our distributor.
8
Refer to “Fill ink in the ink tank and 
charging” on P.1-10, and refill with new ink.
• The HF filter is located at right and left of the 
carriage.
Replace both filters at the same time.
• Ink at printing adheres to the HF filter ASSY. When 
replacing the filter, it is recommended to perform 
the work with a sheet of paper placed.
new HF filter

• Be sure to wear the accompanying gloves and 
protective goggles before working. Otherwise, you 
may get ink in your eyes.
• When disposing of ink, call for service from our 
company or our distributor.
• Request that an industrial waste disposal 
company process the disposal ink.




4-26
Chapter 4 Maintenance
Caution in handling of ink
Replacing the Ink Tank
To keep the ink in good quality in the ink tank, you need to
replace  the  ink  tank  annually.  When  an  appropriate
warning message appears, be sure to replace tank in the
following procedure:
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
  (>>)
.
4
Press   to select “Replace Ink 
Tank”, and press the   key.
5
Press   to select a desired ink 
tank, and press the   key.
• The display it will display a confirmation screen of
ink  tank  replacement.  Also,  ink  type  and  date
(month and year) will display.
6
If there is no problem on the confirmation 
screen, press the   key.
• This resets the ink charge information embedded
in this machine.
7
Remove the ink tank cover.
• remove the screws (7 places) that is attached to
the ink tank cover, and remove the cover.
8
Remove the ink tank of the selected slot 
and press the   key.
(1) Press the protrusion on the lid of the ink tank
and remove the lid.
(2) Tilt the ink tank to the front and remove.
• Please  be  careful  not  to  bend  the  tube  by
tilting a tank too far.
(3) Wipe the tube that is attached to the lid with 
the waste cloth etc., put the tube on the 
outside of the balance.
9
Discard the ink in the ink tank selected in 
step 4.
• When  disposing  of  ink,  call  for  service  from  our
company or our distributor.
10
Refer to P.4-28, and perform “Correct by 
the correction method “Normal”” .
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash your 
eyes with a lot of clean running water for at least 
15 minutes. In doing so, also wash the eyes to 
rinse ink away completely. Then, consult a doctor 
as soon as possible.
• Use genuine ink tanks for this machine. This 
machine functions by recognizing the genuine ink 
tanks. In case of troubles caused by modified ink 
tanks or the like, it shall be out of the warranty 
even within the warranty period.
• If the ink bottle is moved from a cold place to a 
warm place, leave it in the room temperature for 
three hours or more before using it.
• Make sure to store ink bottles in a cool and dark 
place.
• Store ink bottles and waste ink tank in a place that 
is out of the reach of children.
• Request an industrial waste processor for 
processing of empty ink bottles.
• Be sure to thoroughly consume the ink in the ink 
bottle, once it is opened, within three months. If an 
extended period of time has passed away after 
opening the ink bottle, printing quality would be 
poor.
• Do not shake ink bottles violently. This may result 
in ink leakage from the ink bottles.
• Do not touch or stain the contacts of the IC chip. 
This may cause damages on printed circuit 
boards.
• Be sure to wear the accompanying gloves and 
protective goggles before working. Otherwise, you 
may get ink in your eyes.
• When disposing of ink, call for service from our 
company or our distributor.
• Request that an industrial waste disposal 
company process the disposal ink.




4-27
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
11
Replace the new ink tank.
• Cover  the  surrounding area  with  waste  cloth  for
protection  against  dirt  before  changing  the  ink
tank.
12
Refer to "Fill ink in the ink tank and 
charging" on P.1-10 and refill with new ink.
Caution in handling of ink
Replacing the ink absorber
Ink absorber  is set under the NCU (Nozzle  Check  Unit).
Ink absorber absorbs the ink to be discharged at the time
of nozzle check, please replace it periodically.
1
Press the   key and press 
 
(MAINT) in LOCAL.
• The Maintenance menu appears.
2
Press  , select [Carriage Out], and 
press the   key twice.
• The carriage moves onto the platen.
3
Open the lower part of the right side front 
cover.
(1) Remove the screws of the right side front
cover (for two positions).
(2) Hold the upper of the lower part of the right 
side front cover and pull it to the front.
• Open the  lower  part  of  the  right  side  front cover
with the supplied screwdriver.
• If you get ink in your eyes, immediately wash your 
eyes with a lot of clean running water for at least 
15 minutes. In doing so, also wash the eyes to 
rinse ink away completely. Then, consult a doctor 
as soon as possible.
• Use genuine ink tanks for this machine. This 
machine functions by recognizing the genuine ink 
tanks. In case of troubles caused by modified ink 
tanks or the like, it shall be out of the warranty 
even within the warranty period.
• If the ink bottle is moved from a cold place to a 
warm place, leave it in the room temperature for 
three hours or more before using it.
• Make sure to store ink bottles in a cool and dark 
place.
• Store ink bottles and waste ink tank in a place that 
is out of the reach of children.
• Request an industrial waste processor for 
processing of empty ink bottles.
• Be sure to thoroughly consume the ink in the ink 
bottle, once it is opened, within three months. If an 
extended period of time has passed away after 
opening the ink bottle, printing quality would be 
poor.
• Do not shake ink bottles violently. This may result 
in ink leakage from the ink bottles.
• Do not touch or stain the contacts of the IC chip. 
This may cause damages on printed circuit 
boards.
Tools required for Replacement
• Clean stick (SPC-0527)
• Gloves • Goggles
• Be sure to wear the attached goggles and gloves 
when replacing the ink absorber. Otherwise, you 
may get ink in your eyes.
• The ink contains organic solvent. If you get the ink 
on your skin or in your eyes, wash it away with 
plenty of water immediately.
Carriage

Screw
Lower part of the right 
side front cover





4-28
Chapter 4 Maintenance
4
Replace the ink absorber.
• Pull out the  knob at the bottom of the NCU, and
replace the ink absorber.
5
Close the front cover.
6
Press   key.
• The screen returns to step1.
7
Press   key several times to end 
the setting.
Tank Calibration
This machine manages the remaining amount of ink with
the weight balance that is built in the external ink supply
unit.
If there is a difference between the remaining amount  of
ink displayed on the upper part of external ink supply unit
and  the  actual  ink  remaining  amount,  or  when  the  error
message “INKTNK SENS”  has occurred, please perform
the following tasks.
Method for correcting the weight 
balance
There  are  two  types  of  correction  method for  the  weight
balance.
Correct by the correction method 
“Normal”
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>)
.
4
Press   to select “Tank 
Calibration”, and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Normal”, and 
press the   key.
6
Press   to select an ink tank (slot 1 
To 8) to be corrected, and press the 
 key.
7
Remove the ink tank cover.
• remove the screws (7 places) that is attached to
the ink tank cover, and remove the cover.
Normal
Using a 1kg wight, you can correct in high 
accuracy.
Adjust 
Zero 
Pos.
You can correct without using a weight.
The correction work is carried out easily but less 
accurate than the adjustment in the “Normal”.




4-29
4
2
Chapter 4 Maintenance
8
Remove the ink tank of the selected slot 
and press the   key.
(1) Press the protrusion on the lid of the ink tank
and remove the lid.
(2) Tilt the ink tank to the front and remove.
• Please  be  careful  not  to  bend  the  tube  by
tilting a tank too far.
(3) Wipe the tube that is attached to the lid with 
the waste cloth etc., put the tube on the 
outside of the balance.
9
Place the 1kg weight on the dish of the 
balance of selected slot and press the 
 key.
• Process the correction.
10
When the correction processing is finished 
successfully, remove all the weights on the 
dish of the balance and press the   
key.
• Perform  the  correction  processing  without  the
weight on the balance.
11
When the correction processing is finished 
successfully, set the ink tank that was 
removed in step 8 and press the   
key.
Correct by the correction method 
“Adjust Zero Pos.”
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in LOCAL.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
3
Press the 
 (>>)
.
4
Press   to select “Tank 
Calibration”, and press the   key.
5
Press   to select “Adjust Zero 
Pos.” and press the   key.
6
Press   to select an ink tank (slot 1 
To 8) to be corrected, and press the 
 key.
7
Remove the ink tank of the selected slot 
and press the   key.
• Perform  the  correction  processing  without  the
weight on the balance.
8
When the correction processing is finished 
successfully, set the ink tank that was 
removed in step 7 and press the   
key.
• Please put the weight in the center of the dish of 
the balance.
If you put weight on the edge of the dish, it will 
cause to increase the error of the remaining 
amount detection.
• During the correction process, please do not give 
vibration to the external ink supply unit. There is a 
possibility to fail the correction process.
• When the correction process fails, “Failed” will be 
shown on the display. Press the [ENTER] or [END] 
key, and change the position or the load of the 
weight.
Weight

• During the correction process, please do not give 
vibration to the external ink supply unit. There is a 
possibility to fail the correction process.
• When the correction process fails, “Failed” will be 
shown on the display. Press the [ENTER] or [END] 
key to clear the error display and press again the 
[ENTER] key. It will resume the correction 
processing.
• During the correction process, please do not give 
vibration to the external ink supply unit. There is a 
possibility to fail the correction process.
• When the correction process fails, “Failed” will be 
shown on the display. Press the [ENTER] or [END] 
key to clear the error display and press again the 
[ENTER] key. It will resume the correction 
processing.




4-30
Chapter 4 Maintenance




This chapter
describes the corrective measures to be taken for a phenomenon suspected to be trou-
ble and the procedures to clear the error number displayed on the LCD.
Troubleshooting................................................................................5-2
Power does not turn on ....................................................................5-2
The machine does not start printing .................................................5-2
The temperature of the heater does not rise to the set value...........5-2
Media gets jammed / media is soiled ...............................................5-3
Image quality is poor ........................................................................5-3
Nozzle is clogged .............................................................................5-3
Ink tank warning appears .................................................................5-4
In case of ink leakage.......................................................................5-4
If an error related to the Sub Tank occurs (Error 618 to 61b)...........5-4
When media heaves up at feeding ...................................................5-4
Warning / Error Messages................................................................5-5
Warning messages...........................................................................5-5
Error messages ..............................................................................5-12
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting




Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5-2
Troubleshooting
Take appropriate actions as described below before taking the trouble as a failure. If still the problem is not solved after
troubleshooting, contact your dealer or an office of MIMAKI.
Power does not turn on
In most cases, this is due to improper connection of the power cable for the machine or computer. Check that the power
cable is connected properly.
The machine does not start printing
This occurs when the data is not being transmitted to the machine properly.
It can also occur when the printing function does not work properly or the media is not set correctly.
The temperature of the heater does not rise to the set value
Has the power cable been connected 
between the machine and a power plug 
socket?
Securely connect the power cable.
Is the main switch ON? Turn on the main switch. ( P.2-3)
Is the power button located on the front of 
machine "ON"?
Turn on the power button on the front of the 
machine.( P.2-3)
Is the correct interface cable used? Use the cable exclusive for the device.
Is the interface cable properly connected? Securely connect the interface cable.
Yes
Is the message on the display indicating 
that INKEND?
Add ink to the ink tank, and perform ink charge. 
( P.1-10)
Did you set the heater temperature? Set the heater temperature. ( P.3-8)
Yes
Is "Remote" or "Local" set to "ON" in the 
color fixation device?
Set the heater temperature from the operation 
panel of the color fixation device. ( P.2-20)
No

No

No

No

No

Yes

No

No





Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
5-3
1
2
2
2
5
Media gets jammed / media is soiled
Media jamming or stained media is considered to be due to the use of an unsuitable media or improper setting of media.
 If the media gets clogged, perform the work below:
Image quality is poor
This section  describes  the corrective actions  to be taken in case the image quality is not satisfactory. Take remedy for
particular problems with image quality. If the remedy does not work, contact your dealer or an office of MIMAKI.
Nozzle is clogged
When nozzle missing is not dissolved even after the head cleaning referring to P.2-34, make sure the following operations.
 Maintenance the sub tank by the operations of P.5-4
 Wash the head nozzle by the operations of P.4-15.
 Recovery the nozzle by the operations of P.4-16.
Is a recommended media used? Use recommended media.
Is the media not curled or bent ends? Avoid using any media with curls or bent ends.
Yes
Is the height of the head proper?
Adjust the distance between the media and the 
head will be 1.5 mm to 2 mm. ( P.2-6)
Yes
Is the media hanging down along the platen? 
Use a take-up device ( P.2-7) or re-load the 
media on the machine. ( P.2-9)
Open the front cover and raise the 
clamp lever.
Remove the clogged media. Close the front cover.
Phenomenon Measures
White lines / blur / dark stripes (in the direc-
tion of travel of the heads)
(1) Execute the head cleaning. P.2-34
(2) Perform maintenance of the inside of the station. P.4-10
(3) Execute the [MEDIA COMP.] function.  P.2-35
(4) If any pieces of paper or dust is attached on the path of the heads such
as media press, remove it.
Characters are double- or triple-printed in 
the media feed direction
(1) Execute the [MEDIA COMP.] function. (  P.2-35)
Disagreement in print positions between 
outward trip and homeward trip 
(1) Execute the [DROP POSITION] function.  ( P.2-36)
Ink drops falling on media during printing
(1) Execute the wiper cleaning. (  P.4-10)
(2) Execute the ink cap cleaning.  
( P.4-10)
(3) Clean around the head. 
( P.4-14)
(4) Execute the head cleaning [Normal]. ( P.2-34)
(5) Set a shorter interval of Interval Wiping operation. 
( P.3-15)
No

No

No

No





5-4
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Ink tank warning appears
If  an  ink  tank  trouble  is  detected,  a  warning  message
appears.
None of printing, cleaning and all the other operations that
use ink is available.
If  an  abnormality  occurs,  perform  the  following
procedures:
• Check the ink amount in the ink tank and if the ink amount
is not enough, add ink.
Displaying the description of ink bottle 
trouble
The  contents  of  ink  bottle  error  are  confirmable  by  the
following operations.
1
Press the   key in Local.
In case of ink leakage
In  case  of  ink  leakage,  please  turn  off  the  main  power
switch,  unplug  the  power  plug,  and  contact  our  service
office or distributor.
If  an  error  related  to  the  Sub  Tank
occurs (Error 618 to 61b)
The Error 618 to 61b are related to the sub tank.
Execute  following  procedures  when  an  error  about  sub
tank  occurs,  or  when  the  nozzle  is  not  unclogged  after
cleaning.
1
Press the 
 (MENU) 
in Local.
2
Press   to select “Maintenance” 
and press the   key.
• Maintenance menu appears.
3
Press   to select “Sub Tank”, and 
press the   key.
4
Press   key.
• Discharge the ink in the sub tank, and charge ink
into the tank.
When media heaves up at feeding
We call the status of heaving media at feeding “cockling”.
When media cockling occurs, check the following items:
• Once ink tank trouble is displayed, do not leave 
the ink bottle without replacing it for a long time; 
otherwise, the machine will lose the nozzle 
missing prevention function.
If nozzles are clogged, the machine must be 
repaired by MIMAKI's service engineer.
Sb310-4
1. M 90%
EXPIRATION 2MONTH
2. C 80%
No Error
3.
Y
80%
No Error
4.
K
80%
No Error

Note/ checking 
items
Measures
Checking media 
set status
(1) Check  that  the  media  is  set
straight and reset it.
Media feeding
(1) For roll media, feed the media by
about tens of centimeters  to one
meter.
(2) For  leaf  media,  press  [][]
and perform feed/ back feed.
Do not leave the 
media in the 
heater warming 
status
(1) Do  not  start  printing  with  the
media  cockled  because  it  may
cause media jam.
Heighten the 
head
(1) For  the  thick  media,  make  the
head gap higher before printing.




5-5
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
Warning / Error Messages
If some trouble occurs, the buzzer sounds and the display shows a corresponding error message.
Take an appropriate remedy for the displayed error.
Warning messages
Errors when performing operations
Errors when the printer stops due to an emergency
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 901
INVALID OPERATION
Operation error
• Return  to  the  LOCAL  screen,  check  the
error status, and take appropriate actions.
ERROR 902
DATA REMAIN
There remains received data that has not 
yet been printed.
• Execute the data clear function.
(P.2-37)
ERROR 90d
NO HEAD SELECT
Executed the processing without selecting 
a head.
• Select the head. ( P.3-20)
ERROR 90f
PRINT AREA SHORT
The media is not wide or long enough for 
printing.
• Replace  the  media  with  one  having
enough width or length.
• If the media width is decreased because
the origin is moved, shift the origin to the
right  to  increase  the  effective  media
width.
ERROR 912
INVALID INK CHARGE
Cannot ink charge by the following factors.
• Detected  an  abnormality  of  the  informa-
tion of the IC chip.
• The  expiration  date  for  the  ink  has
passed.
• The charged ink level is nearly full, so ink
cannot be charged.
• The  expiration  date  for  the  ink  tank  has
passed.
• Please  run  the  ink  charge  ( P.1-10)
again.  If  you  still  cannot  charge,  please
check the cause that cannot be charged
with  P.3-28"Displaying  the Information  of
this machine"
Message Cause Measures
Close the cover. The cover is open.
• Close the cover. ( P.ix)
• When  [ENTER]  is  displayed  on  the
screen, press the   key. Recov-
ery operations begin.
• When the machine cannot recover, or the
cover is already closed and the message
is still displayed, turn off the main power
to  the  machine  and  turn  it  on  after  a
while.  If  the  same  error  message
appears, contact our service desk or your
local distributor to call for service.
MEDIA JAM A media jam is occurred.
• Remove the clogged media. ( P.5-3)
• When  [ENTER]  is  displayed  on  the
screen, press the   key. Recov-
ery operations begin.
• When the machine cannot recover, or the
cover is already closed and the message
is still displayed, turn off the main power
to  the  machine  and  turn  it  on  after  a
while.  If  the  same  error  message
appears, contact our service desk or your
local distributor to call for service.




5-6
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Errors when ink charging is performed
Release the emergency switch.
The emergency switch has been pressed.
• Release the emergency switch.
(P.1-14)
• When  [ENTER]  is  displayed  on  the
screen, press the   key. Recov-
ery operations begin.
• When the machine cannot recover, or the
cover is already closed and the message
is still displayed, turn off the main power
to  the  machine  and  turn  it  on  after  a
while.  If  the  same  error  message
appears, contact our service desk or your
local distributor to call for service.
Close the cover.
Release the emergency switch.
The cover is open.
Or, the emergency switch has been 
pressed.
• Close the cover. ( P.ix)
• Release the emergency switch.
(P.1-14)
• When  [ENTER]  is  displayed  on  the
screen, press the   key. Recov-
ery operations begin.
• When the machine cannot recover, or the
cover is already closed and the message
is still displayed, turn off the main power
to  the  machine  and  turn  it  on  after  a
while.  If  the  same  error  message
appears, contact our service desk or your
local distributor to call for service.
(Clamp lever OFF) Clamp lever is raised.
• Push down the clamp lever.
(P.1-3)
• When  [ENTER]  is  displayed  on  the
screen, press the   key. Recov-
ery operations begin.
• When the machine cannot recover, or the
cover is already closed and the message
is still displayed, turn off the main power
to  the  machine  and  turn  it  on  after  a
while.  If  the  same  error  message
appears, contact our service desk or your
local distributor to call for service.
Message Cause Measures
INK IC Expiration
CHARGE ANYWAY?
NO < > YES
The expiration date for the inserted IC chip 
has passed.
• Change the ink bottle with a new one.
• Select [YES] to continue to use the ink.
IC Expiration:1MONTH
CHARGE ANYWAY?
NO < > YES
The expiration date of the inserted IC chip 
has passed (one month has passed after 
the specified expiration date).
IC Expiration:2MONTH
INVALID INK CHARGE
The expiration date of the inserted IC chip 
has passed (two months have passed after 
the specified expiration date).
• Charging is impossible. Insert the IC chip
of the ink bottle which has not passed its
expiration date.
• If the error occurs on the ink which is still
in  its  expiration  date,  check  the  time  of
this machine.
WRONG INK IC
INVALID INK CHARGE
The IC chip cannot be read normally.
• Remove the IC chip generating the warn-
ing once and install it again.
• If  the  same  warning  message  still
appears, contact  your  local distributor to
call for service.
INK TYPE
INVALID INK CHARGE
An IC chip that has already been charged 
was inserted.
• Install the new IC chip.
Message Cause Measures




5-7
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
INK TYPE
INVALID INK CHARGE
The type of ink on the inserted IC chip is 
different from the ink in the bottle.
• Check the type of ink on both the IC chip
and the ink bottle.
• Check the color of the ink bottle.
Ink color
INVALID INK CHARGE
The color of ink on the inserted IC chip is 
different from the ink in the bottle.
• Check the type of ink on both the IC chip
and the ink bottle.
• Check the color of the ink bottle.
Expiration
CHARGE ANYWAY?
NO < > YES
The expiration date for the ink has passed.
• P.4-25After discarding the ink in the tank
in  “Discard the expired ink”, please
charge ink. ( P.1-10)
• Select [YES] to continue to use the ink.
Expiration:1MONTH
CHARGE ANYWAY?
NO < > YES
The expiration date for the ink has passed.
(1 month from the expiration date)
Expiration:2MONTH
INVALID INK CHARGE
The expiration date for the ink has passed.
(2 month from the expiration date)
• It cannot be used as it is.
P.4-25After discarding the ink in the tank
in  “Discard the expired ink”, please
charge ink. ( P.1-10)
FULL CHARGE INK
INVALID INK CHARGE
The charged ink amount remains more 
than a 3 litter. Ink charging is impossible.
• Try again after consuming the ink.
Replace Ink Tank
CHARGE ANYWAY?
NO < > YES
Exceeded the expiration date of the ink 
tank which is intended to charge.
• Please discard  the  ink in the  tank in  the
first P.4-25 “Discard the expired ink”. After
that,  replace  it  with  a  new  ink  tank,  and
charge ink. ( P.1-10)
• Select [YES] to continue to use the ink.
Message Cause Measures




5-8
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Message displayed in LOCAL
Message Cause Measures
INK ERROR
An ink error occurred.
• Check  the  ink  bottle  for  the  supply  path
corresponding to the indicated color.
InkOverflow : MMBBYYKK
Ink has entered the air tank.
• Perform  “SUBTANK”  of  the  mainte-
nance. ( P.5-4)
Even if you perform, it may be displayed,
contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
TANKlevelH : MMBBYYKK
The sub tank sensor High does not change 
though a certain amount of ink has been 
consumed.
TANKlevelL : MMBBYYKK
The sub tank sensor Low does not change 
though a certain amount of ink has been 
consumed.
SUPPLY INK : MMBBYYKK
Ink could not be supplied to the subtank.
• Perform  “SUBTANK”  of  the  mainte-
nance. ( P.5-4)
Also make  sure  the  ink remaining  in the
ink bottle. ( P.1-10)
Even if you perform, it may be displayed,
contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
REPLACE INKTANK : MMBBYYKK
Time to replace the ink tank of the dis-
played color
(A certain period has passed since the start 
of use of the ink tank.)
• Perform “Replace Ink Tank” of the main-
tenance. ( P.4-26)
• The ink charge information is also reset.
After  replacing  the  ink  tank,  charge  the
new IC chip and refill ink. ( P.1-10)
Take-UP CoverOPEN
Detected a cover open of the media take-
up device.
• Close the cover.
Tak e-U P W RON G
An abnormality occurred in the take-up sta-
tus of the media take-up machine.
• Check if the media setting is set to ROLL
when the take-up device is not used.
• Check  if  the  taking-up  direction  switch
and the  taking-up manual switch  are  set
correctly.
(P.2-15)
• Check that the media is set on the media
take-up machine correctly.
• Turn ON and OFF the manual switch, and
raise the tension bar to a correct position.
• Feed the media in the jog operation in the
direction reverse to that used at the time
when the error occurred.
Take-UP LimitDETECT
The control limit sensor of the media take-
up machine was detected.
• Check if the media can be fed correctly in
the jog operation.
• Lower  the  position  of  the  tension  bar  at
the take-up side.
Even if you lower the position, if the same
message is displayed, contact a distribu-
tor  in  your  district,  our  office  or  our  call
center.
Feeding WRONG
An abnormality occurred in the feeding sta-
tus of the media feeding machine.
• Check if the media setting is set to ROLL
when the feeding device is not used.
• Check  if  the  taking-up  direction  switch
and  the  feeding  manual  switch  are  set
correctly.
• Check that the media is set on the media
feeding machine correctly.
• Turn ON and OFF the manual switch, and
raise the tension bar to a correct position.
• Feed the media in the jog operation in the
direction reverse to that used at the time
when the error occurred.




5-9
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
Feeding LimitDETECT
The control limit sensor of the media feed-
ing machine was detected.
• Check if the media can be fed correctly in
the jog operation.
• Lower  the  position  of  the  tension  bar  at
the feeding side.
Even if you lower the position, if the same
message is displayed, contact a distribu-
tor  in  your  district,  our  office  or  our  call
center.
NCU SENSOR LEVEL LOW The NCU sensor sensitivity is falling.
• Replacement  of  the  NCU  is  recom-
mended.
• Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local
distributor to call for service.
Nozzle Missing
Print Stopped
Because the nozzle check found nozzles 
missing, printing was stopped.
• Check  the  nozzle  condition.  If  there  is
plenty  of  deflection  and/or  nozzle  miss-
ing,  clean  and  restore  the  affected  noz-
zles. ( P.2-34)
If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
• The nozzle condition can be checked on
the local guidance screen. ( P.3-28)
NCU FLUSH POS
Nozzle check OFF
Because an NCU-related error occurred 
during nozzle check, printing was stopped 
and the nozzle check function was turned 
OFF.
• Check  the  nozzle  condition.  If  there  is
plenty  of  deflection  and/or  nozzle  miss-
ing,  clean  and  restore  the  affected  noz-
zles. ( P.2-34)
If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
NCU CENTER POS
Nozzle check OFF
NCU SN ADJST
Nozzle check OFF
NCU NZK CHK (HW)
Nozzle check OFF
NCU NZK CHK (MARK)
Nozzle check OFF
NCU CONNECT
The NCU unit is not connected.
The nozzle check function cannot be used.
• Turn  off  the  main  power to  the  machine
and turn it on after a while.
If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
REPLACE NCU
The NCU sensor sensitivity is too low to 
correctly judge nozzle missing.
The nozzle check function cannot be used.
• NCU replacement is necessary.
Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local
distributor to call for service.
REPLACE NCU INK PAD The NCU ink pad is full.
• It  is  necessary  to  replace  the  NCU  ink
pad.
Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local
distributor to call for service.
NCU ERROR
Nozzle check OFF
Because an NCU-related error occurred 
during nozzle check, printing was stopped 
and the nozzle check function was turned 
OFF.
• Check  the  nozzle  condition.  If  there  is
plenty  of  deflection  and/or  nozzle  miss-
ing,  clean  and  restore  the  affected  noz-
zles. ( P.2-34)
If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
REPLACE WIPER
Time to replace the wiper on the capping 
station
(The number of times of wiping has 
reached a specified value.)
• Perform [Replace Wiper] in [Station], and
replace the wiper. ( P.4-24)
** NO MEDIA **
Media is not set, or failure of the media 
sensor.
• After setting the media, please lower the
clamp lever.
If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
Message Cause Measures




5-10
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
DATA REMAIN Data was received.
• Execute the data clear function.
(P.2-37)
Restart if the error message remains after
the execution of the data clear.
MACHINE TEMP./H ***°C The machine is hot.
• Use cooling equipment to lower the room
temperature to a specified range.
• Wait until the machine cools down.
• If the same error message remains after
the  machine  is  left  at  a  specified  room
temperature for  an  enough time, contact
our service  desk or your  local distributor
to call for service.
MACHINE TEMP./L ***°C
The machine is cold.
• Use  a  heating  system  to  raise the  room
temperature to a specified range.
• Wait until the machine warms up.
• If the same error message remains after
the  machine  is  left  at  a  specified  room
temperature for  an  enough time, contact
our service  desk or your  local distributor
to call for service.
MACHINE TEMP./H ***°C
The heads are hot.
• Use cooling equipment to lower the room
temperature to a specified range.
• Wait until the machine cools down.
• If the same error message remains after
the  machine  is  left  at  a  specified  room
temperature for  an  enough time, contact
our service  desk or your  local distributor
to call for service.
Flushing BOX Power [Z] 
Failed to detect the origin for the flushing 
BOX.
• Turn  off  the  main  power to  the  machine
and  turn  it  on  after  a  while.  If  the  same
error message appears,  contact our  ser-
vice  desk  or  your  local  distributor  to call
for service.
Flushing BOX Power [Y] 
The flushing BOX is not set in the correct 
position.
•   Set  the  flushing  BOX  is  in  the  correct
position, and fasten the clasp.
Color  fixation  device  -  Abnormal  con-
nection
The color fixation device is not connected. 
• Check  that  the  color  fixation  device  is
turned on.
• Check  the  connection  for  the  color  fixa-
tion device.
• Turn  off  the  main  power to  the  machine
and  turn  it  on  after  a  while.  If  the  same
error message appears,  contact our  ser-
vice  desk  or  your  local  distributor  to call
for service.
Message Cause Measures




5-11
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
Ink Error
Ink error is displayed also in the local guidance. ( P.3-28)
Message Cause Measures
Ink tank - Unavailable
The ink tank is not set on the external ink 
supply unit.
• Set  the  ink  tank  on  the  ink  slot  with  the
warning.
Ink End No ink that can be used.
• Since the available ink has run out, it will
not  be  able  to  use  such  as  a  print  or
cleaning.
• P.3-28Check  the  ink  that  has  occurred
warning in the  “Displaying the Informa-
tion  of  this  machine”,  and  remove  the
cause.
Ink Near END The ink in the ink tank is low.
• Since the available ink has run out, it will
not  be  able  to  use  such  as  a  print  or
cleaning soon.
• Check the ink that has occurred warning
in  the  “Displaying the  Information  of  this
machine  (P.3-28)”,  and  remove  the
cause.
Expiration The expiration date for the ink has passed.
• The expiration date has passed.
However, you  can use  it until the end  of
the following month.
• If  you  want  to  replace it  with a  new  ink,
please  perform  the  “Discard  the  expired
ink (P.4-25)”.
Expiration: 1 MONTH
The expiration date for the ink has passed.
(1 month from the expiration date)
• One month has  passed after the expira-
tion date.
However, you  can use  it until the end  of
this month. (The ink bottle lamp blinks in
red.)
• If  you  want  to  replace it  with a  new  ink,
please  perform  the  “Discard  the  expired
ink (P.4-25)”.
Expiration: 2 MONTH
The expiration date for the ink has passed.
(2 month from the expiration date)
• Two  months have passed after the  expi-
ration date.
• If  you  want  to  replace it  with a  new  ink,
please  perform  the  “Discard  the  expired
ink (P.4-25)”.
Tank End
The ink in the ink tank has run out.
(remaining less than 300cc)
• Please  shirttail  the  ink  to  the  ink  tank
warning is occurring.
(P.1-10)
Tank Near End
The ink in the ink tank is low.
(remaining less than 400cc)
Charge Near End
The remaining amount of ink charged in 
this machine is low.
• Charge the ink into the ink tank which the
warning occurred.
(P.1-10)
Charge End
The ink remaining in the printer has 
reached zero.
AD VAL Error
Abnormality occurs in the weight balance 
of the supply unit.
• Ink tank problems Please make sure that
the weight is set correctly to the ink tank,
do  not  apply  shocks,  and  do  not  place
heavy objects on the ink tank..
• Please  execute  the  “Tank  Calibration
(P.4-28)”.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.




5-12
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
Error messages
When an error message is displayed, eliminate the error according to the chart below.
If the same error message appears again, contact your dealer or an office of MIMAKI to call for service.
Message Cause Measures
ERROR 04
PARAM ROM
The PCB is defective.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR d0b
HD CONNECT [23456789ABC]
Abnormal connection of the print head
ERROR d0c
HD THERMIS [23456789ABC]
Abnormal connection of the print head
ERROR d1b
B MEMORY [123456789ABC]
The print head has been broken.
ERROR 108
HD TYPE    [123    ]
ERROR 122
CHECK : SDRAM  [123    ]
Not found PRAM board.
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO OVER
Control circuit board is defective.
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO UNDER
ERROR 128
BATTERY EXCHANGE
The battery life end of the internal clock is 
detected.
• Contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
ERROR 12a
HDC SPEED [123  ]
Ink discharge control error
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 12a
HEAD ROM WR
Head control error
ERROR 12e
HeadFaild /HDC[**]
The print head has been broken.
ERROR 130
HD DATA SEQ
Control circuit board is defective.
ERROR 148
E-LOG SEQ
ERROR 151
Main PCB V1R2
An error occurred in the main power.
ERROR 152
Main PCB V2R5
ERROR 153
Main PCB V3R3
ERROR 154
Main PCB V05
ERROR 155
Main PCB V36-1
ERROR 156
Main PCB V5B
ERROR 157
Main PCB VTT
ERROR 158
Main PCB V36-2
ERROR 15F
HEAD DRIVE HOT
The temperature abnormality of control cir-
cuit board has been detected.
ERROR 16e
Main PCB V3R3B
An error occurred in the main power.
ERROR 171
NEW HEAD CONNECT
Connection of a new head was recognized.




5-13
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
ERROR 186
HDC OVERFLOW [123  ]
Ink discharge control error
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 186
HDC UNDERFLOW [123  ]
ERROR 187
HDC SLEW RATE [123  ]
ERROR 188
HDC MEMORY [123  ]
ERROR 18a
Main PCB V_CORE
An error occurred in the main power.
ERROR 18b
Main PCB V1R5B
ERROR 18c
Main PCB V12
ERROR 18e
FLS NOT COMP [12  ]
Ink discharge control error
ERROR 18f
OFFSET START [12  ]
ERROR 18f
OFFSET END [123  ]
ERROR 19d
HDC V36 [12  ]
Abnormal ink discharge voltage was 
detected.
ERROR 201
COMMAND
Abnormal communication between PC and 
printer
Media end
• Check the USB cable/ LAN cable connec-
tion. Use a USB cable/ LAN cable con-
forming to the standard.
ERROR 202
PARAMETER
ERROR 203
Ment Command
ERROR 206
PRINTING MODE
• Check the USB cable/ LAN cable connec-
tion. Use a USB cable/ LAN cable con-
forming to the standard.
• Check output conditions.
ERROR 304
USB INIT ERR
USB device error.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 305
USB TIME OUT
ERROR 306
USB GET DESC
ERROR 401
MOTOR X
An excessive load was applied to the X 
motor.
ERROR 402
MOTOR Y
An excessive load was applied to the Y 
motor.
ERROR 403
X CURRENT
An error due to an excessive current of the 
X motor was detected.
ERROR 404
Y CURRENT
An error due to an excessive current of the 
Y motor was detected.
ERROR 41B
** NO MEDIA **
Media end
• Set  the  media  to  cover  over  the  media
sensors.
ERROR 423
TAKE-UP TENSION-BAR
The media set check detected abnormality 
of the take-up tension bar at the start of 
printing.
• Check  the  media  set  condition,  and
remove any problem.
ERROR 424
FEEDING TENSION-BAR
The media set check detected abnormality 
of the feeding tension bar at the start of 
printing.
Message Cause Measures




5-14
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
ERROR 425
Take- UP   W R ONG
An abnormality occurred in the take-up sta-
tus of the media take-up machine.
• Check if the media setting is set to ROLL
when the take-up device is not used.
• Check  if  the  taking-up  direction  switch
and the  taking-up manual switch  are  set
correctly.
• Check that the media is set on the media
take-up machine correctly.
• Check that the paper core used for media
take-up is not rotating freely.
• Turn ON and OFF the manual switch, and
raise the tension bar to a correct position.
• Feed the media in the jog operation in the
direction reverse to that used at the time
when the error occurred.
ERROR 426
Feeding WRONG
An abnormality occurred in the feeding sta-
tus of the media feeding machine.
• Check if the media setting is set to ROLL
when the feeding device is not used.
• Check  if  the  taking-up  direction  switch
and  the  feeding  manual  switch  are  set
correctly.
• Check that the media is set on the media
feeding machine correctly.
• Check that the paper core used for media
feeding is not rotating freely.
• Turn ON and OFF the manual switch, and
raise the tension bar to a correct position.
• Feed the media in the jog operation in the
direction reverse to that used at the time
when the error occurred.
ERROR 427
Take-UP Cover OPEN
The cover open of take-up device was 
detected.
• Close the cover.
ERROR 428
Feeding Cover OPEN
The cover open of feeding device was 
detected.
ERROR 429
Take-UP LimitDETECT
The control limit sensor of the media take-
up machine was detected.
• Check if the media can be fed correctly in
the jog operation.
• Lower  the  position  of  the  tension  bar  at
the take-up side.
ERROR 42A
Feeding LimitDETECT
The control limit sensor of the media feed-
ing machine was detected.
• Check if the media can be fed correctly in
the jog operation.
• Lower  the  position  of  the  tension  bar  at
the feeding side.
ERROR 42b
Take-UP Bar Shelter
The take-up tension bar has been 
retracted.
• Please lower the take-up tension bar.
The tension bar has not been retracted 
when media cut or etc.
• Please retract the take-up tension bar.
ERROR 42b
Feeding Bar Shelter
The feeding tension bar has been 
retracted.
• Please lower the feeding tension bar.
ERROR 432
Take-UP Connect
Take-up device connection destination 
error
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 433
Feeding Connect
Feeding device connection destination 
error
ERROR 436
Take-UP Fuse Err
Take-up fuse blown
ERROR 437
Feeding Fuse Err
Feeding fuse blown
ERROR 442
Take-UP Unit None
Take-up device missing
ERROR 443
Feeding Unit None
Feeding device missing
Message Cause Measures




5-15
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
ERROR 44d
STATION POS ERR
An abnormality occurred in the station 
position.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 453
Take-UP Direction
The take-up direction of the media that has 
been set in the media take-up device is not 
made to the specifications recommended 
(face-out winding).
• Please make the face-in winding direction
of the media.
ERROR 468
Feed MTR ERR
An abnormality occurred in the feeding 
motor.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 469
Take MTR ERR
An abnormality occurred in the take-up 
motor.
ERROR 505
MEDIA JAM
A media jam is occurred.
• Remove  the  jammed  media,  please  re-
set the media.
ERROR 50a
Y ORIGIN
Y-origin could not be detected.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 50c
MEDIA WIDTH SENSOR
The media width has not been detected 
correctly.
• Check the media set position.
ERROR 50f
L-SCALE BLACK
Abnormal linear scale.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 516
MEDIA SET POSITION R
The media is set outside the proper area. • Check the media set position.
ERROR 516
MEDIA SET POSITION L
ERROR 531
INK TNK SENS :12345678
Abnormality has occurred in the balance of 
the ink supply unit.
• Please make  sure  that  the  weight  is  set
correctly  to  the  ink  tank,  do  not  apply
shocks,  and  do  not  place  heavy  objects
on the ink tank..
• Please  execute  the  “Tank  Calibration
(P.4-28)”.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 539
Calibration :12345678
Abnormality has occurred in the data of the 
weight balance of the ink supply unit.
• Please  execute  the  “Tank  Calibration
(P.4-28)”.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 53a
Flushing BOX Flushing [Z]
Failed to detect the origin for the flushing 
BOX.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 53b
Flushing BOX Origin [Y] 
The flushing BOX is not set in the correct 
position.
• Set  the  flushing  BOX  is  in  the  correct
position, and fasten the clasp.
ERROR 607
CAP CLEANING
Time to clean the cap
• Perform  the  station  maintenance,  and
clean the cap.
Message Cause Measures




5-16
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
ERROR 617
Subtank Sens :12345678
Detect the abnormality in the liquid level 
sensor of the sub-tank.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 618
TANKlevelH  :12345678
The sub tank sensor High does not change 
though a certain amount of ink has been 
consumed.
• Perform  “SUBTANK”  of  the  mainte-
nance. ( P.5-4)
• Even if you perform, it may be displayed,
contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
ERROR 619
TANKlevelL :12345678
The sub tank sensor Low does not change 
though a certain amount of ink has been 
consumed.
ERROR 61a
InkOverflow :12345678
Subtank sensor Limit detected.
ERROR 61b
SUPPLY INK  :12345678
Ink could not be supplied to the subtank.
• Perform  “SUBTANK”  of  the  mainte-
nance. ( P.5-4)
Also make  sure  the  ink remaining  in the
ink bottle. ( P.1-10)
• Even if you perform, it may be displayed,
contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
ERROR 627
Ink Tank Set
There is a slot which is not set an ink tank 
in supply unit for more than certain period 
of time.
• Set the ink tank.
ERROR 637
INK LEAK [12345]
Detected an ink leakage in the ink supply 
path.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, turn off the main power, disconnect
the  power  cable,  and  then  contact  your
local distributor to call for service.
ERROR 647
WRONG CHARGE DATA[12345]
Abnormality occurs in the data of the ink 
information being charged.
• Cannot print.
Contact  your  local  distributor  to  call  for
service.
ERROR 64b
Nozzle Missing
The automatic nozzle check judged noz-
zles “No good ”.
• Check  the  nozzle  condition.  If  there  is
plenty  of  deflection  and/or  nozzle  miss-
ing,  clean  and  restore  the  affected  noz-
zles. ( P.2-34)
• If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
ERROR 64c
NCU ERROR
Printing stopped because an error 
occurred during the nozzle check.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 652
NCU NZK CHK (HW)
The NCU cannot correctly recognize the 
ink discharge, because there are frequent 
nozzle missing and ink droplet misalign-
ment.
• Check  the  nozzle  condition.  If  there  is
plenty  of  deflection  and/or  nozzle  miss-
ing,  clean  and  restore  the  affected  noz-
zles. ( P.2-34)
• If the same error message appears, con-
tact our service desk or your local distrib-
utor to call for service.
ERROR 653
NCU NZK CHK (MARK)
ERROR 654
NCU CENTER POS
Adjustment of the discharge position to the 
NCU has failed.
ERROR 655
NCU FLUSH POS
ERROR 657
REPLACE NCU INK PAD
The NCU ink pat is full.
• Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local
distributor to call for service.
ERROR 658
NCU SENSOR LV LOW
The NCU sensor sensitivity is falling.
• Replacement  of  the  NCU  is  recom-
mended.
• Contact  our  service  desk  or  your  local
distributor to call for service.
Message Cause Measures




5-17
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
ERROR 65d
Overflow tank: 12
Ink has entered the air tank.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 702
THERMISTOR
The thermistor sensor of a heater is defec-
tive.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 707
!HD HEATER BREAK
A head heater is disconnected.
ERROR 710
HEATER TEMP ERROR
An abnormal temperature of the heater 
was detected.
If the problem is not resolved after the 
occurrence of this error, the power to the 
machine is forced OFF.
ERROR 7**
High head temperature
The head temperature has exceeded 38℃.
• Use cooling equipment to lower the room
temperature to a specified range.
• If the same error message remains after
the  machine  is  left  at  a  specified  room
temperature for  an  enough time, contact
our service  desk or your  local distributor
to call for service.
ERROR 731
Fixing Machine ERROR
An error has occurred in the color fixation 
device.
• Clear  the  error  that  has  occurred  in  the
color fixation device.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR 732
E.HEATER CONNECT
Cannot confirm that the color fixation 
device is connected.
• Disconnect  and  then  reconnect  the
cables between the printer and the color
fixation device.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR d01
HCB POWER [123456789ABC]
An error occurred in the power supply of 
the HCB PCB.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
ERROR d02
HCB COMMON [123456789ABC]
An error was detected in the HCB PCB.
ERROR d03
HCB HARD [123456789ABC]
ERROR d04
HCB CMD [123456789ABC]
Operation instructions to the HCB PCB 
failed.
ERROR d05
HCB WFM [123456789ABC]
An error was detected in the waveform 
being printed.
ERROR d06
HCB VUP [123456789ABC]
A failure to update the HCB PCB was 
detected.
ERROR d0b
HD CONNECT[123456789ABC]
Print head connection error.
ERROR d0c
HD THERMIS[123456789ABC]
Print head temperature error.
ERROR d14
HCB FAN[123456789ABC]
Function error of HCB2 fan
ERROR d15
HD MEMORY[123456789ABC]
Abnormal data in the head memory
ERROR d16
HCB UKNWN[123456789ABC]
Undefined error code occurs.
ERROR d17
HCB BUSY[123456789ABC]
No reply from HCB2
Message Cause Measures




5-18
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
SYSTEM HALT
Reason and corrective measure for the error of color fixation device
ERROR E01
Fixing Machine Com
Failed to communicate with the color fixa-
tion device.
• Disconnect  and  then  reconnect  the
cables between the printer and the color
fixation device.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
Message Measures
SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 :MESSAGE
• Turn off the main power to the machine and turn it on after a while.
Check the number and contact your local distributor to call for service.
(“000” is the error No.)
Message Cause Measures
SSR 1~8 It lights in red with the AC input error.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
BLOWER1 It lights in red with the inverter error. • Press the [RES] key to remove the error.
BLOWER2
It lights in red when stopped during the 
blower movement order.
• Press the [RES] key to remove the error.
TEMPERATUBE It lights in red with the temperature error.
• Check if the media got loose in the heater
furnace or it works correctly.
• Press down  the [RES]  key  to cancel  the
error after a while and turn the heater on.
PRINTER_EMR
When the emergency switch on the printer 
side is pressed,
It turns red on when the heater emergency 
switch is pressed in [MAINTE].
• Release  the  emergency  switch  after
avoiding  a  danger  and  press  the  [RES]
key.
HEATER_EMR
It lights in red when the heater emergency 
switch is pressed.(Except in [MAINTE])
• Release  the  emergency  switch  after
avoiding  a  danger  and  press  the  [RES]
key.
THERMOSTAT It lights in red with the temperature error.
• Check if the media got loose in the heater
furnace or it works correctly.
• Press down  the [RES]  key  to cancel  the
error after a while and turn the heater on.
COVER OP HI TEMP
It lights in red when the heater furnace is 
open in the state of high temperature.
• Accessing  the  heater  furnace  must  be
done when it is cooled down.
• Press the [RES] key to remove the error.
COVER OPEN
It lights in red when the heater furnace is 
open.
• Close the heater furnace.
HT TIMEOUT
It lights in red when the heater is left with 
being turned on.
• Turn it off when not using the heater.
Message Cause Measures




5-19
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
List of PLC error messages for color fixation device - HW error
FILTER CLEANING It lights in red at the time of filter cleaning.
• Set  the  [Filter  Cleaning  Timer]  to  [CLR]
after completing the filter cleaning.
FILTER REPLACE It lights in red at the time of filter replacing.
•Set the [Filter Replace Timer] to [CLR]
after completing the filter replacement.
Ext ERR
It lights in red when stopped by external 
input.
• Cancel the cause  that stopped  by exter-
nal input.
• Press the [RES] key to remove the error.
SD CARD ERR It lights in red with the SD card error.
• Turn off the power button to the machine
and turn it on after a while.
• If  the  same  error  message  appears
again, contact your local distributor to call
for service.
VERSION ERR
It lights in red when a version of touch 
panel is incongruous with the main body.
PLC BATT ERR
It lights in red with the abnormality of the 
PLC backup battery.
TEMP CTRL1/2 ERR
It lights in red with the abnormality of the 
temperature adjuster.
Message Cause Measures
– Earth leakage.
• Use a tester to measure the resistance
between the heater and body.
–
Abnormal current on the drive side of the 
heater.
• Use  a  tester  to  measure  the  interphase
resistance of the heater.
“TimeOutError”
is displayed every 15  seconds at
the lower left
Communication between the touch panel 
and main PLC unit cannot be established.
1. Make  sure  that  the communication  wir-
ing between the PLC and touch panel is
connected.
2. Check  for any  errors  in the LCD  of  the
PLC.
Message Cause Measures




5-20
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
List of PLC error messages for color fixation device - FW error
Message Cause Measures
733:HT[E101]HT1_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater1 1. Use  a  tester  to  confirm  that  the  input
voltage is not too low.
2. Check  the  interphase  resistance  of  the
SSR to confirm that the heater wiring is
disconnected.
3. Check the wiring between the SSR and
heater to  confirm  that  the heater  wiring
is disconnected.
• Be sure to turn the main power off before
checking the components as described in
steps 1 and 2.
• To reset any errors, turn the main power
off first, and then turn it back on.
733:HT[E102]HT2_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater2
733:HT[E103]HT3_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater3
733:HT[E104]HT4_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater4
733:HT[E105]HT5_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater5
733:HT[E106]HT6_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater6
733:HT[E107]HT7_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater7
733:HT[E108]HT8_DISCONNECT
Wiring disconnection detected in heater8
733:HT[E111]HT1_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater1 1. Use  a  tester  to  confirm  that  the  input
voltage is not too high.
2. Check  the  interphase  resistance  of  the
SSR  to  confirm  the  short  circuit  in  the
heater.
3. Check the wiring between the SSR and
heater to confirm the short circuit in the
heater.
• Be sure to turn the main power off before
checking the components as described in
steps 2 and 3.
• To reset any errors, turn the main power
off first, and then turn it back on.
733:HT[E112]HT2_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater2
733:HT[E113]HT3_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater3
733:HT[E114]HT4_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater4
733:HT[E115]HT5_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater5
733:HT[E116]HT6_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater6
733:HT[E117]HT7_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater7
733:HT[E118]HT8_OVERCURRENT
Overcurrent detected in heater8
733:HT[E121]SSR1_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR1
1. Use a tester to check the input and out-
put of the SSR.
2. If the resistance value between the input
and output indicates a short  circuit, the
SSR is malfunctioning and needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to turn the main power off before
checking the components as described in
steps 1 and 2.
• To reset any errors, turn the main power
off first, and then turn it back on.
733:HT[E122]SSR2_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR2
733:HT[E123]SSR3_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR3
733:HT[E124]SSR4_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR4
733:HT[E125]SSR5_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR5
733:HT[E126]SSR6_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR6
733:HT[E127]SSR7_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR7
733:HT[E128]SSR8_SHORT Short circuit detected in SSR8
733:HT[E128]POWER_CT_ERR Power controller error
• Use  the  methods  for  confirming  heater
wiring  disconnections,  heater  overcur-
rent,  and  short  circuits  in  the  SSR  to
search for any abnormalities.
733:HT[E128]ZERO_CROS_ERR
Zero cross error detected in G3ZA
Pinpoint the cause of the error.
1. Check  for  any  SSR  errors,  emergency
stops, or thermostat errors.
2. Check for any momentary power cuts or
similar problems.
• If you did not discover any errors follow-
ing the steps described above, check the
wiring and replace the G3ZA.
• In case of any errors, turn the main power
off first, and then turn it back on.




5-21
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting
1
2
2
2
5
List of PLC error messages for color fixation device - Warning
Message Cause Measures
73C:FIL[D001]FILTER_REPLASE
The filter has been used for more than 
2000 hours since it was replaced.
• Reset the filter time after replacing the fil-
ter.
73C:FIL[D002]FILTER_CLEANING
The filter has been used for more than 300 
hours since it was cleaned.
• Reset the time after cleaning the filter.
734:INV[E131]RESPONSE_ERR
The inverter did not respond to the opera-
tion command.
• Check  the  wiring  between  the  PLC  and
inverter.
734:INV[E132]OPERATION_ERR Inverter error
• Check for any errors in the blower opera-
tion,  and  make  sure  nothing  is  blocking
the rotation of the blower.
734:INV[E133]BROWER_STOP
The blower stopped while the heater was 
in operation.
735:EMR[E141]PRINTER_EMR
• The emergency button on the printer side
was pressed.
• The emergency button was pressed while
the MC was switched off.
• Remove  the  cause  of  the  emergency
stop, release the emergency button, and
then press the reset button on the touch
panel.
735:EMR[E142]HEATER_EMR
The emergency button was pressed while 
the MC was switched on.
736:COV[E151]COVER_OPEN The cover was opened or is still open. • Close the cover.
736:COV[E152]COVER_ERR
The cover was opened when the tempera-
ture inside the furnace was high, or is still 
open.
1. Close the cover.
2. Press  the  reset  button  on  the  touch
panel.
737:TMP[E161]THERMOSTAT_ERR
Temperature error
1. Make sure that the sensor is connected
correctly.
2. Check  the  operation  of  the  external
exhaust blower.
737:TMP[E162]TEMP_ABNL
• The temperature inside the furnace or the
temperature  on  the  media  surface  rose
abnormally (220°C or higher).
• There  is  a  large  disparity  between  the
thermocouple and non-contact thermom-
eter (100°C or more).
1. Make sure that the connector of the sen-
sor is properly attached.
2. Make sure that the sensor is not dirty or
damaged.
3. Make sure that the sensor is connected
correctly.
738:TIM[E171]HEATER_TIMOUT The heater was left on. • Turn the heater on again.
739:PLC[E181]PLC_BATT_ERR The backup battery of the PLC is depleted. • Replace the PLC battery.
739:PLC[E182]PLC_SD_ERR
No SD card is inserted into the PLC, or 
there is a problem with the SD card.
1. Confirm that the cover of the SD card is
not open.
2. Make sure that the SD card is inserted.
3. Replace the SD card (SDHC 32GB).
739:PLC[E183]PLC_VER_ERR
The program versions of the PLC and 
touch panel do not match.
• Update the program versions of the touch
panel and main PLC unit simultaneously.
73A:COM[E191]CNT_COM_ERR
A communication error has occurred 
between the PLC and temperature control-
ler.
• Make  sure  that  the  connection  wiring  is
properly connected.
73A:COM[E192]PNT_COM_ERR
The communication from the printer was 
interrupted in the remote control mode.
• Make sure that the printer communication
cable is not disconnected.
73A:COM[E193]CNT_COM_ERR2
A communication error has occurred 
between the PLC and temperature control-
ler.
• Make  sure  that  the  connection  wiring  is
properly connected.
73B:CNT[E200]CNT_ERR1 Unit 1 device error A
• Make sure that the temperature controller
and G3ZA are properly connected.
73B:CNT[E220]CNT_ERR2 Unit 2 device error A




5-22
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting




This chapter
contains the lists of the specifications and functions of this machine.
Specifications ...................................................................................6-2
Machine specifications .....................................................................6-2
Ink specifications ..............................................................................6-3
Supply item list .................................................................................6-4
Sheet for inquiry ...............................................................................6-5
Chapter 6
Appendix




Chapter 6 Appendix
6-2
Specifications
Machine specifications
Item Specifications
Print head
Method Drop-on-demand piezoelectric print heads
Specifications 12 heads: In line head x 3-layered staggered arrangement
Drawing mode 
(scan x feed)
4-color ink set 
*1
540x360: Bi/Uni 2/ 3/ 4 pass
570x720: Bi/Uni 4/ 6/ 9 pass 
720x720:Bi/Uni 4/ 6/ 9 pass 
720x1080:Bi/Uni 6/ 9/ 12 pass
6-color ink set
540x360:Bi/Uni 4/ 6/ 9 pass (only normal mode)
540x540:Bi/Uni 6/ 9/ 12 pass 
720x720:Bi/Uni 9/ 12/ 15 pass 
720x1080:Bi/Uni 12/ 15/ 18 pass
Usable inks Sb320 ink (M,B,Y,K,Lm,Lb), Non-deaeration, 2 liter bottle
Ink tank supply Expansion system
Capacity of ink tank
3L/1 tank (UISS connection for Lb and Lm only for 4 colors or 6 colors, on car-
riage deaeration)
Media type Preprocessed polyester material
Max. printing width 3290 mm (129.5 in)
Roll Media size
Maximum 3300 mm (129.9 in)
Minimum 297 mm (11.7 in) 
*2
Thickness 1.0 mm or less (0.039 in or less)
Roll outside diame-
ter
When using take-up unit and feeding unit : Φ300 mm or less (Φ11.8 in or less)
Roll weight 
*3
When using feeding unit: 130 kg or less (286 lb or less)
Roll inside diameter When using take-up unit and feeding unit: 3 inches
Printing surface Involuted and revoluted
Roll end treatment
The roll end is gently fixed to the core with weak-adhesive tape or weak glue for 
easy removal.
Leaf media size
Maximum 3290 mm (129.5 in)
Minimum 297 mm (11.7 in)
Margin
Leaf media
Left end and right end : 15.0 mm (Default)  Front : 150 mm  Rear : 400 mm 
*4 *5 *6
Left end and right end : 0.59 in (Default)  Front : 5.9 in  Rear : 15.7 in
 *4 *5 *6
Roll media
Left end and right end : 15.0 mm (Default)  Front : 150 mm  Rear : 0 mm
 *4 *5 *6
Left end and right end : 0.59 in (Default)  Front : 5.9 in  Rear : 0 in
 *4 *5 *6
Distance accuracy Reproducibility
Whichever the larger one of ± 0.2 mm (0.007 in) or ± 0.1 % of the designated 
*4
 
*7
 
*8
Perpendicularity ± 0.5 mm / 1000 mm 
*4 
*7
 (± 0.01 in / 39.4 in)
 *4 
*7
Media skew 5 mm or less / 10 m 
*4 
*7
 (0.19 in or less / 393.7 in) 
*4 
*7
Head height adjustment
1.5 to 7.0 mm (0.06 in to 0.28 in) pitch user settings (media thickness auto measured)
Media delivery
Take-up device supplied as a standard accessory (switching possible between 
face in and face out 
*9
).
Waste ink tank Tank type (3.6 liters), FULL detection, bottle installation detection
Interface USB 2.0, Ethernet 1000BASE-T 
*10
Command MRL-IV
Noise
during standby Less than 58 dB (FAST-A, Front & Rear & Left & Right 1 m)
during continuous 
printing
Less than 65 dB
during discontinu-
ous printing
Less than 77 dB 
*11
Power
Main printer unit: Single phase AC200 - 240V ±10%, 50/60Hz ±1Hz, 29A or less
In line color fixation device: Three phase AC200V ±10%, 50/60 Hz ±1 Hz, 125A 
or less




Chapter 6 Appendix
6-3
6
Ink specifications
Power consumption
Main printer unit: 7 kW or less
In line color fixation device: 50 kW or less (at 200V)
Recommended 
Environment
Available temp. 20 °C~30 °C (68°F~86°F)
Humidity 35 to 65% Rh (No condensation)
Guaranteed temp. 20 °C~ 25 °C (68°F~77°F)
Temperature 
change
± 10 °C / h or less (± 50 °F / h or less)
Dust 0.15mg/m
3
 (Equivalent to normal office level)
Highest operation 
height
2,000 m (6,561.7 ft)
Weight
- Machine: 1430 kg (3,152.6 lb)
- Color fixation device + VT take-up device: 960 kg (2116 lb)
- External supply: 30 kg (66.1 lb)
- Electrical unit of color fixation device: 140 kg (308.6 lb)
Outside dimensions
- Combined: 5620 mm (W) x 3050 mm (D) x 1820 mm (H)
                     (221.3 in x 120.1 in x 71.7 in)
   Machine: 5620 mm (W) x 1800mm (D) x 1820 mm (H)
                   (221.3 in x 70.9 in x 71.7 in)
   
Color fixation device + VT take-up device: 4300 mm (W) x 2000 mm (D) x 1040 mm (H)
                                                                      (169.3 in x 78.7 in x 40.9 in)
External supply: 960 mm (W) x 510 mm (D) x 730 mm (H)
                           (37.8 in x 20.1 in x 28.7 in)
Electrical unit of color fixation device: 910mm (W) x 600 mm (D) x 1240 mm (H)
                                                             (35.8 in x 23.6 in x 48.8 in)
*1. Bold is the recommended pass.
*2. Print speed may decrease depending on the conditions.
*3. Without deflection of the roll when it is retained at both ends.
*4. The initial meandering of the media which is just set is excluded.
*5. Left and right margins can be changed.
*6. Error of ±2 mm
*7. The expansion and/or contraction of media is excluded.
*8. Only if all the following conditions are met:
The media is set in the center of the machine.
When roll holders are used, printing is started on a roll having no deflection.
The take-up device is used.
Roll media is used. One roll media is used. (except for twin rolls)
*9. “Involuted” for the media take-up direction is recommended.
*10. Directly connect the machine to a PC with a LAN cable.
*11. 76.9dB(A)  operation conditions:  Fast scan (in accordance with paragraph 1.7.4.2 of the Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC)
Item Specifications
Supply 2L Ink bottle
Color
Black ink
Blue ink
Magenta ink
Yellow ink
Light blue ink
Light magenta ink
Ink capacity 2 liter
Shelf life
The period is printed on the ink bottle.
Within three months after opening the package even in the available period.
Storage tempera-
ture
Storage 5 to 30˚C (41 to 86˚F)
Transportation
1 to 60˚C (33.8 to 140˚F)
(Storage at temperature of 60˚C (140 ˚F) is only permitted within 120 hours, and 
at temperature of 40˚C (104 ˚F) is permitted within a month.)
• Do not disassemble the ink bottle.
• Ink could freeze if kept in a cold place for an extended period.
• If the ink freezes, thaw it at room temperature (25°C) spending more than three hours before use. However, when you 
use the frozen ink, the printing quality becomes degraded due to altered ink. Store ink in the environment where ink may 
not freeze.
Item Specifications




Chapter 6 Appendix
6-4
Supply item list
Product No. Name
SPA-0188 Maintenance kit
SPA-0189 HF filter replacement kit
SPA-0190 Mist airflow fan filter replacement kit
SPA-0193 Wiper kit
SPA-0196 Ink supply filter replacement kit
SPA-0197 Waste ink tank SL (Package)
ML003-Z-K1 Cleaning Liquid 03 MAINTENANCE KIT
SPC-0813 Flushing box absorber replacement kit
SPC-0814 NCU ink absorber replacement kit
SPC-0284 3L ink tank cap
SPC-0285 3L ink tank




Chapter 6 Appendix
6-5
6
Sheet for inquiry
Use this sheet for troubles and abnormal functions of the machine.
Fill in the following necessary items, and fax the sheet to our sales office.
Company name
Person in charge
Telephone number
machine model
Operating OS
Machine information
*1
*1. Refer to "Confirming Machine information" of "?About Information menu?" then fill in necessary information. ( P.3-27)
Error message
Contents of inquiry




Chapter 6 Appendix
6-6




Tx500P-3200DS Operation Manual
May, 2017
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2182-3 Shigeno-otsu, Tomi-shi, Nagano 389-0512 JAPAN
D203118-13-11052017




©2016 MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD
MM
FW : 2.00

Manuale d`uso Mimaki serie JV300

web.
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.
URL: http://eng.mimaki.co.jp/
D202681-13
.................................................................................. v
............................................................ v
R .............................................................................................. v
FCC (USA) ................................................................... v
Interfere
................................................... v
!" ........................................................................................ v
#............................................................................. v
$"
................................................................... v
Precau
..........................................................................vi
S"# ............................................................................................... vi
nterlock ............................................................................viii
"
...................................................................ix
%&%'*+ .............................................. xi
C 1 "
.................................................................. 1-2
"
........................................................... 1-2
",*"#
................................................ 1-2
4,"
....................................................................... 1-2
N",5
.................................................... 1-3
!5
"
.............................................................. 1-3
Re"
......................................... 1-4
!
, ............................................................................... 1-5
4
,5........................................................................... 1-7
Carr............................................................................................ 1-7
"utter , ........................................ 1-7
4
,, ............................................................................... 1-7
5,*"
......................................... 1-7
Co ...................................................................... 1-8
Co,*
5 USB2.0 .......................................... 1-8
Co"
........................................................ 1-8
Ins*
........................................................ 1-9
C""
*
......................................... 1-10
M ......................................................................................... 1-10
"
# ..................................................................... 1-10
!
"
" ............................ 1-10
M="
............................................................................ 1-11
C 2
4$
,........................................................................... 2-2
>,
"
...................................................... 2-3
"
....................................................................... 2-3
4,
"
..................................................................... 2-3
i
"," ...................................................................2-4
*............................................................. 2-4
",##
........................................................................... 2-5
,,"
....................................................... 2-9
",
5........................................................................... 2-10
C"#*
", ....................................................... 2-11
Prepar...........................................................2-11
C"#",
",............ 2-11
Test ", ............................................................................2-12
Test ", ................................................................................. 2-12
! ........................................................................2-13
,........................................................................ 2-13
,
",,... 2-13
",
5................................................2-13
",
5 .................................................... 2-13
4,
,
,
............................................2-14
", .............................................................................2-14
,
", ....................................................... 2-14
",", ......................................................... 2-15
%
(Data Clear) .............................................. 2-15
" ......................................................................... 2-15
C 3
+SETUP ...................................................................3-2
#+SETUP ................................................................. 3-3
",
5 ...................................................... 3-4
4,
,
,
................................................. 3-4
", 4%............................................................ 3-5
",Logical Seek...................................................................... 3-5
",", ...................................................... 3-6
","
................................................... 3-6
",
,
.................................................... 3-6
",="
................................................ 3-7
",,"........................................................... 3-7
",*
, ............................................ 3-7
+%%&..................................................3-8
#+%%& .............................................. 3-9
",,
"
+% ........................................ 3-10
",*
="
.................................................. 3-10
",,?5"
........................................... 3-10
",+ ..................................................................... 3-10
",*................................................................................ 3-11
",*
=(Temperatu/ L
) ..................................... 3-11
",4%+4%................................................... 3-11
",CONF ................................... 3-11
", ............................................................................... 3-12
Iniializ",
................................................................ 3-12
ii
+,%+ ................................ 3-13
#+'................................................. 3-13
""
", ............................................ 3-14
,
",
“+"
” ,
...................................................................................... 3-14
",
",................................................... 3-15
",%+!+.................................................. 3-15
",
............................................ 3-15
+'.................................................... 3-16
#+'................................................. 3-17
@
5"
.............................................................. 3-17
C 4
Ma
Ma
.............................................................................. 4-2
Precau
"
................................................ 4-2
$,....................................................................4-2
!,5
.......................................................... 4-2
!, ........................................................................... 4-2
!
" ............................................................ 4-3
!," ............................................................. 4-3
++..................................................... 4-4
!
"++......................................... 4-5
Ma
,,
............................................ 4-6
!,,,......................................................... 4-6
!*................................................................. 4-7
*
................................................ 4-8
G
"
,
,....................... 4-9
!,
.......................... 4-11
,
..................................................................... 4-12
Res",............................................................ 4-13
'
"
" ....................................... 4-13
",
55"
........................................ 4-13
",
,# ................................. 4-14
",
, ....................................... 4-14
",*
.................................................................... 4-14
*
#
............................................. 4-15
4
"#.......................................................... 4-16
%"#,........................................................................ 4-16
4,,"#,*
........ 4-16
4#,*
,""
5".................................................................. 4-18
4".......................................................... 4-18
iii
C 5
,#".........................................................................5-2
,
.............................................................. 5-2
"
", .................................................. 5-2
"
>"H
.................................... 5-2
",
",..... 5-3
4H$=*""
..................................................... 5-3
*H ........................................................................... 5-3
,,*,*
....................................... 5-4
>*..........................................................5-5
"
................................................................... 5-5
*............................................................................... 5-9
C 6
Appendi
Specific...............................................................................6-2
4,5"
................................................................. 6-2
4,5,*
................................................................. 6-3
",
,
.............6-4
",*
*
..................................... 6-4
5"
.....................................................6-5
iv
$77(1=,21(
3UHPHVVD
Congratul
,*$ MIMAKI color ink jet
printer "JV300-130/160" .
“JV300-130/160” H
color inkjet printer ,*",
!4!!4J ,,1.9m
(4-color, 6-colo 8+%4%[email protected]+4%+
color) #"(4-color6-color)Q
4!44!%%%K*
""
high quality.
+QV444++
%[email protected]+4+%+
AKK4!4K*4%
A%+%+!J
$
[email protected]@%444%V
!
#$ (SS21) %+%4V4*4!4K!
#" (Sb53).
!%Q%%4G+
%[email protected]%
G+44!
• !,
#, 5 P.6-3 “4,5
” P.6-4 “",*
J
”.
!"#
R$
• G"
H
"
,,,J
",5"
, ,"
J
#
55,$
• $"
,
"J
#
,
""
$
FCC (USA)
GH
5"",J
Class A, 5" Part15 " FCC
G"
,,5
,
5
$
*H
"#
""G
Q,X
"
5$
Y
J
"
$"
Q,X
5
"
.
*$
*
,X
5
,$*
,
,,,
"
MIMAKI
J
,$,Q,##,"#
"'%%.
!XQH
*"
MIMAJ
V,"
$,
&
• G"
5
"
"
"Color inkjet printer JV300-130/
160" (
""
)
• "
",
,,
"
,"
"
.
• $"
",,"
,
.
• G"
H
"
,H
5",
,$
#
55.
• $"
"5J
,,#""
• $"
#Q
#,,
*,"
Q
J
55
.
• *,#
,*"
"
_#
Inter%
,
$"
5$
J
*
!X
5
"
"
5
J
",,
,
H
$
$
,J
.
*
5
,
,X5J
c,
*
5
Q,"J
,[
"
.
• C"#*
"
*
*,,
5
,,
• *,,5
,.
*"
,"
.
• "
,
J All Rights Reserved.Copyright
$*,,#
© 2014 MIMAKI ENGINEERING Co., Ltd.
.
v
Preca
PrecaX]LRQL
S
$"
,
*
,,#
,"#H
*"#
5
J
"
,5
J
"
E
"
,
$
s"#,##"
person
"
,
"
J
.
"
,
$
s"#,##
,
da
",
,
"J
$"#%",
J
5
,
5"
$"#J
%5$
5"
,,J
"
"
Indica,
5"
,
.
"#"
" indic
"
"
%+(inclu DANGER WARNING
). +
"#
,
{"#
,|
,,
"# "
" indi*
HJ
.+
"#
*
,,
.
"#"
" indiH"
*
instru
+
"#
*J
,,,
.
• +$
=
,X
$"J
+
Q,
.
• '
Q",J
,4,,
,
Q
Q,#J
#",
.
• ,
"
"#
J
"
$"
*
"#
Q,X,
Q
"5
"
.
• 4"
H
"Q$
*"
5"Q
,
J
,J
"""
"
s,
%
"
",[
5". !
#
*55
%&,
,
• N
,""
$
H
",.
• N
"
""*
=,
,J
"
*
4"
r",X,
"
.
• '
,,
J
!,,
J
.
• ,
!
.
•
",
","J
,
. !
J
.
• ,,
,4,J
5
• "
,
+"
,X
%
,
• ,
"
#
!X
• 55,
$
,
"Q
"4
cQ,##
,
1
2
3
• "
,,
• 4,
"
,,"
$Q$
"
Q
,
#,
!"*
%
"
"
,X,J
.
4
• ,?
5""#
*
"
!X
ele.
•
"Q,
Q#*$Q
J
$"$",
"
*
"
Q
H,"
,$,
,##5
"
5
6
vi
Precau
Precau
"**
• C
,
,J
=.
• !,*
1 2, ##.
• ! [email protected]%,,
"
,
H5
.
• 4,"
,,
"
Q"
}
*
. %~
.
• "
$
J
t
,
J
• C
,"
capacit=,"
4
,[
,
Q
breaker. If you plug more than one power cord
,##
",
.
• L*
ON.
•
,
*
,
,J
"
.
• $,55"
J
,
.
• ,5
5"
"
$
H,
"**
$
• *
5""#
Q"
#
$
"
*
• 4
*
Q"J
""
##
$,,
"
15 minut.*
","
!
"
,[,.
• 4$
#*
,Q5J
$"#
"
,"
"
!
""
{MSDS|.
• 4
",
"Q
J
immediat"
*5
$. !
","
,#.
• %
*
,#"#
.
• 4*
,Q
*##
J
$
=$,
,"
*
,.
vii
Note • G
,
*
J
Q
,
.
• 5
"
J
G
Q$
,$
"
.
• 5"$
cutter. !5"
.
• 4,
"
J
,",$
,"
.
' NOTE
"**
$
• "
,,,
J
*
$
!
"
Q*
• N
*
*
#
.
,
,#"
RICOH "
,
#=,
*.
• 4*
,
5J
Q","#
,
,[,"
• ,*
,"
.
4"
,,
,Q
",J
","
,X
• %
*
5#.
• %
*
#*
J
,#"#
.
• %
"*
Q
,Q
"4"
,,
,Q
$
=",=
.
• N
,
"
,
,*
.
• "
,
d
",.
• Consul#
,
""
*
.
4"Q,"J
"
5
,
• *
#
,"
",.
$
• N
,",
H.
,,Q
",",.
Prote
• %
,,
#4,,
",,
55.
•G
#"
J
Q
##
.
Precau
P
• ,"
,J
"
,
,
4,
#,
J
.
+
%
+$
• Consult,,
,
""
"
"
Q
J
*
,""
5
"**
• U,,
MIMAKI,
",55#high-quality.
• ",",
J
,, (Model
,)
",",Pre-, ,",,J
,
,,*",
"
",,X",
,5
!!",!Q55"
"
RIP.
• '
*,
"
,,#,*"#
,,,X
","#
*J
"=Q,$,X,
,,
","#
, 30 minut
o,[,""#
• ,,,.
,,,,
,,
$=",.
S,
,,Q",Q,",
",4
,,,
"
"J
,Q,
*
• ,,.
!*
*
.
1
!**%
- !*$
/
%
2
• Us"
"#
:
• "#
,:
20 30 °C
(68 86 °F)
35 65 % (Rh)
3
Prote
• %
,,
#4,,
,X
55.
• G
#"
J
Q
,,##
!##",
,.
Not
• 4
"
,
.
• ,
$
"
",
"
Q,,X"
.
• ,
,X
5*
su,,*",
",
$Q
, (
P.4-11)
• G
,
*
Q
Q$
*
J
QH
,
• !(r",,) ,
,,,
nterlock
G"
H5
‚,"
*,
,$
,
,
",{,
5$|
4
5
6
viii
$
(WLFKHWWHGLDYYHUWLPHQWR
4"
,,#,
,*",
"
4
*#"HQ$
,#
07
$%
07
$
ix
$
N.
R
1
M910931
2
M907833
$
1
3
M903239
4
M903330
5
M903405
6
M906144
7
M907935
2
3
4
8
M905811
9
M906031
5
6
x
$
89"'
%
,
,
H
5"$#
,.
Pro
Inkjet Printer
Model N„V300-160
JV300-130
!
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2182-3, Shigeno-otsu, Tomi, Nagano,
389-0512, JAPAN
,#
+
MIMAKI EUROPE B.V.
Stammerdijk 7E 1112 AA Diemen,
The Netherlands
Dire
Machinery Directive2006/42/EC
Low Voltage Directive2014/35/EU
EMC Directive2014/30/EU
RoHS Directive2011/65/EU
5"=,$,
H
,
"
(TCF) $,H
,,,.
"
/ K
ENISO12100:2010, EN60204-1:
2006+A1,EN60950-1:
2006+A11+A1+A12
EMC EN55022:2010, EN61000-3-2:
2006+A1+A2, EN61000-3-3:2008, EN55024:2010
RoHS EN50581:2012
xi
C 1
0
descri,,,",
Q"
",
,,
"
"
.................................... 1-2
"
..................... 1-2
",*"#
......... 1-2
4,"
.................................. 1-2
N",5
...................... 1-3
!5
"
....................... 1-3
Re"
... 1-4
!
,........................................ 1-5
4
,5...................................... 1-7
Carr ...................................................... 1-7
"
,..... 1-7
4
,, ......................................... 1-7
5,*"
... 1-7
Co........................................ 1-8
Co,*
5 USB2.0 ....1-8
Co"
.................1-8
Inser*
..................... 1-9
C""
*
..1-10
M ....................................................... 1-10
"
#................................1-10
!
...................1-10
M="
.............................................. 1-11
C 1 ,QVWDOODUHODPDFFKLQD
+
$
4,"
,$
H
","
.
$
!""
"
Q
,J
55
,*
#"
• 4,"
,
,"
Q
#
4"Q,
5
#
,J
"
.
"
,
,,
",
Model!
*$
%/
:
JV300-130
2525mm
700mm
1392mm
170kg
JV300-160
2775mm
700mm
1392mm
200kg
• ,"
Q5
5,
• #,,
mac
.
1
R
$
.
2
+
$%*
.
3
Rein
$
.
500 mm or more
35
377 25 mm
5 m or
m o mo
r m re (1
ore 30
(13 mo
0 m del)
ode
l)
ore
or m
mm
0
0
10
re
r mo
mo
m
0
100
ore
or m
m
0m
270
500 mm or more
• !Q*,
†,
,[.
• ,
,,,"
,H
,##",
U$"
"#
2030°C,
e
",55#
1-2
C1 NRPHGHOOHSDUWLHIXQ]LRQL
%
$
$;
)
$
,,,"
"
H,
Q
,
,,,""Q,
,"
,,
,,,"
J
*
"
H,
Q
$
,
$
color,5.
C
$
5
"
,
*
{4*
.)
!**(front)
M5[,
r5.
Carr
4,*
=",
*
1
4$,
,
, "
,?,
,"",Q
ec.
2
+
*
Inser
.
2
+
$
*
$#
P
"",5
p.
S*
S
,,
,"
*
5
,,
"
.
2
$
(%
)
,,,"
"
H,
Q
,
*
""
##
",
5
6
1-3
1 Re
$
!** (re
)
*
#J
,
=
'
"
*
5"
",
.
%
'5
*
J
c5"
",.
+
*
"{
) ##
,
5
4
*
"
2J‡,
+*
4
,,##
"
USB 2.<
GH
*
5USB2.0.
LAN
'&
&
:
(INLET 1)
>,
"
,J
*
(INLET 2)
>,
"
AC
Co,%
1-4
C 1 Us,
,,",
,",,"
Display
C"#5
([FUNC1]–[FUNC3]).
/
,"‹
• 4",
• 5",
• ", (",
/",",)
• 4*
*1
• Fun
[FUNC1] 5
[FUNC3] *2
/y
Pre",",5
,",,
5
5
"#
," [SEL].
1
JOG
Us$,,
"
[LOCAL]. +
,
,"",.
Indica"
(",, H5
, ec).
Condi$
Cond
Cance*"""5
t
"
",
,!"
,
,
"
. (J
,",,
"
)
L Light blu ! REMOTE mode.
4",
Light blu",
L blu
4",,: ",
"
mac
.
","
"
",
Regist*""""
*",
5.
2
"
H
LOCAL mode, no
",
5
OFF
L
4H5
.
2
4H5
rror (SYSTEM HALT).
• *
,
,"
#$
"
H,
$
"
H,
. 5
,
*
"
*
"
$
*
H P.1-4
''Q
H ON. ('
""
)
2
*1 : +$
*
(
"
>, ec.) ,"
. G
.
Icon
Conten
$
=*
"
H
ˆ$
="
"
,
!
%
"
1/8
%
"
1/4
%
"
3/8
%
"
1/2
%
"
5/8
%
"
3/4
%
"
7/8
$5
5
$
*
H5
{$
*
†|$5
Indica
,X,H*
H5
,
*
{
"
‰Q
Q|
Indica*
HH,
"
+"
*
J
,X,[
,"
6
1-5
C 1 *2 : Fun
[FUNC1] % [FUNC3]
5
[FUNC1] 5
[FUNC3] $
Icon
Conten
“MENU” ,",5
.
5
"
"",,Q,, ec.
! REMOTE LOCAL ",
5
" FEED COMP, DROP.PO, ec.
",",.
E
.
S,
", in REMOTE ,LOCAL.
E5.
G
,"" MENU ", ,,
G
,"" MENU ", ,,,
.
Us,",
5"$
H",
""
Q.
Us,,
5
, ,",, ,,
",
Q
*
,",
>5
+"
5
!>$
,[,"Q,",Q$
,,.
• "#
",
G
*
H‹",
H
REMOTE mode.
G
*
H#‹",
H
LOCAL mode.
G
*
H‹*",
""
.
G
*
H‹4H5
1-6
C 1 +
%*
,5,
5
l
G"
,5,
{r).
4
,5
+
,,
,,*
Q
,,,Qec.
,,*
.
,,
,
"4H5"5"
"J
Q
• ,
$
,
,,,,
*
"
,##
.
1
• G
,
5Q"
s,
,5,J
5
,
Carr
H5
*
,",Q
*
=,5Q*
,*
‡
s
,,,. ( P.2-4)
%**
G"
5
5
"
. Dur
*,
",Q
,*"
,
5
2
• 5$
"
45
##
,
,Q,
5"
J
,[5
2
2
!
*
H5
*
=,5
H",
5
,
,.
:9**
s
,
5
6
C
1-7
C 1 CROOHJDUHLFDYL
Co*
%USB2.0
USB
Q R
'+W
4H
"""
!%H
"
JV300Q“4,“
“45?"
Hardware"
,
""
.
L
"""USB,X
*[ERROR 10 COMMAND ERROR].
C, hard disk ,"",
.
Conn
!%"
"
J
fac+4K’‰
• RIP ",#
USB 2.0.
• 4*
5
!%Q
5
,*
.
Not
% USB 2.0
• RIP ",#
USB 2.0.
Co*
1
Inser
mac$.
!
Q 0Q JV300 *
personal computer
G
,[ JV300 !%Q!%,##
JV300
""
.
R JV300 *,+4KQ,
#Q
5
$4„@‡‰‰
,+4KQ
USB 2.0
4$
$"
Q Not
%
$ USB /high
G
,5 (""USB USB HDD) ,
USB high speed mode H
personal computer $HJV300Q,##
G
JV300 H
!%$H
HDD +4KQ="
JV300,##"
G,X,*
",
,
",
1-8
%
',
2
9%
:
3
Inser
.
• '
5H5
"
.
+
• $"J
.
• %,
"
,
5=
.
• Co
,
"
"
,##5
.
C 1 InseULUHOHFDUWXFFHGL
LQFKLRVWUR
!
$
*
"
H
conf",,
4,
Inser
*
.
1
2
*
$
&.
Inser
.
Condi
@
",
",
• Inser*
J
,5
,%
• ,?".
: K, C
: C, Magenta: M, : Y,
Blu: B, Light c
: c, Light magenta: m, Light
blu: b
C
$
*,
"$
[INK END] o
”V•",,?.
Q 0
[INK END]
(1) (2) Inser
5
dire
,%.
1
N
(*
5
)
OFF
Descri
N
4H5
• In$5
• In5
• 4
*
(
m)
4
*
(")
2
4H5
• No
*H,[
• N
• (
P.5-8)
$
*
G
H,Q",
"
in LOCAL
(
P.5-6, P.5-8)
!,",
Q
,
,"
.G
LED ","
,
5"Q
cart
2
2
E.) G
H April 2014
Ma‹ U#
U# (LED ",
)
‹ # (LED )
Q 0
[INK NEAR END]
%*H
,**
4
#,H*
,##5
",
5
• H [INK NEAR END], ,
"
5
.(
P.3-7)
6
1-9
C 1 • Us
,$"
5
,#"*"5J
"Q
=,
,
.
• 4
,
5
Q","#
,
,[,".
• "","
*
,,Q
"
4H,
,*,#J
Q$=",=
.
• *
5#
• %
#*
,#"#
• R
"5
.
• "
%X,##
,,*
.
• N
"
J
%X,##,,#"
MIMAKI =,
#,
,*",,
.
•
H"
%X,##
.
• "
"
MDWHULDOL
G
"
,,.
Model
JV300-130
JV300-160
T,
,,
Tarpaulin/ FF(Flexible Face)/ "5QPVC
Max
1371mm
Minim’10mm
Max
",
4,
1361mm
1620mm
210mm
1610mm *1
1.0mm o
5
"J –250mm o
5()
##
–210mm o
5 ()
!##
K#
C**
40kg o
5
"
J
3 o2 ,
##
",
"
5
##
*
*"=##
H5"
J
*
"
#
#Q,"
*1. G
"MARGIN(RIGHT/LEFT)" "
,H",
"
" (-10 mm).
**
'
,
,"
,,
• Us
MIMAKI *
%%Y&/.
",",
,,.
• 9
.
,,#,*"J
#,,,X
",
*"#
*"=Q,$,X,
J
.
,,
*"#
,‡‰"
,[Q,
*"#
• :
,,,,
,,
4
,,,
"
" "Q,
"*
.
• 9
:
S#
##
H",
*"#4~"*HQ
$=
,X
*
!
##
,
,H"#
.
1-10
C 1 MRGDOLWjPHQX
G"
†"=
"="
H$
"/NOT-READY
*"=
5
H
"/LOCA!
L"=H"=,,,
.
"
,X!%Q"
",
Sc$
Local mode
1
",
.
*
,,?
","#
‹ Temperat
"
@‹",",
r
G‹,
,,
.
*
()
2
5
",,5
[FUNC1] – [FUNC3].
[SEL]
5
[FUNC1] ~ [FUNC3]
Pre" [SEL] ,"#5
2
G"=,"
,
‹
• Pre"
,",*
*
• Pre" [ENTER] ,
$
="
*
Q
*
Q
""Q
firmwareQ
2
"/MENU
!","=MENU, pre" [FUNC1] $
"
H in LOCAL mode.
In $"=Q,
",5
5
"/REMOTE
"
",.
6
1-11
C 1 1-12
C 2
0
descri,,,
*
"Q
Q
4$
, ...................................... 2-2
>,
"
................. 2-3
"
............................... 2-3
4,
"
.............................. 2-3
","..................................... 2-4
*........................ 2-4
",##
.................................... 2-5
,,"
.................. 2-9
",
5...................................... 2-9
C"#*
",.................. 2-10
Prepar............................ 2-11
C"#",
",
................................................ 2-11
Test ", ............................................. 2-11
Test ", ........................................... 2-11
!..........................................2-12
, ..................................2-12
,
",,...............................2-12
",
5.................2-13
",
5 ...............2-13
4,
,
,
.............2-13
", ...............................................2-14
,
", ...................2-14
",",...................2-14
%
(Data Clear) ........2-14
".......................................2-14
C 2 6HTXHQ]DRSHUDWLYD
1
2
3
4
5
2-2
/*
$
(
P.2-3).
(
Test (!2-12).
(!.2-13).
P.2-4).
+
(!2-14).
C 2 $FFHQGHUHVSHJQHUHOD
PDFFKLQD
$
G"
H
‹
:
*"
$
J
",ON.
[END/POWER]:
Q$,
>,
5
,
*
5
J
"
$
[END/POWER] H
''Q*
,
,H ON.
1
+*
$:
2
+*
$
.
• "''*
,
,
"
.
• !
"
Q," [END/
POWER].
[END/POWER]
1
$:
• "
,"
*
“I” ,
,
,
*
Q *$
:
[END/POWER]
• firmwareH$
"
H ON, ,"
*,J
.
2
$
.
• "
LOCAL.
3
PC*.
• "
,,
$,"
.
• *,##*
,
,HOFF ,"",
2
4*
,
,HQ"
periodic"
5
,
*
* (flushing function).
4*
,
,H''Q5
5
$,##*
J
*.
Q $
$
&
.
2
4,H,Q5
""
J
"5
$
5
Q +*
$
.
4"
,
H
,,Q*
,X
In $Q
"
t
,,Q,,
"
.
2
Q *
$
:
,##
,,
+*
$
,"
*,
"
Q,
J
p"
*
"
.
C
,"$
,
"
.
• 4"
!%
",
• 4H
,,
• 4
5
(
P.5-9 “”)
Q $
[END/POWER], 99
p
.
G
,
"
*
,
,,,Q,
"Q
,"[END/POWER] ,
mac
,
,?,
,
,
!,
"
*
,
,
5
6
2-3
C 2 ,PSRVWDUHLOPDWHULDOH
3
G"
,X
##
5.
!",5P.1-10 “"
5
”.
• '
5",
$
,
!
5
.
• G
,
##
Q
,[,
"
Q,5"
,##
• *,",
"4*
,
,
"Q5,X
,,Q
$=",,X
Q,*",
• ,
*
,XJ
2 l
,*
• ,
*","
,
L (2 mm/3 mm) ,
H (3 mm/4
mm). (",,
L 2 mm ,,)
*
*
%*.
• ,
5
5"
P.2-4
“!
,
”.
• ,
*,[
$,[#4"*
"Q
,X5
",
,
*
4
Fi
.
5
R
.
• 4
#
.
*
*
,
5.
1
+
.
• G
,H ON
:E [ST.MAINTENANCE - CARRIAGE OUT]
5
"
.(!.4-6 !1,2)
• G
,H,
:
,,
Q,,
"
.
Carr
*
2
.
• Q
,
standard.
L
2mm
(",,,)
M 2.5mm
H 3mm
!#J
1 2 mm.!$
,
, conta
#
• "H " 5
"
,"
,*
.
• G
,*
a$QQ,"
H
Q
H
*
{&>|
Consu
55
,$,
.
2-4
C 2 ##
,,"
.
• '
5##
,""
,
!5"
• #5",##
5
#
,
##"
5"H#"
. #5",##
,##",5
5"*1 #.
#5"
,
5"##
,J
##
#5"
,
2
5"##
,J
##
2
*1. %
$5
Q
5
$
=5Q5#",
"
,X5"
2
5
6
2-5
C 2 1
+
-
:
.
• 5,##
,
,.
,J##
5"
2
C
$***Q.
3
+
-
.
",,
#
,J##
$".
• %
,"
#
##
: 2 3 ,
,J##
Base
!
,
#3,
!
,
#2,
!
- (
$)
• C
5",##
,
#5""
.
2-6
4
+
*
$%
-.
5
"
/
-
.
• C
, 2 3.
• 4,
##
,J##
5
H#
","
6
-
:
.
7
**
mac$.
C 2 8
Inser
$.
10
%*Y
**.
• 55,,##
#,
5"5
##
$
.
11
9
%*
:
.
• !
5
"
5
5.
• G
5,Q,
5,"",
• ##
,X
,
,
.
2
(1) 45##
5
,.
(2) Inser5,5J
.
,,5
• 45##
"
,55
mac
.
(3) ###
mac
5H#.
9
+
%*:
(1) ,,
.
(2) #
mac
.
(3) X5##
""J
#"
• G
5Q
#
,4"5
Q"
#$"
,X
.
• 4
5
H
>
$
H5Q"," “MEDIA SET
POSITION R”. ,
5
2
2
5
,
5
5
6
2-7
C 2 12
"
*.
,
"
#
13
C$
$
.
14
Pre
,
“ROLL” .
• 5.
• G
H [MEDIA RESIDUAL] 5
"
(!.3-10), ",""$
=5"J
,H.( P.2-9)
15
9
%*.
(
P.2-9)
(1) 555
5
5
,"
,"
[T] .
(2) Fi
5
.
(3) "Q5
5.
• %
,
,55,5
.
2-8
C 2 &/%*
G
[MEDIA RESIDUAL]5"
H
P.3-10),,,",""
“ON” (
$
=5"
,5
H.
1
*
4
"
5
"
*
,"
=$
&/%*
.
, !
ON/ OFF
s
2
3
&/
%*
.
Pre
Pre
.
UP
J (REVERSE)
DOWN
s
(FORWARD)
,"
5",*
.
,"
5",*
>,
"
(*,
"
$
*
H##)
ON/OFF
,"
H5
"
"
,X
"
{"
H",
““
|4
H,,5,
5Q"
"
#
j
"
{
5,
,"
")
#
:
D"
(,5)
2
2
,
2
Sca
5
50% x
100% x
• 0
7
*
5
"#
• 0
7
*
5,X
"%X","
$=*""
6
2-9
C 2 %*
55
##
Q5
,J##
1
4
**$
$%
:
• !
5.
$
**.
,
• 5,
,
"
, 40mm. 4H,[Q,##
.
#
%
40mm
2
Inser
%*
%**.
• S"5
"
5
r5*"=.
5
3
W
%*
:
.
• S"5
"
5J
5*"=
• 4
5,Q,
5,"",
,"
"
5
6
7
Pre
.
Pre
"LEAF" .
%*.
(1) @
5
(2) 5
Q,
"=,
(3) Local $
"
H
comple
Note
%*
• G
5Q
#
,4"5
Q"#$"
,X
.
• 4
5
H
>
$
fiQ"," “MEDIA SET
POSITION R”. ,
5
.
5
,
,5
2-10
C 2 PreparDUHLULVFDOGDWRUL
C
*
,
*
",,X"#
4,,
LED ,
"#
decid,
.
1
2
In Local, .
• "=,*",
*
!
Y
.
• Sele
5"
,
[S][T][W][X].
3
*Y
.
• *
",H"#.
C
!"#>",
",,J
“Heater” ",
P.3-5)
G
,""#",",
"=",
.
",",
5.
• ",H","OFF" default.
• ",H,#,H
t",,X
",
• %
,"
5
}‰"
,H",
",
Q
",*"#
J
te.
1
Pre
,
(Heater) in LOCAL.
• %",",",
d.
2
tempe
*
:+
Pre
+
j Sele
[W][X]
:",
[S][T]
*
*
",
,5
=(X')
H,
75 mm ,
,. *
",
(Y') QH,
15 mm *"=
5
(Y'),X"J
#
[MARGIN] FUNCTION mode. (
P.3-6)
,X"#
2
• 3
:
4
Pre
:
• G
",
",Q*
"
2
• "
LOCAL.
• Us"
", 20J30°C. temperatur,##
",
*"#
.
15 mm
(Y’)
s
,
• Pre" [FUNC3] (OFF) , 2 ,,
{OFF|.
O,,Q," [FUNC1] ,"
", 10°C.
2
75 mm(X’)
5
6
2-11
C 2 Test GLVWDPSD
C
.
4",",,
d5
"*
{
"
).
Rela
•
4H",5
• 4H",,
*
•
4H,
1
",
.
"
" 2
" 1
Not
• G
5Q,
J
"
"
"A34
5, ",=5
"=
.
• G
##
Q5"
,"",
"4##
H#
Q$
=*""
.
P.2-4
Pre
(TEST PRINT/CLEANING),
LOCAL.
• %",TEST PRINT MENU.
• Pre " [S][T] ,"#*
"
",.*
"
$=
"
$
",,".
• G
",,,"#
*
"
"SCAN DIR." "FEED DIR.", ,
,"",,.
1
2
P.2-4
2
Pre
.
3
C
.
• ",,.
• "
",Q"
LOCAL.
• 4H
"Q"
*,
• 4H
"Q,
.Ტ
P.2-13Უ
Test 4",
",,
d5
"*
{
"
).
In,
*
"
",
",,"=",
,,[4
*.
: 4",H "FEED DIR."
: 4",H "SCAN DIR."
2-12
,
C 2 3XOL]LDGHOODWHVWD
!
4
,
#,,4
,
,
Sele
,:
,PSRVWDUHODFRUUH]LRQHGHOIRJOLR
Corr$
=5
,
"
.
4
HQ,
5"
*""
",",H
.
• "
[MEDIA COMP.] $
##
Q
5
*
",
!##
"
.
!"",Q"
5
##
Y
5
Q$=*""J
=
5.
• G
",
,,"
Q
,",
5Q,
NORMAL : 4
"
SOFT
: 4
$
"
{,|
HARD
:4
",
,X"J
""
, NORMAL o
4'
*
@
",
",
5
*
"
5
1
• @
",5
"
.
• "
=
5"
*
5.
(TEST PRINT/CLEANING)
in LOCAL.
• CLEANING MENU ",,?.
Second5
2
Pre
.
• NORMAL : Sele
"
$
.
• SOFT
: 4,.
(in cas)
• HARD
: Se
",
"
, [NORMAL] o
[SOFT].
3
4
Pre
.
Y
(D).
Pre
• ,
Q," [FUNC2] ,
.
,
=
,
• !,}’Q,
"#
c.
5
6
Pre
.
*
.
• R,,",,5
H
d
".
• 4$=*""
",
,.
• !,,,. (!.4-6)
(
• *.P.†J›|
!"5
1
2
"
%
,,
4
.
Pre
%*
2
2
%*. ( P.2-4)
Pre
, (ADJUST) in LOCAL.
• ADJUST MENU ,,,?
3
Pre
:
4
C
.
• %",
",""
• in "+":
*
5
• in "-":
*
5
.
•4"#
"30",
*
5"# 0.1
mm.
2
5
6
2-13
C 2 6HOHSRVL]LRQLGHLSXQWL 'DWLGLVWDPSD
VLVSRVWDQR...
G
"#
",{,J
5>,
Q)Q
,
,,
*
J
,",#
#
• G
5Q,
"
"
"A3. 4
5
Q",=5
"=
.
• G
##
Q5"
,"",
"4##
H#
Q$=*""
.
1
: ( P.2-4)
2
Pre
in LOCAL.
3
Tra
PC.
E
di
,
$,
,
,
,5J
"
.
In $Q
,
,
H 4.0.
1
Pre
, (ADJUST) in LOCAL.
• ADJUST MENU ,,,?
2
Pre
, :
.
• @
“DROP.POScorrect”
3
4
Pre
.
• ","
,
.
• @
",",{"
","
"1, " 2,"
3... *
",.)
• ", REMOTE, ,
PC.
• ,ACTIVE lamp
condi
",
• !""
Q5"
instru
, software",.
R
360 /540 /720 /1440 DPI
Num,
Uni : Unidire
Bi : Bidire
=
Std : =Standard
Hi : Do,,=
Pre
1, .
,
Vd : #
Nd : "
• @
"
: -40 40
• C
",,
*
"
*
J
,,5"
.*
•G
H -40†‰Q J
*",,
,
,’
2-14
5
**}Y
corre~*Y
:
6
Pre
.
5",
4
.
• =",,X"#
5,
,
*
",$
",
G
55
C 2 ,
,
",
*,J
",.
1
Pre
(LOCAL) dur.
• ",
",.
• 4
",*
,!%
.
• ","
H
r,"
[REMOTE].
(Data Clear)
4"",Q
=
r.
1
Pre
, (DATA CLEAR) in LOCAL.
2
Pre
.
• Q,
Local.
2
*
+
,
,Q,5
$
$,
1
2
In Local, .
•
"=,*",
*
• !"
[T]Q
55
,
.
2
Pre
.
2
• 5
.
• G
H",Q"=
LOCAL.
5
6
2-15
C 2 2-16
C 3
Setup
0
descr
5"
,5
"
"
",*........................................... 3-11
SETUP MENU .................................... 3-2
",*
=(Temperatur/ L
) .3-11
#SETUP MENU .......................... 3-3
",4%+4%..........
3-11
",
5................ 3-4
",CONF 3-11
4,
,
,
........‡Jœ
",.......................................... 3-12
",4%...................... 3-5
Ini",
......................... 3-12
",Logical Seek ............................... 3-5
",",................ 3-6 +,%+...3-13
#+INFORMA............. 3-13
","
............ 3-6
""
.............................. 3-14
",
,
.............. 3-6
,
",
“+"
”
",="
......... 3-7
,
............... 3-14
",,"............. 3-7
",
",.............. 3-15
",*
,...... 3-7
",%+!+ ............. 3-15
M+%%& .................. 3-8
",
......... 3-15
#M+%%& ...... 3-9
",,
"
+%. 3-10 +INFORMA .....................3-16
#+' ............ 3-17
",*
="
............. 3-10
@
5"
......................... 3-17
",,?5"
.... 3-10
", L+ ............................... 3-10
C 3 Setup
0(18SETU3
%
SETUP MENU, ,",
",
"
: Pre",
+SETU!, o,"
pre
.
: Pre",,".
: Us,
,"",.
: Pre",
5"
*",
Q.
‹ "'SETUP MENU
3-2
C 3 Setup
"'SETUP
• !",
,"$
""
,5
,5$
",software !* host PC.
• =
: DRYING TIME/ MARGIN (LEFT and RIGHT)/ VACUUM FAN/ FEED SPEED
• G
"
,55_!Q",
,"“&“$
• ,"
4",
“&“Q"
5
=
",
"
• !",5software!, 5"
, software!.
Fun
FEED COMP. (
=
0
*1
-9999 to 0 to 9999
Us,",
",
*
"
5
-40.0 to 0 to 40.0
Us,,
,
",
.
PRINT
OFF/ 20 to 60 °C
(OFF/ 68 ~ 140°F)
",
P.3-5)
HOST/ON / OFF
OFF
",*"#
",.
HOST/0.0 to 9.9 sec
0 sec
",",,H
0 mm
0 mm
",
*
",
#
e
5.
HOST/ WEAK/ STANDARD/
STRONG
STRONG
",,=#"
5.
10 to 100 to 200Ჟ
100 %
C"#=*
"
5.
P.3-4)
DROP.POScorrect (
P.3-4)
PRE
HEATER
(
P.3-5)
1
POST
LOGICAL SEEK (
DRYING TIME
(
P.3-6)
SCAN
MARGIN/LEFT (
P.3-6)
MARGIN/RIGHT (
VACUUM FAN (
-10 to 85mm
P.3-6)
P.3-6)
FEED SPEED *2 (
P.3-7)
2
OFF, FILE, LENGTH,
TIME
INTERVAL 1 to 1000
FILE
AUTO
CLEANING
(
P.3-7)
TYPE
LENGTH
INTERVA
0.1 to100.0m
L
TYPE
TIME
",*,
,",
,"
",
NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD
INTERVAL 10 to 120 min
TYPE
INTERVAL WIPING (
NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD
P.3-7)
3
NORMAL/ SOFT/ HARD
3 to 255 Ў , OFF
",*,
,J
"
",.
*1. GH*",
,",$
H,5,5_!{|,,,=*",J
,"
.
*2. G
", “100%” o,[Q",
,"
","
Q
,X
",55
,
*X,##","$=*""
4
5
6
3-3
C3 Setup
Corre**
%*
%*
Corre$
="
,J
,".
4
H,,,Q,
5"*""
",",=
.
• "
[MEDIA COMP.] ##
Q"J
*
",!5##
r"
!"",Q"
,
##
Y
5
=
$=*""J
5.
• G
",
,,"
Q
,",
5Q,
@
",
",
5
*
"
5
*
"
5,X
mod="
",5.
1
Pre
;ADJUST)
in Remote.
2
Pre
.
• @*
"
: -9999 9999
• ""5#
*
J
"
.
3
Pre
.
• "5H
• 4,"[ENTER] ”•Q$
""=",
"
{G
"
5,
"
Q
|
Second5
!"5
1
2
"
• "
",5
• "
=
5"
5.
. ( P.2-4)
Pre
;"'
LOCAL.
+...
G
"#
",{,
5>,Qec.) ,
,
,
*
,",#
(Bi)
",
E
di
• %",=+SETUP.
3
4
5
Pre
.
• @
“FEED COMP.”.
Pre
.
,
$,
,
,Q
5"
.
In $Q
,
,
,
H 4.0.
C
.
• %",
",*""
di
.
• in "+":
5
• in "-":
5
.
• G
"#
"30", 1
$. ( P.2-4)
2
Pre
LOCAL.
• !",
"QH
5
"
œ‰‰"".
(MENU)
in
• +SETUP ,,,?.
5"# 0.1 mm.
3-4
6
Pre
.
7
Pre
Q
.
• 4",
"
.
• 4H
5Q
*,
, 7 ,55.
3
Pre
, :
.
• @
“DROP.POScorrect”.
C 3 Setup
4
5
Pre
.
Logical Seek
• ",".
• @
",",. ("
p"
1, 2, 3... in ",.)
7
Mo&
LOGICAL seek 7 OFF
Pre
" 1, .
• @*
"
: -40 40
• C
",,
"
*
,,5"
QH
.
• 4
H -40 40, *",,
,
,’
6
*,
",
LOGICAL
SEEK, ""
5$.
*}Y
~*Y
:
Pre
.
UNI-DIRE
M
Mov&
LOGICAL seek 7 ON
UNI-DIRE
2
':
Mov"
Fun
Pre-heater
Us,,J5,""J
p,#",.
Print-heater
$=*""
",.
Post-heater
*
,",
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,+SETUP.
Pre
Y
1
Pre
;MENU) n
LOCAL.
• ,,+SETUP.
2
3
3 , Pre
.
• @
“LOGICAL SEEK”.
3
Pre
-
Y
• =
: HOST / ON / OFF
.
• @
“HEATER”.
3
1
M
",
Pre-heater /Print heater / Post-heater p.
2
BI-DIRE
M
+!
1
M
",
' :
Mov"
Q -
THEATER
BI-DIR
4
Pr
Q
.
4
*
.
• +
j [S][T]
• : [W][X]
4
Pre
Q
.
5
• !"[FUNC3] (off) , 3 ,,
{OFF|.,,Q,"”'+%}•,
"
", 10°C.
6
3-5
C 3 Setup
*
*",
",Q
",J
,",",.
• SCAN
: @
",",*
J
,
{
",#J
Q"
5",
,J
,5,
|
• 4,=*",
RasterLink, ", “Host”.
• “SCAN” ",
"
"
"“Pause Time per Scan” in RasterLink.
• ,,55
",
Raster
‚. 4","
“Host”, ",
= in “PRINT END= 0 sec.”
.
1
Pre
;MENU) in
LOCAL.
• ,,+SETUP.
2
4 , Pre
.
*
",
*
",
#
".
offset "
15mm H",
,$.
• 4,=*",
,5_ RIPQ
", “Host”.
• ,,5"
5_!
J
(RasterLink). G
‚Q",
"
“Host”,",=
“Margin,55
ž‰""“
.
• *",
"
"
$
5.
1
• ,,+SETUP.
2
3
Pre
4
Pre
.
• @
“DRYING TIME”
3
4
Pre
.
(PAGE>).
Pre
“Margin/L” o “Margin/R”, .
• =
: HOST / -10 85 mm
Pre
t*
Y
.
• ",",,
"
",!5
RIP, sele
“Host”.
• =
:
Host o,, 0.0 sec. 9.9 sec.
• +
: [S][T]
• : [W][X]
5
Pre
;MENU) LOCAL.
Pre
.
5
Pre
.
Q
• '
", ,##
,
,"Q"
H",5
mm o"
$
,
.
",,=#"
"
",
,=#"
"Q
,",,H".
1
Pre
;MENU) in
LOCAL.
• ,,+SETUP.
2
Pre
.
(PAGE>), • @
“VACUUM FAN”.
3
4
Pre
.
Pre
.
• =
: HOST/WEAK /STANDARD/ STRONG
5
3-6
Pre
t
.
C 3 Setup
/
C"#=*
"
"
",.
1
Pre
LOCAL.
4
(MENU) in
Pre
3 .
(PAGE>), • @
“FEED SPEED”.
3
4
5
, .
• 4
,,"
,
3, *",
H.
!r FILE
: 1 1000 file
!r LENGTH : 0.1 100.0m (
"
0.1m)
!r TIME
: 10 120min (
"
10min)
• ,,+SETUP.
2
Pre
5
Pre
, :
• @*",
: NORMAL/ SOFT/HARD
Pre
.
Pre
Y.
• =
: HOST / 10 200%
6
Pre
.
7
Pre
t
.
Pre
t
.
•4
Q"
$=*""
,##
"
*
$5
$Q
#
1
!","
"
"
5",
","
",Q
,""
!
*",
,"
,$:
• PAGE
: ",
,
"5",.
• LENGTH : ",
,
l
",.
• TIME
: ",
,
",",.
"
,X
*,
",#
",
,.
1
Pre
LOCAL.
G
H,",",Q
,""
,"
*
.
55"
Q
"*
Q",
,[#
,
.
1
Pre
;MENU)
(<<) in LOCAL.
2
Pre
.
3
Pre
4
Pre
.
5
Pre
t
.
(MENU) in
• ,,+SETUP.
2
Pre
4 .
(PAGE>), • @
“AUTO CLEANING”.
3
Pre
•
, .
!,"
“PAGE”, “LENGTH” “TIME”
.
FILE
: G
H"
"
",",Q"
,""
LENGTH : G
,
",Q"
,J
""
TIME
: G
H,",",Q
"
,
automatic"
.
• 4
",,"Q,"J
“''“Q,,, 6.
2
3
•@
“INTERVAL WIPING”.
*
.
• @*",
: 3 255 Minut, OFF
• G
H",[OFF],
,,.
4
5
6
3-7
C 3 +
0(18'(//$0$&&+,1$
",
"
5
,$"
5=
,",
",
",
"
: Pre",
MACHINE SETUP MENU, ,
,",
.
: Pre",,".
: Us,
,"",.
: Pre",
5"
*",
Q.
‹ MACHINE SETUP MENU
3-8
C 3 +
"'!!"8
Fun=
efault
+*%
NONE/
10 ~ 600min
30min
4
,
H55
",",Q"
,
""
{OFF|.
TAKE-UP UNIT
ON/ OFF
ON
!",
*
=,
"
.
TENSION BAR
ON/ OFF
OFF
!",
#,
,
.
AUTO Power-off (
P.3-10)
TAKE-UP UNIT
(
P.3-10)
MEDIA REMAIN (
LANGUAGE (
TIME (
P.3-10)
P.3-10)
P.3-11)
UNIT/ TEMP. (
P.3-11)
UNIT/ LENGTH (
P.3-11)
KEY BUZZER (
P.3-11)
CONFIRM. FEED (
P.3-11)
ON/ OFF
OFF
!
$
=""
English
ȋțȳǴ
Deutsch
Français
Español
Italiano
Português
English
@
"#
.
+4h ~ -20h
Japan time
@
5.
1
°C (Centigrade)/°F (Fahrenheit) °C
@
",*
=",",.
mm / inch
mm
@
",*
=",
*
OFF / ON
ON
@
",
,$
,"
ON / OFF
ON
",*
"
"
,
",,,,
Set the network.
NETWORK
(
P.3-12)
Check IP Addr.
@
*
!"
"
Check MAC Addr.
@
*
!"
"
2
DHCP
ON / OFF
G
H ON, *
!
DHCP.
AutoIP
ON / OFF
G
HON, *
!
"
, AutoIP. , DHCP H ON,
DHCP ha,=.
IP Address *1
",*
!"
*1
", gateway 5"
Default Gateway
Set the DNS ",*
4"
SubNet Mask *1
RESET(
3
",
"
"‚"
P.3-12)
*",
default.
*1. S,X",$
DHCP AutoIP [OFF]
4
5
6
3-9
C 3 +
*'"
G
,
,
t",",Q"
,
""
1
Pre
;MEN'~
in LOCAL.
• %",+MACHINE SETUP.
2
3
Pre
.
4
Pre
t
.
• @
“AUTO POWER OFF”.
Pre
Y
‚%*
@
","##"$
=
m"
.
$
="
"
0‚ in Remote.
&/
(!X, $
5Q
d
7
"
5
"ON"
",.)
0‚&/
$
=5"
J
"
Remote.
di
7
"OFF"
• $
="
",
5
$
="
"
.
• "{
$
=
r"
) ""$
##
. P.2-9
• *",
$
5
H5
H
J
"
"
"
*",
.
• =
: n
, 10 600min
• 4"
!%
auto-power-off, Q"*,
",
""
.
1
Pre
;MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
/
*
",
,
*
="
.
G
Q$
H
#
optional,
5",
.
1
Pre
(MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
•,,,? MACHINE SETUP MENU.
2
Pr
, .
•@
“TAKE-UP UNIT”.
3
Pre
.
• =
: ON/ OFF
4
Pre
t
.
2
Y
Pre
.
• @
“MEDIA REMAIN”.
3
4
5
ON/OFF.
Pre
Pre
.
Pre
t
.
L#'
!"#
".
1
Pr
;MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
2
3 , Pre
.
• @
“LANGUAGE”.
3
*Y
.
Pre
• =
ᲴȋțȳǴ / English / Deutsch /
Français / Español / Italiano /
Português
4
3-10
Pr
t
.
C 3 +
+#!'+
!",*,{5|.
1
Pre
;MENU)~
in LOCAL.
!,
,"
1
2
4 , .
2
3
Y
.
• +
/M/#
/
:
[W][X].
• ƒ"ƒ#
ƒ
:
[S][T].
4
Pr
(>>)
()
.
• @
“KEY BUZZER”.
• @
“TIME”.
Pre
(MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
•%", MACHINE SETUP MENU.
Pre
Pre
3
Pre
-
Y
• =
: ON/ OFF
4
Pre
t
.
Pre
t
.
• G
,H "OFF", ,Q"
Q"
*,
Q
,X
1
• 4,X",-20 +4 .
9"!"
/ (Temperatur/ L*$
2
",*
"
5
,
",Q
@
",
="
1
Pre
;MENU~
in LOCAL.
1
Pre
;MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
2
3
Pre
(>>) .
2
Pre
;>>) ;3 )
.
3
• @
“CONFIRM. FEED”.
Pre
Q
“UNIT/TEMP.” o “UNIT/LENGTH”, .
3
• =
: ON/ OFF
4
Pre
.
5
Pre
t
.
• =
j°C / °F
• =
*$j mm / inch
Pre
Y.
4
Pre
Q
t
.
4
5
6
3-11
C 3 +
!
*",
“Network
Configurator”,"
,*",
,Mimaki. !Network Configurator,
c " Driver / Utility" ,
download "‚Engineering (http://eng.mimaki.co.jp/download/).
1
Pre
(MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
10
• =
: ON/ OFF
• 4 DHCP AutoIP OFF, ,",*
J
!. !$Q,,
14.
11
Pr
.
12
Pre
Y
:
.
13
Pre
14
Pre
.
•%", MACHINE SETUP MENU
2
Pre
;>>)
.
(4 )
• @
“NETWORK”.
3
Pre
.
• @
“CHECK IP ADDRESS”.
• @
*
!
"
.
• G
"
Q,"
[ENTER].
• ,
Q",
,"*
!
"
4*
!
H"
, “0.0.0.0”.
4
, e
Pre
5
Pre
, .
• 4
,"DEFAULT GATEWAY,
4ADDRESS SUBNET MASK .
• 4DHCP AutoIP OFF, ,",
DEFAULT GATEWAY/ DNS ADDRESS/ SUBNET
MASK. !,"$Q,
,14.
.
• !*",
Q,
"
,
.
.
• @
“CHECK MAC ADDRESS”.
• @
*
MAC a"
"
.
• G
"
Q,"
[ENTER].
.
Pre
Ini
!"",
“SETUP”, “MAINTENANCE”
“MACHINE SETUP”,
,
.
• @
“DHCP”.
6
Pre
.
• =
: ON/ OFF
• G
H ON, H*
! server &%!
7
Pre
, .
• @
“AutoIP”.
8
.
Pre
• =
: ON/ OFF
• G
HON, *
!
"
, AutoIP. , DHCP H ON,
DHCP ha,=.
9
Pre
, .
• @
“IP ADDRESS” .
3-12
1
Pre
;MENU) ~
in LOCAL.
• %",MACHINE SETUP MENU.
2
3
4
Pre
;<<) .
• @
“RESET”.
Pre
:
• ",
=
5
.
Pre
t
.
C 3 +
0(18SHULO&21752//2'(*/,8*(//,
",,
5
"
.
: Pre",
INFORMATION MENU, ,
,",
.
: Pre",,"
.
: Us,
,"",.
: Pr",
5"
*",
, ec..
1
2
3
"'9"
Fun
Printing Check (
(ON)
Check
Interval
Action
P.3-15)
=
fault
ON/OFF
OFF
4
",$
*
",
.
LENGTH
0.1 to 50.0m
30.0 m
,
",.
FILE
1 to 100
30 file
,
"5",.
CLEANING
OFF/ SOFT/
NORMAL/ HARD
SOFT
",,,
,.
RETRY
COUNT
0 to 3
1
R,
,
"",.
NOZZLE RECOVERY
(
P.3-15)
ON/OFF
OFF
Judgement Condition
(
P.3-15)
1 to 180
1
*1
5
",$
,.
",$
“+J
"
”,
.
(Max 16 per 1 )*2
*1. G
",
",Q
*
",
.
*2. ",Q,
5
.
6
3-13
C 3 +
*
""*
",
• *",
“Printing Check”.
• ",
RETRY COUNT Printing Check $
",
.
1
2
3
4
5
*J =
"
.
J * J =
4,
,[
"
“@
J
“Q
,
55
.
'
J =
4,*,
,
,["
“@
“Q*,
,
55J
.
J = ,
55"J
"
,.
• “Printing Check”.
=** 45
,["
Q
H",#
",",
",.
„'*„
Q 07 “'*”
J ",
",.
Q 0
%
** J ",
",“Printing Check” ,J
""
,*Q ", “Printing
Check”
.
3-14
C 3 +
Sele
ON 55
*
",
.
1
Pre
;MENU) ;3 )
in LOCAL.
''#!!
",,J
"$
"
1
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,NOZZLE CHECK MENU.
2
3
Pre
.
• @
“Printing Check”.
Pre
ON, pre
.
• ,, ",“Check Interval”
.
•Sele
OFF ,
",
!, 11.
4
5
Pre
.
2
, Pre
.
• @
“NOZZLE RECOVERY”.
3
4
ON/OFF, :
Pre
Pre
t
.
$
",
$",.
: $
"5",
J
"",.
2
",
,"
1
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
(3 )
• ,,NOZZLE CHECK MENU.
Pre
.
• *",
"#
*",J
s
, 5.
LENGTH : 0.1 100 m
FILE
: 0 300 file
7
Pre
8
9
Pre
.
2
.
3
3
Y
pre
.
Pre
• ,"#
*
.
.
• @
“CLEANING TYPE”.
4
Pre
*
Y
.
5
Pr
t
.
Pre
,
.
Pre
, Pre
• @
“Judgement Condition”.
• ,," ,",“Action” .
=
j OFF/SOFT/ NORMAL/ HARD
.
Pre
t
.
4
Q
5
=
: 0 3
11
1
.
FILE
10
• ,,NOZZLE CHECK MENU.
Pre
• sele
*
,
“LENGTH”
o “FILE”.
LENGTH : 6
(3 )
Q
6
3-15
C 3 +
0(18,1)250$=,21,
4,
5"
5"
$"
.
,",
5""
5"
"
.
: Pre",
INFORMATION MENU, o,
,",
.
: Pre",,".
: U,
,"",.
: Pre",
5"
*",
, ec..
3-16
C 3 +
"'9"
USAGE
Descr
WIPING
$
H,
WASTE TANK
$
H"
*,,#"
,
J
,,",=#.
PRINT LENGTH
",5
$""
.
PRINT AREA
*",5
$""
.
USE TIME
",",
5
$""
.
Spout Rubber
", Spout Rubber. ($
MBIS)
VERSION
*
5"
"
.
LIST
4,
",",
"
.
Ink REPL. Report
4",
*
"
.
ERROR HISTORY
"
"
5
$""
4," [S][T], "
"
(
/m/
//minut) *>"
*
5.
1
=%
1
Pre
2
Pre
3
Pre
.
4
Pre
(MENU) 4 in LOCAL.
2
• ,,INFORMATION MENU.
%
.
• %5“INFORMATION MENU”, *
5"
• 4
[LIST] , 2, ",",
"
.
3
Q
.
• G
,Q," [FUNC2] "
[RESET?] ,,,?. G
,"
[ENTER], ",
.
• !"
5
"
“WIPING information,” “WASTE TANK information” “Spout Rubber” in
US, ,X
.
%
+!': Pre" [FUNC2]
%
+W+ : Pre" [FUNC1]
Spout Rubber
: Pre" [FUNC3]
4
5
6
3-17
C 3 +
3-18
C 4
Ma
0
descri,
,,[""
5"
"
Q
,,,*
Q,,"
Ma
............................................... 4-2
Precau
"
........ 4-2
$,............................. 4-2
!,5 ................... 4-2
!, ..................................... 4-2
!
"....................... 4-3
!," ....................... 4-3
M++...................... 4-4
!
"++ ... 4-5
Ma
,,
............ 4-6
!,,, ................... 4-6
!*........................... 4-7
*
.......... 4-8
G
"
,
, ............................................... 4-9
!,
...................................................... 4-11
,
...............................4-12
Re", ......................4-13
'
"
".........4-13
",
55"
....4-13
",
,# 4-14
",
, ...4-14
",*
....................................4-14
*
#
.............4-15
4
"# ..............................4-16
%"#, ..................................4-16
4,,"#,
*
.....................................4-16
4#,*
,"
"
5"..4-18
4"........................4-18
C 4 Ma
MaQXWHQ]LRQH
"
"
,J
"
$
,"
,
"
.
%
G
,5
"
H,Q,J
,
"#"#
dilu
$
.
Precau
,
$
J
,
ma
.
• G
$,Q
s,
.
• N
"
""
4"
,,
"
,
"
.
!"
$"
Q
,
"
,
Q,
5
.
• ",*
"=
"
,
"=*
"
,X
,
"
.
• !
,
*
55#Q
H
"
55(flushing) J
"
$
5",
#,J
",.
• 4",5"H
Q,
*
"
"J
{
,
| ) *
,
,"
"
.
,,5"
, ,
,
".
!
,"#, ,
Q
J
, ec.
• 5
Q,J
Q,,
$,H,
,*
• #
Q
$
c"
#G",J
5"
• ,,""*
"J
. !#",
• !
*
$,
,"J
Q,H,##".
• G
,H,
, ,
"#$,
.
&
Us$,,5,*
.
T$
4-2
!**
V$"
(SPC-0369)
[@
,"
]
#"
V#$, A29 (SPC-0137)
[@
,"
]
• !",,,
5.
• !,"
5"
"
{
|
!$,
"
.
C 4 Ma
,"
,
,5
54
H,
,Q
"
",##
"
.
Us
Q",J
",5
4,,"H,,Q,QQ
"
,X
""
st",,Q
",
".
!,,""
G
,5
5HJ
,Q,*"=
,,J
, 1 P.4-11 “!*
*
”, ,,.
$
!,"
1
4
"
+
%%
2
2
4
,"
• ,"
!
,
.
4
5
6
4-3
C 4 Ma
0(180$187(1=,21(
'
",
,"
"
",
"
Q,
",
,"
: Pre",
MAINTENANCE MENU, o,,
",
.
: Pr",5
"
.
: Pre",,".
: U,
,"",.
: Pre",
5"
*",
‹ "'"'
‹ $
&
%~:
4-4
C 4 Ma
"'"'
=
+*%
!"
,5
4, 5,,,5
,,QQ,.
CARRIAGE OUT
(
P.4-6)
NOZZLE WASH
(
P.4-7)
STATION
MAINTENANCE
1 to 99min
DISWAY WASH
(
P.4-8)
CUSTODY WASH
(
P.4-9)
WIPER EXCHANGE
(
P.4-16)
"#$
,"
,5
,,
*
E#,",
1 to 99min
$
"
=,
,
,"#,"
"
#
.
Us$
,4,
Q
"
,H
!",
Q*
,*
NOZZLE
RECOVERY
(
P.4-12)
PRINT
4",
",
5
ENTRY
Regist*5
5
“PRINT”.
RESET
Reset
5
1
!5
"
""
",*
,*
5
"
.
AUTO
MAINTENANCE
(
P.4-13)
REFRESH
TUBE WASH
CLEANING
CLEANING TYPE
", !",*
*
,55"
F
=J
!",*
*
,#
,
. !",*
*
,,
2
NORMAL/ SOFT/
!",,,
HARD
INK FILLING
(
P.4-14)
'
,*
*
INK TANK
EXGHANGE
(
P.4-18)
Reset
,#,*
WHITE
MAINTENANCE
(
P.4-15)
E"
*
#
.
2
4
5
6
4-5
C 4 Ma
MaQXWHQ]LRQHGHOODVWD]LR
QHFDSSLQJ
3
$
:
"
,,*
s,Q
,,
. (SATION MAINT.)
• !"
"Q
,5$
"
,,*
5
,
‹
• +j 4,*
• j $
G
"
,"
Q,
,,*
,
,
,
4*"
H"
""
,
, (!.2-13) ,‚$
,"
Carr
4
R
.
• ,
,,
"=.
Pro
+
• V$"
(SPC-0369) o
K’ˆ$
(SPC-0137)
• 4 (SPC-0527) G
• ,
$
"
,,!
• ,5
,,J
"
G
,Q,"
[FUNK1] ,5
P.4-6, 1 2)
5
:
• "*
,
,,
"#
J
,"
.
"
"
"
,"
.
+
4
,,,,5$
J
"
,"
*$=*""
"J
"
"
#
.
• 4,
$
H"
,5".(
P.4-16)
• G
,,Q5
,J
"
,
,H,##
$=*""
.
1
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
4-6
Pre
.
• ,,.
+
6
.
• "*
"#
,
ma
.
"
"
"
C 4 Ma
7
"
*.
• Inse,
,,
"=.
5
Y
.
(1) ,,,"
Q,
5,
,,J
.
(2) !,,,
"#$
,"
(SPC-0369:,
/
SPC-0137: ,
#"
)
Pro
• "
"
"
,"
(3) Inser,
,
,
,
"=
8
Pro
*.
• "*
""
c,,
"#
,"
"
"
"
,"
.
1
#
2
9
10
Pre
.
6
• "*
"",,J
c
"#
,
"
.
• "
"
"
,"
.
• A",Q,
,""
.
2
C$
$
Y
.
• ,*,
Q"
,1.
7
*
．
• 4
Q",J
m
,"
H"4
*H##
,"
Q,"J
[FUNCTION] ,
*
1
*Y
.
4
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
3
Pre
.
Pre
, .
• @
“NOZZLE WASH”
,,
4
5
• @
“STATION”.
$
.
8
C$
Y
.
6
4-7
C 4 Ma
9
Pre
7&
*
Y
:
6
*
．
• 4
Q",
""
,"
4
*H##
,"
Q,"
[FUNCTION] ,
.
=
j 1 99 minut (Unit=: minut)
• $
,"
"
,,
#.
• ,,“Please Wait” ,?5
H
H,J
",
",
• 4*"
H
,
, (
P.4-12) o,
H,[Q
#
55
!
$
"
,,*
J
{
"
|,J
*
• 4
Q
"
,"
,,
",,,
,"
5
*
.
• !",,*
J
sQ
$
,
"
4
H"Q*,
,=,,##
.
1
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Pre
.
3
Pre
• @
“STATION”.
Y
.
• @
“DISWAY WASH”
,=,
• *,
,,
,"
5
H
H",
4-8
4
$
:
5
Pre
.
$
• *,
,,
,"
5
"
.
7
C$
$
.
C 4 Ma
0$
*
G
"
,
"
,[Q
5
,,
,,*
4
• Us"
“ON” 5
,*
5
""
,,*
.
• *,X*
,
J
,HOFF ,"",.
.
(1) ,,
Q,5
,
,"=.
(2) !,,,
J
"#
,"
J
. (SPC-0137 o SPC-0369)
!
"
"
J
,"
.
(3) Inser,
,
J
,,
"=
Pro
C
[NEAR END] o [INK END]?
• *
#
$
.
A",Q
"
" “$
“Q*,
• 4
*,
J
"$
" o "
".
1
• G
",""
“%
*
“Q
#J
Q,*,
5 P.4-16 “4",
"
5",#”
s
.
1
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
2
5
• G
,H",,,, [COMPLETED
(NEXT): ENT]. ,5
,œH"J
,Q,"”•
4,"[ENTER] ,",
c",Q"
,,
.
•,, MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Pre
.
3
Pre
• @
“STATION”.
Pre
.
2
3 , .
•@
“CUSTODY WASH”
",
• G
,,>,,H
",Q,,“COMPLETED”. ,J
5
,‡H",Q,"
[ENTER]. 4," [ENTER] ,"
,",Q"
,
,
6
*.
• "*
"",,J
c
"#
,"
.
• !
"
"
J
,ma
• A",Q,,
,""
.
#
4
5
6
4-9
C 4 Ma
7
Pre
.
13
•4
Q",
""
,"
4
*H##
,"
Q,"J
[FUNCTION] ,
.
• G
H",$
, ,,
”%!(NEXT): ENT]. ,
5
,¢H",Q,"
[ENTER]
4," [ENTER] ,"", $J
Q
,
.
8
*
．
*
．
• 4
Q",
""
,"
4
*H##
,"
Q
,"[FUNCTION] ,
.
• 4
Q
"
,"
,,
.",,,
,"
5
*
.
• 4
Q
"
,"
,J
,
",,,
,"
5
*
.
14
C$
$
.
• ,*,
Q"
,
2.
9
10
C$
$
.
c
7&.
Pre
• @*",
:1 99 min (
*
= 1 min)
11
Pre
.
12
$
.
4-10
• .
•G
","
,
,
"
.
C 4 Ma
3XOLUHODWHVWDHOHSDUWL
FLUFRVWDQWL
5
$
.
• N
5".
,*
"
"
m,QH
5"
$
,
Us
Q"*
,,X,
5
*
,*
,Q
5"
+
4 (SPC-0527)
• G
• %
(*
*
) .
• ,
$
,
*
,*
"
,##
*
• *
4*
,Q
##
$
1
Pre
1
*(N
to.)
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
3
Pr
• @
“CARRIAGE OUT”.
Pre
!
, .
• @
“HEAD MAINTENANCE” carr,*"=
"
.
4
2
.
$
:
6
7
Pre
.
C$
$
Y
pre
.
2
• ,*,
Q"
LOCAL.
4
5
6
4-11
C 4 Ma
5LSULVWLQRGHJOLXJHOOL
NOZZLE RECOVERY: G
"
Q,
#
"
,",.
1
5
(1) Sele
"
1 10
,"
[S][T] ,,"
[ENTER].
(2) Regist
"
,,"
[S][T] ,,"J
[ENTER] .
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Pre
Regist
*$
NOZZLE RECOVERY .
, .
• @
“NOZZLE RECOVERY”.
3
Pre
.
• ",",
• Sel
“ENTRY” , “4,,J
“ (! 4) ",”
+, N. o OFF
=
H1
"
: 1 10
H2
E",,
+
N.184
A B CD A B CD
!*
"**
H1-A
H1-B
H1-C
H1-D
H2-A
H2-B
H2-C
H2-D
+
N.128
N
• !*
£Q
",
",“&}JK“ “H1-D”.
• G
5Q,
"
5"
"A3. 4,
5,[Q",=
m=.
4
+N.16
:
*'*
N.
Sele**
NOZZLE
RECOVERYY Y
.
.
(H1 H2)
6
Stat
1
16
Target ,,
2
128
Target ,,
3
184
Target ,,
4
OFF
N
5
OFF
N
Pre
t
.
• 4,
5
}‰,}
.
• $5
Q",
,
"#.
• G
",H,
5J
H
Q
Q
20 120 "=
(front). ",,,
5"J
.
• G
*
#
Q",
,
,
,
.
4-12
C 4 Ma
Reset
1
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
,
Pre
key.
• @
“NOZZLE RECOVERY”.
3
Y
Pre
.
)XQ]LRQHGLPDQXWHQ]LRQH
DXWRPDWLFD
!""
$"
Q,",
5
"
"
",$
5
m
".
!,#""*
*
"
"
"{5
J
"
").
4,
",
,",5
"
":
• G
"
"
"
Q,
H",$
H,",
",
5
"
"Q
"
"
• 4'
"QJ
$
4
*H$
,"
Q*,
#
="
,
,##.
• @
“RESET”.
4
;PAGE>)
(<<) *$
Y
.
Pre
• A,,
"
5"
5
6
Pre
.
Fun
REFRESH
Pre
Q
.
TUBE WASH
CLEANING (Interval)
CLEANING (T,)
1
Descri
@
",*
,
55"
.
@
",*
.
2
@
",*
,J
@
",,,.
• 4,," “Check waste ink” *,
",
5
"
"
,
!†J}›“4
#*
“
.
• G
*
,
"
H,
Q
#*
2
*
%%
@
",*
,
"
,$
=*
,
1
Pre
4
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Y
Pre
.
•@
“AUTO MAINTENANCE”.
3
4
Pre
.
5
• @
“REFRESH”.
%
$Y
.
Pre
• =
:",
,
.
5
Pre
.
Q
4-13
6
C 4 Ma
*
**
!",*
#
,*
,*
J
*
#.
• !#
'
", $
4
*HQ*,
#
="
,
,##
.
1
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU
2
5LHPSLUHG
LQFKLRVWUR
'
,*
1
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
4
Pre
.
5
Pre
6
7
Pre
.
, .
• @
“TUBE WASH”
4
i**Y
.
Pre
• =
:",
,*
5
Pre
t
.
*
**
G5
,!",
$
H"
,"
J
.
@
",,,*
opera
,.
1
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Y
Pre
.
• @
“AUTO MAINTENANCE”.
3
Pre
Q
“Interval” o “Type”, .
4
Pre
.
• =
: ",
,*
.
• : SOFT/ NORMAL/ HARD
5
4-14
Pre
.
Q
-
.
Pre
.
Pre
.
3
• @
“AUTO MAINTENANCE”.
3
Y
Pre
• @
“FILL UP INK”.
Y
Pre
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• Soft
: Us
,
,,Q$
,[
.
• Normal : Us
","
in.
• Hard : Us
",HQ
"
.
• 4
“Soft” , 4, a,,=
",
","
.
4
“Normal” o “Hard”, , 6.
,
.
• *
5
""
Pre
.
C 4 Ma
0DQXWHQ]LRQHGHOO
LQFKLRVWURELDQFR
*
#
,[5"
• 4
",,["
Q*
#
,X
*
"
• G
*
Q*,X
J
""
.
• "
,,
*
,"
*
#
#
.
• "
$,"
"
.
• Us*
,5.
$7$
%, 7
*
:
• G
,’†
"
.
• G
"
HQ,,"
“SHAKE WHITE INK CARTRIDGES”
.
1
1
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
•,, MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Pre
(PAGE>) ,
key.
• “WHITE MAINT.” =
.
3
4
Pre
.
Pre
.
5
Pre
%
.
2
• *,
"*,
","
Q,
J
,.
2
4
5
6
4-15
C 4 Ma
6RVWLWXLUHLFRQVXPDELOL
5
*
.
• 5,
,,
"=.
Pro
,
"G
,?
"J
“Replace a WIPER” H
,4#
"*
,5
5
• G
",""
,
s
,Q
5"
*"=,
,,
J
*"=,,
,Q,X
,
• ,,,H
,
$
,
55
,,
6
Inser
.
• Inse,
,,
"=.
Pro
1
Pr
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
2
Pre
.
3
Pre
• @
“STATION”.
4 , .
• @
“WIPER EXCHANGE”
"J
7
• ,*,
Q"
LOCAL.
H,
.
4
C$
$
Y
.
Pre
.
• ,,.
.
+
**
$
*
,,
#
,*
#
"
"
$
=*
"
G
$
=,5Q"
"
"
5".(G
,,$"Q
#,*
.)
• ",,$
* 80%
(1.6L ) # 2L .
Carr
"**%
in LOCAL
4-16
1
** “Check waste ink”
.
2
C
$
:
• 4HQ,"
[S][T] • , (80%), pre" [ENTER] ,
LOCAL.
• G
("
) Q
,
“4#,*
”. ( P.4-17)
C 4 Ma
+
$
1
** “Check waste ink”
.
2
3
4
Pre
+
$
:
8
(1) Prepar
# (SPC-0117).
(2) Inser#,*
J
,"
.
(MAINT.).
N#
,*
C
.
+&/$
*Y
• Co
5
$
=*
display $
5"J
"
4
55
display, in [ENTER]Q,"
[END] ,, 6.
5
6
*
Y
.
Pre
9
C$
%
.
%
$
.
2
10
'"#,
*
7
1
• *
$,
5
. *
,""
5
,"
*
Pre
.
• $
=
"
"",
.
2
*
*
$
:
4#,
*
•
,,
#*
.
4
Cap,
5
6
4-17
C 4 Ma
+
$
$**%
2
Pre
, $
.
• ",.
4#,*
,"
,,"
5"(,"# 2
,
,*80% (1.6L)), ", 0% *
5"
*
"
5"
1
* 6 9 in "+
$
" (.4-17) .
2
Pre
;MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
3
4 , .
Carr
3
Pre
• @
“INK TANK EXGHANGE”
4
5
%
:
6
Pre
.
+
/
.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
*
=.
R"*
=.
Mo
=
4
*
=,5"
*
=.
=
Pre
(v) .
• ,,",,$
=
#.
• @
$
=*
#"
.
+
"
"G
"
,[Q
(SPA-0107).
• "H55'
.
• %
"
5
,#"#
Q"
"
cutter "
.
• G
"Q
"re
5",
.
1
Pre
(MENU)
in LOCAL.
• ,,MAINTENANCE MENU.
4-18
Cutter
4
C$
$ FRONT!.
5
Pre
.
C 5
0
descri",
,
5
"
,
,#",,
"*,?
,#"............................................................................5-2
,
............................................................ 5-2
"
", ................................................ 5-2
"
>"H
................................... 5-2
",
", .. 5-3
4H$=*""
.................................................. 5-3
*H.......................................................................... 5-3
,,*,*
..................................... 5-4
/* ...............................................................5-5
"
................................................................. 5-5
* ............................................................................. 5-9
C5 ,QFDVRGLSUREOHPL
,,,"
#
Q,"
"
5
4,#",Q
*55 MIMAKI.
",$H
*
"
"
!%
%
"
"
$7
*
‡
:
No
No
!
7ON ?
!
$7"ON" ?
No
%
"
. ( P.2-3)
*
"
!$
G$
"
"
!X5
$
5
",
"
,,"
H","
No
I
%7&*?
No
I
%7*
?
Us5
,,.
%
5.
+
!$
$$
7
?
+
4*
ƒ
7
4"
H"Q,##"
H
"
",
5
+
*?
I
7
$
/*?
No
Us
"
.
No
",
"=,.
+
I
*
‡
:
5-2
No
Us
,,"
ma"
( P.2-8 , P.2-5)
ˆ
!
***
C
,
#.
No
!$7 ON ?
$:;:~-‰
+
No
!
7‡
",",. ( P.3-5)
+7
&/*
G
,$=",
H5
,,",
,
,#"
$=*""
4
Q
J
#*55MIMAKI.
%
1
(1) E,. ( P.2-13)
(2) "
*
. ( P.4-6)
!$/
/
;
(3) E5
[FEED COMP.]. ( P.3-4)
dir)
(4) 4,,
Q"
2
.
C
(1) E5
[FEED COMP.]. ( P.3-4)
Di%%
*&
(1) E5
[DROP POSITION]. (!3-4)
#$
:
(1) E,, ( P.4-6)
(2) E,,, ( P.4-6)
(3) !. ( P.4-11)
(4) ,[NORMAL]. ( P.2-13)
(5) ",INTERVAL WIPING. ( P.3-7)
2
!*7
G
*
"
*
H
,," P.2-13, 55,
,
.
Q !
*
P.4-7.
2
Q !
%*
P.4-11.
Q Rec
*
P.4-12.
5
6
5-3
ˆ
$
G
H
,#"
*
Q,?"
""
",Q,=
#
4
"Q"""
• +
,#"
,Q
",
,
",
Q"
",
,=5
,
*
4
Q
,"
,
MIMAKI.
=
$
"**
,X
5""
,
.
1
2
5-4
Pre
in LOCAL.
Pre
.
ˆ
(UURUH0HVVDJJLG
HUURUH
4
,#"Q
,?,,"*
",,,,*.
"**
Erro
&*
Messag*
Caus
Solu
INVAILD OPERATION
:MEDIA UNDETECT
*pera
,X ,J
•
H
H
"
INVAILD OPERATION
:MOTOR POWER OFF
"HOFF ,,
H,.
• R
LOCAL *,
a"
*
INVAILD OPERATION
INK ERROR
4H5
*
• E*,
,
.
INVAILD OPERATION
COVER OPEN
,
,, • E*,
,
"
H,
co,.
INVAILD OPERATION
DATA REMAIN
.
E,"H
.
1
• E*,
,
.( P.2-15)
2
2
2
5
6
5-5
ˆ
Messag* in LOCAL
Messag*
Caus
Solu
Can't print/cartridge
4
5 (
#
",#
5
*in(",,).
Check waste ink
C
$
=*
#.
,#,*
"
,$
=,
#,*
$
=*
.
Replace WIPER
,,J E"
t
",.
"#,
HEATER Temp. error
Powered off
,,$
"
,
4","*Q
,,H5J conta
“ERROR 710 heater temp error”.
#,*
NO MEDIA
N
". O,,Q
.
DATA REMAIN
",
in LOCAL.
MACHINE TEMP./H **°C
MACHINE TEMP./L **°C
4
",".
4"*
",J
,,
"Q
#.
! REMOTE ",.
O,,Q
",
,X
",
#,H",
*"#
J
*
(",
) H,,.",*"#
,
,,5 (20°C 35°|
,X
",
#,H",
*"#
J
*
(",
) H,,#
Shake WHITE INK cartridges
5-6
+
",J
*
#
,J
"
*
#
"
*
.
Wash liqid cartridge none
$
,
"
H
,#,",
$
.
,X. (,
"J
")
Wash liqid end
$
,"
H5
.
,# 4$
.
,",
,X{,J
"
")
NCU SENSOR LEVEL LOW
#= NCU s"
.
Nozzle Missing
Print Stopped
",H
,H
J ,( P.2-13) "
.
5 { P.5-3).
4
NCU.
Conta#
.
ˆ
Messag*
Caus
Solu
NCU FLUSH POS
Nozzle check OFF
• ,,
,
“ERROR 655 / NCU FLUSH POS”.
NCU CENTER POS
Nozzle check OFF
•,,
,
“ERROR 654 / NCU CENTER POS”.
NCU SN ADJST
Nozzle check OFF
NCU5
dur
Q", •,,
,
“ERROR 656 / NCU SN ADJST”.
H
5
H OFF.
NCU NZK CHK (HW)
Nozzle check OFF
•,,
,
“ERROR 652 / NCU NZK CHK (HW)”.
NCU NZK CHK (MARK)
Nozzle check OFF
•,,
,
“ERROR 653 /NCU NZK CHK (MARK)”.
NCU CONNECT
*
=NCU H
5
,X.
• 4,
"
Q,
""
J
tQ,
.
4",Q
J
#
.
REPLACE NCU
#=NCU H,,#,
5
5
,X.
• *
NCU.
• Conta
#,
.
REPLACE NCU INK PAD
• *
*
NCU???
,,
*
NCU H,
. • Cont
#
NCU ERROR
Nozzle check OFF
NCUJ
5
Q
st",H
5
HOFF.
1
2
• Conta
#.
2
2
5
6
5-7
ˆ
$
**
H"
. (P.3-17)
Messag*
Caus
Solu
WRONG INK IC
,IC *
,X
""
• R",*J
"
• 4",
"
"
Q
#
,
.
INK TYPE
*
H,J • C
,*
$5
"
.
,*"
.
INK COLOR
*
HJ
$5
"
.
WRONG CARTRIDGE
5-8
• C
*
J
,*"
• C
,*.
4H5
5"
• ,%*
.
ᲢཎƴțȯǤȈǤȳǯᲣ
NO CARTRIDGE
*
H
slot.
• Instal
slot
,*
INK END
*
H5
.
• 4,*J
"
.
INK NEAR END
*",
J
.
• *
,5
!
Expiration
*
H$5
.
• 4,*
!X"
$
,"
.
Expiration:1MONTH
,5
cart*
H,.
• H,Q,J
5
5
"
.
Expiration:2MONTH
*
J
H,{H,
"
,5).
• *,
"
.
ERROR 63c
INK REMAIN ZERO
*
J
H,{
," • 4
.
).
ˆ
"**
G
",
"*Q"
*
#$
4",Q
#*55MIMAKI ,
.
Messag*
ERROR 122
CHECK:SDRAM
Caus
Solu
*HPRAM.
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO UNDER
• 4,
"
,
""
.
="
H,J
• 4",Q
,",H5
#,
.
="
H,J
,#",H5
ERROR 129
BATTERY EXCHANGE
#*
H
.
ERROR 130
HD DATA SEQ
4H5
$
5"
ERROR 146
E-LOG SEQ
SH5
*
"
"
$
"*
ERROR 151
Main PCB V1R2
4H5
5
!%K}’@p
,.
ERROR 152
Main PCB V2R5
4H5
5
!%K’œ@p
,.
ERROR 153
Main PCB V3R3
4H5
5
!%K‡‡@p
,.
ERROR 154
Main PCB V05
4H5
5
!%K‡œJ}p
,.
ERROR 157
Main PCB VTT
4H5
5
!%[email protected]
,.
ERROR 128
HDC FIFO OVER
ERROR 16e
Main PCB V3R3B
4H5
5
!%K3.3VB p
,.
ERROR 15f
HEAD DRIVE HOT
driver% .
ERROR 171
NEW HEAD CONNECT
*
",.
• Conta#,
.
1
2
2
• 4,
,
"
J
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
2
ERROR 186
HDC OVERFLOW
ERROR 186
HDC UNDERFLOW
*
5"
*
",.
5
ERROR 187
HDC SLEW RATE
ERROR 188
HDC MEMORY
ERROR 18a
Main PCB V_CORE
4H5
PCB,
, .
6
5-9
ˆ
Messag*
Caus
Solu
ERROR 18c
Main PCB V12
4H5
PCB ,
,.
ERROR 190
Main PCB V42-1
ERROR 192
COMIO PCB V1R2
ERROR 193
COMIO PCB V2R5
ERROR 194
COMIO PCB V3R3
4H5
COM16/32IO
PCB .
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
ERROR 195
COMIO PCB V24
ERROR 1a0
SLDR2H PCB V1R2
ERROR 1a6
SLDR2H PCB V2R5
ERROR 1a7
SLDR2H PCB V3R3
4H5
SLIDER2H PCB
.
ERROR 1a8
SLDR2H PCB V5
ERROR 1a9
SLDR2H PCB V42
ERROR 201
COMMAND ERROR
ERROR 202
PARAMETER ERROR
ERROR 304
USB INIT ERR
,USB .
ERROR 305
USB TIME OUT
4H5
"
d,+4K
ERROR 401
MOTOR X
*,,
motor¦.
ERROR 402
MOTOR Y
*,,
motor§.
ERROR 403
X CURRENT
*
J •4,
"
,
"¦.
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
*
J
.
"§.
ERROR 404
Y CURRENT
5-10
"
"
.%#
*
5
,
.
• Us
*
5,
*
,"5
""
"# ,5.
.
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
ˆ
Messag*
ERROR 423
TAKE-UP TENSION-BAR
ERROR 425
Take-UP WRONG
ERROR 429
Take-UP LimitDETECT
Caus
Solu
Error
#,
,
.
• H*
#
,
.
• N
"#"
*
#,
• C
",,"
4H5
,#"
#, • ",J
tensi
,
"
"
SW. J
• ,
#,
t#,
.
,
,[
4
Q
,,
#,
,.
5
5"
"
,*
Q
‚ AMF.
*,
LIMIT b
.
• ,
#
,
,[
,
,.
• Conf"*
="
",
"
#
ON.
ERROR 44f
Take-UP Roll Sns Err
"
• ,X
"
.
ERROR 505
MEDIA JAM
"H
. R"".
ERROR 509
HDC POSCNT
4H5
HDC.
ERROR 50a
Y ORIGIN
,
*
Y
H.
2
4
".
2
ERROR 52a
LEnc.Count HDC[____]
ERROR 52c
MEDIA WIDTH SENSOR
"
H
"
.
• C
,
. (
P.2-4)
• !
. ( P.4-3)
• 4,
"
Q,
""
,
ERROR 516
MEDIA SET POSITION R
"H,
5
*area.
• C
,
. ( P.2-5)
ERROR 528
PUMP MOTOR SENSOR
"
,",
• 4,
"
Q,
""
,
4",J
Q
55
#,
.
ERROR 602
CARTRIDGE END
'
(
,XQ
,X
,
set*
†)
• 4
.
,IC *
,X"
.
• J
"
.
• Reinser.
• 4,
"
Q,
""
J
tQ,
4",
Q
55
#.
ERROR 608
WRONG INK IC
1
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
ERROR 50f
L-SCALE BLACK
ERROR 529
LEnc.Count HPC[____]
• C
",,"
• Conf"*
="
5
J
4¨"
.
5
6
5-11
ˆ
Messag*
Caus
Solu
ERROR 627
RE-INSERT CARTRIDGE
%*H
slot in H
,
",
• .
.
ERROR 628
WRONG INK CARTRIDGE
4H5
,#"
5"J
, IC *
J.
,
,.
•
(,,*
#
).
ERROR 63c
INK REMAIN ZERO
*
"
H‰
{5
*
>$
*
†)?
• 4
.
ERROR 64C
NCU ERROR
H,
,#".
ERROR 650
NCU CONECT
*
= NCU H.
ERROR 651
REPLACE NCU
#= NC+ H,,#,
"
.
5
,X.
ERROR 652
NCU NZK CHK (HW)
ERROR 653
NCU NZK CHK (MARK)
ERROR 654
NCU CENTER POS
• 4,
"
Q,
""
,
.
4",Q
55
#
.
NCU "
*
,H
5$
*
J
.
• C
QQ
5$
*
Q,,,.
,
NCU H.
ERROR 655
NCU FLUSH POS
5-12
ERROR 656
NCU SN ADJST
• C
Q
5$
*
Q,,,.
#=
H. • 4",,,J
rQ
55
#
.
ERROR 657
REPLACE NCU INK PAD
,,
,*
NCU H,
.
• Cont
55
#.
ERROR 6558
NCU SENSOR LV LOW
#= NCU "
.
• 4
NCU.
Conta
55
#.
ERROR 702
THERMISTOR CONNECT
• C
"
"
,*.
• 4,
"
,
"
"
J
""
.
dH5.
• 4",Q
#,
.
ERROR 710
HEATER TEMP ERROR
*
*
"
",J
G
5$*
J
"",
Q
"
,
.
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",,
#,
.
ERROR 901
INVAILD OPERATION
Q5
,X
.
• R
"Q
sta*,
,"
.
ˆ
Messag*
Caus
Solu
@"
",.
• %
. (!.2-15)
ERROR 90d
NO HEAD SELECT
""
H “0”.
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
ERROR 90f
PRINT AREA SHORT
• C"#5
##J
55
.
"
• 45"
,H
,",
55
.
H,*
Q,*
J
,"
55
ERROR 902
DATA REMAIN
ERROR 04
PARAM ROM
,"
.
• 4,
"
,
""
.
• 4",Q
#,
.
1
SYSTEM HALT
Messag*
Solu
2
SYSTEM HALT (*)
000 : MESSAGE
• 4,
"
,
""
4",Q
"
#J
,
. (“000” H N.*)
SYSTEM HALT (*)
406 : WIPER ORG
• ,
,
• 4,
"
,
""
4",Q
"
#J
,
.
2
2
5
6
5-13
ˆ
5-14
C 6
Appendi
0
cont
,5
5
",
.
Specific ..................................................................................6-2
4,5"
.............................................................. 6-2
4,5,*
............................................................... 6-3
",
,
..............6-4
",*
*
.................................. 6-4
5"
.......................................................6-5
C6 Appendi
SpecificKH
+%$$
=
",
JV300-130
JV300-160
Met
",,Drop-on-demand
Specif
2 5
=", (scan x feed)‡60×360dpi/ 540×360dpi/ 540×720dpi/ 720×1080dpi/ 720×1440dpi/ 1440x1440dpi
#
#"
(Sb) : 6 color(Y,M,C,K or Dk,Lc,Lm)
(SS)‹ 9 color (Y,M,C,K, Lc,Lm, Or, Lk, W)
In
'
.
,:
'
2 cart/color (
4-color|
Capacit=
Y,M,C,K, Lc,Lm, Or, Lk, Bl, Lb, Dk : 440cc
W, Si : 220cc
,,,
T/ FF(Flexible Face)/ PVC
"5
Max. ",
1361mm
1610mm *
Max
1371mm
1620mm
"
##
",,
Margin
!
"
Min"
210mm
4,
1.0mm o
5
"
##
*2
4,,J : –250mm o
5
,, : –210mm o
5
1.0mm o
5
!##
*1, *3†‰kg o
5
"
##
2 o 3 ,
4,",#
'
J
'##
5
J##
H5
Q5"
.
Max
1371mm
Mini"
210mm
1620mm
4,,
5'
"J
: 15 mm (Default) Front:120 mm Re : 150 mm
4,,
##
'
"J
: 15 mm (Default) Front :120 mm Re : 150 mm
!
± 0.3 mm o ± 0.3 % ",
R,#=
± 0.2 mm o ± 0.1 % ",
Perpendic=
± 0.5 mm / 1000 mm
,,œmm o
5 / 10 m
*
Sele
"
,
(1.8/2.3/2.8) + 1 mm o + 2 mm a*
.
,X.
+
=,,
Y cutter. !
(,) : 0.5 mm o
5.
,
"
,
"
J
.
4#,# ( 2,000 cc)
Interf
USB 2.0 (Ethernet 10 BASE/ 100 BASE E-mail function)
Com
MRL- III
dur
standby
5 58 dB (A) (FAST-A, Front & Rear & Left & Right 1 m)
"
dur
",
5 65 dB (A)
*4
dur
",
Standard
Po
%
"
6-2
5 70 dB (A)
VCCI-Class A, FCC-Class A, UL 60950, CE Marking (EMC,Low Voltage Directive,Machinery Directive, RoHS Directive), CB Report, RoHS
AC100 - 120V/ 220 - 240V ±10% ×2 50/60Hz ± 1Hz
1440W x 2 o
5 (AC 100 - 120V)
C6 Appendi
=
"#
"
JV300-130
",
20 °C 30 °C
+"=
35 65% Rh (
)
",
20 °C 25 °C
@
",
± 10 °C / h o
5
!
Equivalent
"55
"«
2000 m
!
"
170 kg
200 kg
2525mm
!5
=
*1.
*2.
*3.
*4.
JV300-160
2775mm
700mm
1392 mm
G
“MARGIN(4/44)” "
Setup H","
" (-10 mm).
*"
,,"
5
4
##
$
H5"=
%
,: !
"
: 4
1.7.4.2 2006/42/EC
+%$
$
=
$
$
'
%
#"
C
Magenta
Light c
Light magenta
Light black
K
Color
Blu
Magenta
Light blu
Light magenta
Deep black
%,=
220cc / 440cc per cart
S
G,H",#*
.
"*,
5
,=
",
%
10 35°C (","
)
,
""
,
Q#
Q5#
Transpo
0 40°C
",
5 -0 °C , 40 °C.
2
2
• "
*
*
.
• *
,X
5,
,
• G
*
$Q*
Q$="#*
#
%
*
"#
.
2
6
6-3
C6 Appendi
2UGLQHGHOOHLPSRVWD]LRQLDVHFRQGDGHOWLSRGLLQFKLRVWUR
",
*
",
H
,
$
*
*
H
*
• *
*
*
'
4 color
6 color
8 color
6-4
#"
M
#"
M
M
M¨
BlKl§
C%
BlKl§
C¨
Or%
YV o DkV
Y§
KV
LmVo DkBl
Ym Kc
Lk§
LmV
Lc
C6 Appendi
0RGXORGLULFKLHVWDLQIRUPD]LRQL
Us$",,#"5
"
""
",,5«
55
.
Tele%
"$
+
+
%
$ *1
"**
2
Conten
$
2
2
*1. %5
P.3-16
6
6-5
C6 Appendi
6-6
JV300-130/160 -"
, 2014
MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO.,LTD.
2182-3 Shigeno-otsu, Tomi-shi, Nagano 389-0512 JAPAN
D202681-12-26062014
© MIMAKI ENGINEERING CO., LTD.2014
NH
FW : 1.3